502-1198 Rev A
Engineering
Report 502-1198
09Mar06 Rev A
3 dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
©2006 Tyco Electronics Corporation
Harrisburg, PA
All International Rights Reserved
* Trademark
| Indicates change 1 of 335
LOC B
1. SCOPE
This report covers t esting performed by Telcordia Technologies Inc. on Tyco Electronics 3 dB SC
Si nglemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuat ors to the requirements of Telcordia GR-910-CORE,
Generic
Requirements for Fiber Optic Attenuators
. A summary of this testing is shown below. A full record of the
test ing (Telcordia T est DA-1543) begins on page 2.
Summary: 3 dB A ttenuators
Performance Cri teria Attenuation Tolerance Spec: Comments
± 0.5 dB
)
IL 0.5 dB
4-1 R Meet optical & damage criteria FAIL (See below)
4-2 R Controlled Environment PASS
4-3 CR Uncontrolled Environment PASS
4-4 R Non-operating Environment: PASS
4-5 R (lo temp, hi temp, hi rel humid) PASS
4-6 R Humidity/Condensation PASS
4-7 R Water Immersion PASS
4-8 R Vibration PASS
4-11 R Side Pull (during)
)
IL @ 1625 i1.04: 0.56 dB
)
IL @ 1625 i1.06: 0.66 dB
)
IL @ all 4 i1.10: 1.29/1.82/2.04/1.53 dB
Side Pull (after)
)
IL @ 1550, 1625 i1.06: 0.64/0.84 dB
)
IL @ all 4 i1.10: 1.23/1.82/2.04/1.54 dB
4-12 R Cable retention
)
IL @ all 4 i1.09: 1.73/2.17/2.19/2.19 dB
4-13 R Durability PASS
4-16 R Impact PASS
4-17 CR Optical bandpass PASS
4-18 CO Optical bandpass PASS
4-19 CR Optical bandpass PASS
4-20 R Optical bandpass PASS
4-21 CR Change in Attenuation FAIL (See above)
4-22 CR Change in Attenuation FAIL (See above)
4-23 CR Attenuation Tolerance PASS
4-24 CR Attenuation Tolerance PASS
4-25 R Attenuation increments/range PASS
4-29 CO Attenuation increments/range PASS
4-30 R Reflectance (</= -40 dB) PASS
4-31 CR Reflectance (</= -55 dB) PASS
4-33 R PDL PASS
4-34 CR PDL PASS
4-35 CR PDL PASS
4-36 CR PMD PASS
4-37 R Damage PASS
Note:
During failure analysis Tyco internally re-tested 3 dB samples that failed Side Pull (after) and Cable Retention.
No failures were reproduced.
See Test Report G912-008 for more information.
502-1198 Rev A
Test Location: Piscataway, NJ
Report Format:
Verizon Format:
Client Format:
Other Format:
Prepared For: Tyco Electronics Corporation
Prepared By: Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
Issued: February 3, 2005
Prepared By: Christopher Hood
Approved By: Rudi Schubert
Reviewed By: Osman Gebizlioglu
✓
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
This document and the confidential information it contains shall be
distributed, routed or made available solely to authorized persons
having a need to know within Telcordia, except with written permission
of Telcordia.
Features, Functions & Performance
Analysis Test Report
for
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode
Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
Telcordia Test Report No. DA-1543
Issue 1, Revision 4
Page 1 of 334
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Copyright Page February 3, 200 5
DA-1543
ii
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Test Report for Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber
Optic Buildout Attenuators
This document was prepared by:
Telcordia Technologies Fiber, Transport, and Synchronization Technologies Group
For more information, contact Telcordia Technologies at 1.800.521.2673 (from the USA and
Canada) or +1.732.699.5800 (all others), or visit our Web site at:
http://www.telcordia.com.
Copyright © 2005 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. This document may not be
reproduced without the express written permission of Telcordia Technologies, and any
reproduction without written authorization is an infringement of copyright.
Telcordia Contacts
Administrative Technical
Rudi Schubert Osman S. Gebizlioglu
Director Program Manager
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
One Telcordia Drive, RRC-4D656 One Telcordia Drive, RRC-4D655
Piscataway, NJ 08854-4157 Piscataway, NJ 08854-4157
+ 1.732.699.3460 + 1.732.699.3378
Supplier Contacts
David Fisher Christina Bennett
Manager, Product Assurance/ Product Engineer
Fiber Optics Test Lab Fiber Optics Business Unit
Fiber Optics Business Unit Tyco Electronics Corporation
Tyco Electronics Corporation P.O. Box 3608
P.O. Box 3608 M.S. 258-05
M.S. 258-29 Harrisburg, PA. 17105-3608
Harrisburg, PA. 17105-3608 + 1.717.986.3142
+ 1.717.986.5501 + 1.717.986.5965
+ 1.717.986.3244 christina.bennett@tycoelectronics.com
david.fisher@tycoelectronics.com
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005
iii
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Trademark Acknowledgments
Telcordia is a trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.
All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
February 3, 200 5
iv
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Contents
v
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Contents
1.0 Administrative Data (not from GR-910)
1.1 Description of Test Item(s) (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.2 Part Number(s) and Serial Number(s) of Test Item(s) (not from GR-910) . . . . 1–1
1.3 Location(s) of Manufacturing (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.4 Test/Evaluation Location(s) and Dates (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1.5 References (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
2.0 General Information
2.1 General Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2 Attenuator Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3 Attenuator Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.3.1 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2.4 Recommended Methods and Procedures (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2.5 Test Equipment (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2.6 Optical Data Guidelines (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2.6.1 Acquisition of Optical Data (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2.6.2 Analysis of Optical Data (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2.7 Test Sequence and Schedule (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2.8 Test Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
3.0 General and Design Criteria
3.1 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.1 General Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.1.1 Criteria - General Documentation (heading not from GR-910) . . . 3–1
3.1.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.1.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.1.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 3–5
3.1.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.1.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.1.2 Workcenter Information Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.2 Marking, Packaging and Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.2.1 Criteria - Marking, Packaging and Shipping (heading not from GR-910) . 3–6
3.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.3 Physical Design Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.3.1 Optical Fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.3.1.1 Criteria - Optical Fiber (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3.3.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3.3.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Contents February 3, 2005
vi
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 3–14
3.3.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
3.3.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
3.3.2 Optical Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
3.3.2.1 Criteria - Optical Connectors (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . 3–14
3.3.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15
3.3.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
3.3.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 3–16
3.3.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
3.3.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
3.3.3 Cleanability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
3.3.3.1 Criteria - Cleanability (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
3.3.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
3.3.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
3.3.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 3–19
3.3.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
3.3.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
3.3.4 Intermateability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
3.3.4.1 Criteria - Intermateability (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 3–20
3.3.4.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20
3.3.4.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–21
3.3.4.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 3–21
3.3.4.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–21
3.3.4.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–21
3.3.5 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22
3.3.5.1 Toxicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22
3.3.5.2 Corrosion Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22
3.3.5.3 Dissimilar Metals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22
3.3.5.4 Fungus Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23
3.3.5.5 Flammability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23
3.3.5.6 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23
3.3.5.7 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–25
3.3.5.8 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 3–25
3.3.5.9 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–25
3.3.5.10 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26
3.3.6 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27
3.3.6.1 Criteria - Safety (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27
3.3.6.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27
3.3.6.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–28
3.3.6.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 3–29
3.3.6.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29
3.3.6.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29
3.3.7 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29
3.3.7.1 Criteria - Mounting (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . 3–30
3.3.7.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–30
3.3.7.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–31
3.3.7.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 3–32
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Contents
vii
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.7.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–32
3.3.7.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–32
3.3.8 Index Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33
3.3.8.1 Criteria - Index Matching (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 3–33
3.3.8.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33
3.3.8.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–34
3.3.8.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 3–34
3.3.8.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–34
3.3.8.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35
3.3.9 Change of Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35
3.3.9.1 Criteria - Change of Attenuation (heading not from GR-910) . . . . 3–35
3.3.9.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35
3.3.9.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–37
3.3.9.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 3–38
3.3.9.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38
3.3.9.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38
4.0 Performance Criteria
4.1 Environmental and Mechanical Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.1.1 Controlled Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.1.1.1 Criteria - Controlled Operating Environment (heading not from
GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.1.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.1.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.1.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 4–6
4.1.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4.1.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.1.2 Uncontrolled Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.1.2.1 Criteria - Uncontrolled Operating Environment (heading not
from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.1.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.1.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
4.1.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 4–18
4.1.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
4.1.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
4.1.3 Non-Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26
4.1.3.1 Criteria - Non-Operating Environment (heading not from GR-910) 4–26
4.1.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–27
4.1.3.2.1 Low-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock . . . . . . . 4–27
4.1.3.2.2 High-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock . . . . . . . 4–28
4.1.3.2.3 High Relative Humidity Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–29
4.1.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–31
4.1.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 4–32
4.1.3.4.1 Low-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock . . . . . . . 4–32
4.1.3.4.2 High-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock . . . . . . . 4–33
4.1.3.4.3 High Relative Humidity Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–34
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Contents February 3, 2005
viii
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–36
4.1.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–36
4.1.4 Humidity/Condensation Cycling Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–45
4.1.4.1 Criteria - Humidity/Condensation Cycling (heading not from
GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–45
4.1.4.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–45
4.1.4.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–46
4.1.4.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 4–47
4.1.4.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–48
4.1.4.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–49
4.1.5 Water Immersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–55
4.1.5.1 Criteria - Water Immersion (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 4–55
4.1.5.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–56
4.1.5.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–57
4.1.5.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 4–58
4.1.5.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–59
4.1.5.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–60
4.1.6 Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–66
4.1.6.1 Criteria - Vibration (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . 4–66
4.1.6.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–66
4.1.6.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–67
4.1.6.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 4–68
4.1.6.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–69
4.1.6.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–70
4.1.7 Flex Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–73
4.1.7.1 Criteria - Flex (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–73
4.1.7.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–74
4.1.7.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–75
4.1.7.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 4–76
4.1.7.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–79
4.1.7.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–80
4.1.8 Twist Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–80
4.1.8.1 Criteria - Twist (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–80
4.1.8.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–80
4.1.8.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–82
4.1.8.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 4–83
4.1.8.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–86
4.1.8.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–87
4.1.9 Side Pull Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–87
4.1.9.1 Criteria - Side Pull Load (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 4–87
4.1.9.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–87
4.1.9.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–89
4.1.9.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (Not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 4–90
4.1.9.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–93
4.1.9.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–94
4.1.10 Cable Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–102
4.1.10.1 Criteria - Cable Retention (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . 4–102
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Contents
ix
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.10.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–102
4.1.10.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–103
4.1.10.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . 4–104
4.1.10.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–107
4.1.10.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . 4–108
4.1.11 Durability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–111
4.1.11.1 Criteria - Durability (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . 4–111
4.1.11.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–112
4.1.11.3 Test Flowchart (Not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–114
4.1.11.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . 4–115
4.1.11.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–117
4.1.11.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . 4–117
4.1.12 Impact Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–121
4.1.12.1 Criteria - Impact (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . 4–121
4.1.12.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–121
4.1.12.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–123
4.1.12.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . 4–124
4.1.12.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–124
4.1.12.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . 4–125
4.2 Optical Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–128
4.2.1 Optical Bandpass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–129
4.2.1.1 Criteria - Optical Bandpass (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . 4–129
4.2.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–130
4.2.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–132
4.2.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . 4–133
4.2.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–136
4.2.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–136
4.2.2 Change in Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–137
4.2.2.1 Criteria - Change in Attenuation (heading not from GR-910) . . . 4–137
4.2.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–138
4.2.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–138
4.2.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . 4–138
4.2.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–141
4.2.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–141
4.2.3 Attenuation Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–142
4.2.3.1 Criteria - Attenuation Tolerance (heading not from GR-910) . . . 4–143
4.2.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–143
4.2.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–143
4.2.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . 4–143
4.2.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–146
4.2.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–147
4.2.4 Attenuation Increments and Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–148
4.2.4.1 Criteria - Attenuation Increments and Range (heading not
from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–148
4.2.4.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–149
4.2.4.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–149
4.2.4.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . 4–149
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Contents February 3, 2005
x
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.4.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–152
4.2.4.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–152
4.2.5 Reflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–153
4.2.5.1 Criteria - Reflectance (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . 4–153
4.2.5.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–154
4.2.5.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–154
4.2.5.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . 4–154
4.2.5.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–155
4.2.5.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–156
4.2.6 Polarization-Dependent Loss (PDL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–157
4.2.6.1 Criteria - Polarization-Dependent Loss (heading not from
GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–157
4.2.6.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–158
4.2.6.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–160
4.2.6.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . 4–163
4.2.6.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–165
4.2.6.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–165
4.2.7 Polarization-Mode Dispersion (PMD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–166
4.2.7.1 Criteria - Polarization Mode Dispersion (heading not from
GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–166
4.2.7.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–167
4.2.7.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–168
4.2.7.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . 4–169
4.2.7.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–170
4.2.7.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–170
4.2.8 Damage Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–171
4.2.8.1 Criteria - Damage (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . 4–172
4.2.8.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–172
4.2.8.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–172
4.2.8.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . 4–172
4.2.8.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–172
4.2.8.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–172
5.0 Performance Verification/Test Procedures
5.1 Environmental and Mechanical Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.1.1 Controlled Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.1.2 Uncontrolled Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.1.3 Non-Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.1.4 Humidity/Condensation Cycling Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.1.5 Water Immersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.1.6 Vibration Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.1.7 Flex Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.1.8 Twist Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.1.9 Side Pull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.1.10 Cable Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.1.11 Durability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Contents
xi
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
5.1.12 Impact Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
5.2 Optical Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
5.2.1 Optical Bandpass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
5.2.2 Change in Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
5.2.3 Attenuation Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5.2.4 Attenuation Increments and Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5.2.5 Reflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5.2.6 Polarization-Dependent Loss (PDL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5.2.7 Polarization-Mode Dispersion (PMD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
6.0 Passive Optical Component Code (POCC)
6.1 Structure and Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.2 Component Type Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.3 Fiber Type and Operating Wavelength Region Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.4 Cable Type Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.5 Attenuation Value Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.6 Application Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.7 Configuration Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.8 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
7.0 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program
7.1 Reliability Assurance Requirements Philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.2 Overview of Reliability Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.3 Qualification Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.3.0.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.3.0.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.3.0.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.3.0.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 7–4
7.3.0.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.3.0.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.3.1 Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.3.1.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.3.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.3.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.3.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 7–6
7.3.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.3.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-1221) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.3.2 Reliability Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.3.2.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.3.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.3.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.3.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 7–12
7.3.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.3.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.3.3 Failure Rate Prediction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.3.3.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Contents February 3, 2005
xii
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.3.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.3.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7.3.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 7–19
7.3.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.3.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.3.4 Optical Adhesives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.3.5 Quality Assurance and Lot Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.3.5.1 Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.3.5.1.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.3.5.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.3.5.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-1221) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.3.5.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-1221) . . . 7–21
7.3.5.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-1221) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.3.5.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-1221) . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.3.5.2 Optical Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.3.5.2.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.3.5.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.3.5.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.3.5.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . 7–24
7.3.5.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
7.3.5.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
7.3.5.3 Stress Screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.3.5.3.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.3.5.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.3.5.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
7.3.5.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . 7–27
7.3.5.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
7.3.5.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
7.3.6 Optical Adhesives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
7.3.7 Optical Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
7.3.8 Optical Fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
7.4 Quality and Reliability Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
7.4.0.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
7.4.0.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
7.4.0.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
7.4.0.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 7–30
7.4.0.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
7.4.0.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
7.4.1 Reliability Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
7.4.1.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
7.4.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.4.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.4.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 7–32
7.4.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.4.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.4.2 Quality Technology Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
7.4.2.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Contents
xiii
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.4.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
7.4.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
7.4.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 7–34
7.4.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
7.4.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Contents February 3, 2005
xiv
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 List of Tables
xv
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
List of Tables
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator
Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status . . . . . . . . . ES–5
TP-910 Table 1-1 Sample Name and Serial Number of Tested Samples, Hot
Spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
TP-910 Table 2-1 Testing Sequences and Estimated Durations . . . . . . . . . 2–7
GR-910 Table 4-1 Summary of Attenuator Performance Criteria and Test
Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
GR-910 Table 4-2 Tensile Loads for Mechanical Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
TP-910 Table 4-1 Number of Turns for Twist Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–83
TP-910 Table 4-2 Side Pull Tensile Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–90
GR-910 Table 4-3 Optical Bandpass Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–129
GR-910 Table 5-1 Number of Turns for Twist Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
GR-910 Table 5-2 Side Pull Tensile Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
GR-910 Table 6-1 Passive Optical Component Manufacturer Code POCC . . . 6–2
GR-910 Table 6-2 POCC Character Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
GR-910 Table 6-3 POCC Character S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
GR-910 Table 6-4 POCC Character S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
GR-910 Table 6-5 POCC Character S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
GR-910 Table 6-6 POCC Character S8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
GR-910 Table 6-7 POCC Interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
GR-910 Table 7-1 Test Matrix for Demonstrating Acceleration Factors
[Relative Humidity as a Function of Temperature and
Absolute Humidity] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
List of Tables Febr ua ry 3, 2005
xvi
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 List of Figures
xvii
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
List of Figures
List of Figures
TP-910 Figure PS-1 Program Initiation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PS–2
TP-910 Figure PS-2 High-Level Flowchart for Service Life and General
Requirements Evaluation/Test Program . . . . . . . . . . PS–4
GR-910 Figure 2-1 The a) Fixed and b) Variable Attenuator Components . . . 2–1
GR-910 Figure 2-2 Attenuator Types a) Connector Receptacle, b) Optical
Pad, c) Patchcord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
GR-910 Figure 2-3 Optical Transmission Using a Variable Attenuator. . . . . . 2–4
GR-910 Figure 2-4 Central Wavelength Variation of Uncontrolled Optical
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
TP-910 Figure 3-1 Test Flowchart - General Documentation (not from
GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
TP-910 Figure 3-2 Test Flowchart - Marking, Packaging and Shipping
(not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
TP-910 Figure 3-3 Test Flowchart - Optical Fiber Physical Design
(not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
TP-910 Figure 3-4 Test Flowchart - Optical Connectors (not from GR-910) . . 3–16
TP-910 Figure 3-5 Test Flowchart - Cleanability (not from GR-910) . . . . . . 3–18
TP-910 Figure 3-6 Test Flowchart - Intermateability (not from GR-910) . . . . 3–21
TP-910 Figure 3-7 Test Flowchart - Materials (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 3–25
TP-910 Figure 3-8 Test Flowchart - Safety (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . 3–28
TP-910 Figure 3-9 Test Flowchart - Mounting (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 3–31
TP-910 Figure 3-10 Test Flowchart - Index Matching (not from GR-910) . . . . 3–34
TP-910 Figure 3-11 Test Flowchart - Change in Attenuation (not from GR-910) 3–37
TP-910 Figure 4-1 Test Flowchart - Controlled Operating Environment Test
(not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
TP-910 Figure 4-2 Operating Temperature and Humidity Test . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
TP-910 Figure 4-3 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
TP-910 Figure 4-4 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm during Controlled
Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
TP-910 Figure 4-5 Change in Attenuation at 1490 nm during Controlled
Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
TP-910 Figure 4-6 Change in Attenuation at 1550 nm during Controlled
Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
TP-910 Figure 4-7 Change in Attenuation at 1625 nm during Controlled
Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
TP-910 Figure 4-8 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm during Controlled Operating
Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
TP-910 Figure 4-9 Insertion Loss at 1490 nm during Controlled Operating
Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
TP-910 Figure 4-10 Insertion Loss at 1550 nm during Controlled Operating
Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
TP-910 Figure 4-11 Insertion Loss at 1625 nm during Controlled Operating
Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
List of Figures Febr ua ry 3, 2005
xviii
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-12 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
during Controlled Operating Environment test . . . . . . . 4–14
TP-910 Figure 4-13 Test Flowchart - Uncontrolled Operating Environment
Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
TP-910 Figure 4-14 Uncontrolled Environment Temperature Profile . . . . . . . 4–18
TP-910 Figure 4-15 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–19
TP-910 Figure 4-16 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm during Uncontrolled
Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
TP-910 Figure 4-17 Change in Attenuation at 1490 nm during Uncontrolled
Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
TP-910 Figure 4-18 Change in Attenuation at 1550 nm during Uncontrolled
Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–23
TP-910 Figure 4-19 Change in Attenuation at 1625 nm during Uncontrolled
Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–23
TP-910 Figure 4-20 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm during Uncontrolled Operating
Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–24
TP-910 Figure 4-21 Insertion Loss at 1490 nm during Uncontrolled Operating
Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–24
TP-910 Figure 4-22 Insertion Loss at 1550 nm during Uncontrolled Operating
Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
TP-910 Figure 4-23 Insertion Loss at 1625 nm during Uncontrolled Operating
Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25
TP-910 Figure 4-24 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test . . . . . . 4–26
TP-910 Figure 4-25 Low-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock . . . . . . 4–28
TP-910 Figure 4-26 High-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock . . . . . . 4–29
TP-910 Figure 4-27 High Relative Humidity Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–30
TP-910 Figure 4-28 Test Flowchart - Non-Operating Environment Test
(not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–31
TP-910 Figure 4-29 Low-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock . . . . . . 4–32
TP-910 Figure 4-30 High-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock . . . . . . 4–33
TP-910 Figure 4-31 High Relative Humidity Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–34
TP-910 Figure 4-32 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–35
TP-910 Figure 4-33 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm
and 1625 nm after Low Temperature Exposure and
Thermal Shock test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–38
TP-910 Figure 4-34 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
after Low Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test . 4–38
TP-910 Figure 4-35 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
after Low Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test . 4–39
TP-910 Figure 4-36 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after High Temperature Exposure and Thermal
Shock test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40
TP-910 Figure 4-37 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after High Temperature Exposure and Thermal
Shock test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 List of Figures
xix
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-38 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
after High Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test . 4–41
TP-910 Figure 4-39 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after High Relative Humidity Exposure test . . . . 4–43
TP-910 Figure 4-40 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
after High Relative Humidity Exposure test . . . . . . . . . 4–44
TP-910 Figure 4-41 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
after High Relative Humidity Exposure test . . . . . . . . . 4–44
TP-910 Figure 4-42 Test Flowchart - Humidity/Condensation Cycling Test
(not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–46
TP-910 Figure 4-43 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–47
TP-910 Figure 4-44 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm during Humidity/
Condensation Cycling test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–51
TP-910 Figure 4-45 Change in Attenuation at 1490 nm during Humidity/
Condensation Cycling test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–51
TP-910 Figure 4-46 Change in Attenuation at 1550 nm during Humidity/
Condensation Cycling test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–52
TP-910 Figure 4-47 Change in Attenuation at 1625 nm during Humidity/
Condensation Cycling test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–52
TP-910 Figure 4-48 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm during Humidity/Condensation
Cycling test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–53
TP-910 Figure 4-49 Insertion Loss at 1490 nm during Humidity/Condensation
Cycling test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–53
TP-910 Figure 4-50 Insertion Loss at 1550 nm during Humidity/Condensation
Cycling test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–54
TP-910 Figure 4-51 Insertion Loss at 1625 nm during Humidity/Condensation
Cycling test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–54
TP-910 Figure 4-52 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
during Humidity/Condensation Cycling test . . . . . . . . . 4–55
TP-910 Figure 4-53 Test Flowchart - Water Immersion Test (not from GR-910) 4–57
TP-910 Figure 4-54 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–58
TP-910 Figure 4-55 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm during Water
Immersion test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–61
TP-910 Figure 4-56 Change in Attenuation at 1490 nm during Water
Immersion test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–62
TP-910 Figure 4-57 Change in Attenuation at 1550 nm during Water
Immersion test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–62
TP-910 Figure 4-58 Change in Attenuation at 1625 nm during Water
Immersion test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–63
TP-910 Figure 4-59 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm during Water Immersion test . . 4–63
TP-910 Figure 4-60 Insertion Loss at 1490 nm during Water Immersion test . . 4–64
TP-910 Figure 4-61 Insertion Loss at 1550 nm during Water Immersion test . . 4–64
TP-910 Figure 4-62 Insertion Loss at 1625 nm during Water Immersion test . . 4–65
TP-910 Figure 4-63 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm during
Water Immersion test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–65
TP-910 Figure 4-64 Test Flowchart - Vibration Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . 4–67
TP-910 Figure 4-65 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–68
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
List of Figures Febr ua ry 3, 2005
xx
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-66 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm
and 1625 nm after Vibration test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–71
TP-910 Figure 4-67 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after Vibration test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–72
TP-910 Figure 4-68 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after Vibration test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–72
TP-910 Figure 4-69 Test Flowchart - Fiber Flex Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . 4–75
TP-910 Figure 4-70 Mechanical Test Facility for Flex, Twist, Side Pull and
Cable Retention Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–77
TP-910 Figure 4-71 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–78
TP-910 Figure 4-72 Test Flowchart - Fiber Twist Test (not from GR-910) . . . . 4–82
TP-910 Figure 4-73 Mechanical Test Facility for Flex, Twist, Side Pull and
Cable Retention Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–84
TP-910 Figure 4-74 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–85
TP-910 Figure 4-75 Test Flowchart - Fiber Side Pull Test (not from GR-910) . . 4–89
TP-910 Figure 4-76 Mechanical Test Facility for Flex, Twist, Side Pull and
Cable Retention Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–91
TP-910 Figure 4-77 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–92
TP-910 Figure 4-78 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm during Side Pull test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–96
TP-910 Figure 4-79 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
during Side Pull test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–97
TP-910 Figure 4-80 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
during Side Pull test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–97
TP-910 Figure 4-81 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after Side Pull test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–100
TP-910 Figure 4-82 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after Side Pull test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–101
TP-910 Figure 4-83 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
after Side Pull test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–101
TP-910 Figure 4-84 Test Flowchart - Cable Retention Test (not from GR-910) 4–103
TP-910 Figure 4-85 Mechanical Test Facility for Flex, Twist, Side Pull and
Cable Retention Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–105
TP-910 Figure 4-86 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–106
TP-910 Figure 4-87 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm
and 1625 nm after Cable Retention test . . . . . . . . . . . 4–110
TP-910 Figure 4-88 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after Cable Retention test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–110
TP-910 Figure 4-89 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after Cable Retention test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–111
TP-910 Figure 4-90 Test Flowchart - Durability Test (not from GR-910) . . . . 4–114
TP-910 Figure 4-91 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–116
TP-910 Figure 4-92 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm
and 1625 nm after Durability test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–119
TP-910 Figure 4-93 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after Durability test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–120
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 List of Figures
xxi
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-94 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
after Durability test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–120
TP-910 Figure 4-95 Test Flowchart - Impact Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . . 4–123
TP-910 Figure 4-96 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm
and 1625 nm after Impact test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–127
TP-910 Figure 4-97 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after Impact test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–127
TP-910 Figure 4-98 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after Impact test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–128
TP-910 Figure 4-99 Test Flowchart - General Optical Bandpass Test
(not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–133
TP-910 Figure 4-100 Reference Test Configurations for General Optical
Bandpass (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–134
TP-910 Figure 4-101 Through-DUT Test Configurations for General Optical
Bandpass (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–134
TP-910 Figure 4-102 3 dB Attenuator Optical Bandpass Spectra . . . . . . . . . 4–135
TP-910 Figure 4-103 Spectral Attenuation Measurements from 1250 nm to
1650 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–137
TP-910 Figure 4-104 Attenuation Loss Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–138
TP-910 Figure 4-105 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–140
TP-910 Figure 4-106 Baseline Insertion Loss Measurements at 1310 nm,
1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–142
TP-910 Figure 4-107 Attenuation Loss Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–144
TP-910 Figure 4-108 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–145
TP-910 Figure 4-109 Baseline Insertion Loss Measurements at 1310 nm,
1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–148
TP-910 Figure 4-110 Attenuation Loss Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–149
TP-910 Figure 4-111 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–151
TP-910 Figure 4-112 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–154
TP-910 Figure 4-113 Baseline Reflectance Measurements at 1310 nm,
1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–157
TP-910 Figure 4-114 Test Flowchart - PDL Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 4–163
TP-910 Figure 4-115 Reference Configuration for PDL Tests (not from
GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–164
TP-910 Figure 4-116 Through-DUT Configuration for PDL Tests (not from
GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–164
TP-910 Figure 4-117 Configuration for Measuring Polarization Dependent
Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–164
TP-910 Figure 4-118 Polarization-Dependent Loss (PDL) at 1310 nm,
1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–166
TP-910 Figure 4-119 Test Flowchart - PMD (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . 4–169
TP-910 Figure 4-120 Reference Configuration for PMD Tests (not from
GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–169
TP-910 Figure 4-121 Configuration for PMD Tests (not from GR-910) . . . . . . 4–170
TP-910 Figure 4-122 Polarization-Mode Dispersion (PMD) measurements . . . 4–171
GR-910 Figure 5-1 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
GR-910 Figure 5-2 Controlled Operating Environment Temperature Profile . . 5–4
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
List of Figures Febr ua ry 3, 2005
xxii
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
GR-910 Figure 5-3 Uncontrolled Environment Temperature Profile . . . . . . . 5–5
GR-910 Figure 5-4 Humidity/Condensation Temperature Profile . . . . . . . . 5–6
GR-910 Figure 5-5 3 dB Attenuator Optical Bandpass Spectra . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
GR-910 Figure 5-6 Attenuation Loss Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
GR-910 Figure 5-7 Configuration for Measuring Polarization Dependent
Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
GR-910 Figure 5-8 Mechanical Test Facility for Flex, Twist, Side Pull and
Cable Retention Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
GR-910 Figure 7-1 Elements of a Comprehensive Reliability Assurance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
TP-910 Figure 7-1 Test Flowchart - Character Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . 7–6
TP-910 Figure 7-2 Test Flowchart - Reliability Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . 7–12
TP-910 Figure 7-3 Test Flowchart - Failure Rate Prediction Test (not from
GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
TP-910 Figure 7-4 Test Flowchart - Visual Inspection Test (not from GR-910) . 7–21
TP-910 Figure 7-5 Test Flowchart - Optical Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . . 7–23
TP-910 Figure 7-6 Test Flowchart - Stress Screening Test (not from GR-910) . 7–26
TP-910 Figure 7-7 Test Flowchart - Quality and Reliability Test (not from
GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Test Plan and Analysis Report Notice Of Disclaimer
xxiii
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Test Plan and Analysis Report Notice Of Disclaimer
This Test Report document is published by Telcordia Technologies, and it is based
on Test Plan document TP-910 which served as a template for this test report on
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators. The test
plan includes criteria and test methods, which are, in Telcordia’s view, acceptable
to determine product conformance with GR-910-CORE criteria. The test plan was
also developed to be in accordance with the Verizon Passive Fiber Optic
Component (PFOC) Program guidelines.
The generic requirements contained in the Test Plan document TP-910 are taken
from Issue 2 of Telcordia Technologies GR-910-CORE. Telcordia reserves the right
to revise the GR-910-CORE document for any reason (consistent with applicable
provisions of the Telecommunications Act of 1996 and applicable FCC rules).
The test plan and the test report are not to be construed as a suggestion to anyone
to modify or change any product or service, nor does the test plan and the test
report represent any commitment by anyone, including but not limited to Telcordia,
to purchase, manufacture, or sell any product with the described characteristics.
The test plan document has been developed based on the publicly available
GR-910-CORE document and Verizon PFOC program guidelines. Readers are
specifically advised that any entity may have needs, specifications, or requirements
different from the generic descriptions herein. Therefore, anyone wishing to know
any entity’s needs, specifications, or requirements should communicate directly
with that entity.
The sufficiency, accuracy or utility of information excerpted and incorporated into
the Test Plan document from GR-910-CORE, or other referenced documents are
subject to any limitations or local conditions as stated within disclaimers provided
in those subject reference documents.
IN NO EVENT IS THIS INFORMATION INTENDED TO REPLACE FEDERAL,
STATE, LOCAL, OR OTHER APPLICABLE CODES, LAWS, OR REGULATIONS.
SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS WILL CONTAIN VARIABLES UNKNOWN TO OR
BEYOND THE CONTROL OF TELCORDIA.
Nothing contained herein shall be construed as conferring by implication, estoppel,
or otherwise any license or right under any patent, whether or not the use of any
information herein necessarily employs an invention of any existing or later issued
patent.
For general information about this or any other Telcordia documents, please
contact:
Telcordia Technologies Customer Service
Piscataway, New Jersey 08854-4156
+1.800.521.2673 (US and Canada)
+1.732.699.5800 (worldwide)
+1.732.336.2559 (FAX)
http://www.telcordia.com
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Test Plan and Analysis Report Notice Of Disclaimer February 3, 2005
xxiv
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Executive Summary
ES–1
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Executive Summary
THE TEST PROGRAM WAS CONDUCTED AND THE TEST REPORT WAS
PREPARED BY TELCORDIA UNDER THE AUSPICES OF VERIZON’S
PASSIVE FIBER OPTIC COMPONENTS (PFOC) PROGRAM
Manufacturer: Tyco Electronics Corporation
Location of Manufacturer: Shanghai, 200131, China
Location of Test Laboratory: Piscataway, NJ, 08854, USA
Product Name: 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
Product Part Number: 209250-3
Product Description: Buildout attenuators are 2 port, bidirectional components
without integral optical fiber leads. These attenuators were manufactured to an
attenuation tolerance of 3 ±0.5 dB and ≥ 55 dB return loss.
Introduction
The purpose of this test program is to determine if the specified Tyco Electronics
Corporation product(s) could meet the general, mechanical, environmental, and
optical requirements specified herein and continue to perform the intended in-
service functions.
A test program based upon this document is to be used by Tyco Electronics
Corporation clients such as Regional Bell Operating Companies (RBOCs), Internet
Service Providers (ISPs), Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive
Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), and large service providers as evidence of
conformance to the Telcordia GR-910-CORE, Generic Requirements for Fiber
Optic Attenuators.
All test equipment used for this program was checked before testing to assure that
it was in calibration, and that the parameters to be measured were appropriate for
the range on the measuring instrument.
Calibration is performed and checked on a routine basis using standards traceable
to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). Calibration of
equipment is performed in accordance with the Telcordia Quality Program and
satisfies the requirements of ISO 17025 and ANSI/NCSL Z540-1.
Declaration of Conformance:
This is to declare that the product tested under this program did not conform with
the applicable general, mechanical, environmental, and optical requirements
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Executive Summary Febr ua ry 3, 200 5
ES–2
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, Generic Requirements for Fiber Optic
Attenuators.
This conformance declaration is based upon agreed, less stringent criteria
requirements of GR-910 CR4-21 [58], GR-910 CR4-22 [59],
GR-910 CR4-23 [60] and GR-910 CR4-24 [61]. The following is a summary of
how these requirements were used to determine the conformance of this product.
A detailed summary of how the product performed against this less stringent
criteria, as well as the more stringent criteria, is presented in Section 4 of this test
report.
GR-910 CR4-21 [58] states that for all digital applications the maximum or
minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or
mechanical tests shall be ≤ 0.5 dB or ≤ 0.15A, whichever is less. The test results of
this product were required to meet the ≤ 0.5 dB change in attenuation criteria in this
test program.
GR-910 CR4-22 [59] states that for all AM video applications the maximum or
minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or
mechanical tests shall be ≤ 0.5 dB or ≤ 0.10A, whichever is less. The test results of
this product were required to meet the ≤ 0.5 dB change in attenuation criteria in this
test program.
GR-910 CR4-23 [60] states that for attenuators intended for use in digital
applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed ±0.15V. The test results of
this product were required to meet an attenuation tolerance of ±0.5V as the criteria
in this test program.
GR-910 CR4-24 [61] states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video
applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed ±0.10V. The test results of
this product were required to meet an attenuation tolerance of ±0.5V as the criteria
in this test program.
Schedule:
The overall GR-910-CORE program is estimated to take between 12 and 14 weeks to
complete from receipt of the order to delivery of the final test report for a single
product. The initial planning and customer documentation generation phase will
typically take 1 to 2 weeks. The product evaluation and testing, as well as the
assessment of the reliability assurance program, is estimated to take 8 to 10 weeks.
Upon completion of all tests, inspections, and the assessment, an estimated period
of one (1) week will be required to review, analyze, and compile the results and
another two (2) weeks to complete the final report. Time savings can be realized
through parallel data review, analysis and report writing, as well as by extending
work shifts. Estimated program time assumes timely availability of appropriate
customer samples and timely response to any requests for information or sample
problem resolution by the supplier.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Executive Summary
ES–3
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
NOTE: FOR A MULTI-PORT DEVICE, ALL THE PORTS MUST BE
SUBJECTED TO OPTICAL, ENVIRONMENTAL AND MECHANICAL
TEST.
Supplier Responsibility:
1. The supplier shall provide all samples and specialized tools/cleaning kits for use
with their products that may be necessary to perform the evaluation.
2. The supplier shall supply all necessary documentation and specific information
related to the product(s) to be evaluated.
3. The supplier shall supply a list of all components used in the product(s)
including part numbers, manufacturer, and product specifications.
4. The supplier shall provide all cabling, jumpers, and accessories required to
perform the tests.
5. The supplier shall identify a single point of contact to address issues and
provide timely resolution of any issues or problems which arise during the test
program
Requirements Terminology:
The following requirements terminology is used throughout this document.
•Requirement — Feature or function that, in the Telcordia view, is necessary to
satisfy the needs of a typical Network Operator. Failure to meet a requirement
may cause application restrictions, result in improper functioning of the
product, or hinder operations. A Requirement contains the words shall or must
and is flagged by the letter “R.”
•Conditional Requirement — Feature or function that, in the Telcordia view,
is necessary in specific Network Operator applications. If a Network Operator
identifies a Conditional Requirement as necessary, it shall be treated as a
requirement for the application(s). Conditions that may cause the Conditional
Requirement to apply include, but are not limited to, certain Network Operator
application environments, network elements, or other requirements, etc. A
Conditional Requirement is flagged by the letters “CR.”
•Objective — Feature or function that, in the Telcordia view, is desirable and
may be required by a Network Operator. An Objective represents a goal to be
achieved. An Objective may be reclassified as a Requirement at a specified date.
An objective is flagged by the letter “O” and includes the word should.
•Conditional Objective — Feature or function that, in the Telcordia view, is
desirable in specific Network Operator applications and may be required by a
Network Operator. It represents a goal to be achieved in the specified
Condition(s). If a Client Company identifies a Conditional Objective as
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Executive Summary Febr ua ry 3, 200 5
ES–4
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
necessary, it shall be treated as a requirement for the application(s). A
Conditional Objective is flagged by the letters “CO.”
•Condition — The circumstances that, in the Telcordia view, will cause a
Conditional Requirement or Conditional Objective to apply. A Condition is
flagged by the letters “Cn.”
Criteria Checklist:
TP-910 Table ES-1 lists all of the included criteria and indicates the method used to
determine conformance. The reliability criteria are also listed since this is a
requirement of some RBOCs. Criteria which were met are indicated by a “PASS”.
Criteria not met by one or more samples are indicated by a “FAIL”. The designation
“ND” means that the product’s conformance could not be determined. The
designation “NA” means that the criterion is not applicable to the product tested.
Conformance or nonconformance is determined using the following methodology:
Verify, Analyze, Inspect, and Test, individually or in combination. These methods
are defined as:
•Verify – Verify by a review of the documentation that the information or
accessories specified by the criteria were supplied or are available from the
manufacturer
•Analyze – Draw conclusions based on vendor-supplied product information,
test data, and other information as to the conformance or nonconformance of
the product to the criteria
•Inspect – Visually inspect the product to determine conformance or
nonconformance to the criteria
•Test – Measure quantitatively product features or performance to determine
conformance or nonconformance to the criteria.
Terminology for Results:
The following terminology for results are used to define the conformance status of
the data being reported.
•PASS – The product is considered to have conformed to the specified criteria,
in this analysis.
•FAIL – The product did not conform to the specified criteria, in this analysis.
•Not Determined (ND) – It was not determined whether the product conformed
or did not conform to the specified criteria, either because the product was not
tested for the criteria or the test results (as noted) were inconclusive.
•Not Applicable (NA) – The criteria were not relevant to the analyzed product.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Executive Summary
ES–5
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
General Documentation
R3-1
[1]
(3.1.1)
On request, the supplier shall provide a
complete set of documentation that includes:
•Product Description
•Performance Specifications
•Installation Instructions
•Operating Instructions
•Maintenance
•Ordering Information
•Testing and troubleshooting procedure
•Repair instructions and contact for repair
service
•Storage and transportation instructions
XPASS
Marking, Packaging, and Shipping
O3-2
[2]
(3.2)
Buffering and jacket color for single-mode
attenuators should be yellow.
XNA No jacketing is used
on this product.
O3-3
[3]
(3.2)
Buffering and jacket color for multimode
attenuators should be orange.
XNA No jacketing is used
on this product.
O3-4
[4]
(3.2)
The POCC should appear on the attenuator
housing, including the manufacturer serial
number (if applicable).
XPASS
R3-5
[5]
(3.2)
Attenuators designed to comply with specific
applications (such as those indicated by CR in
this document) shall be labeled to clearly
distinguish them from other products that they
may resemble.
XPASS
R3-6
[6]
(3.2)
The packaged part(s) shall be clearly labeled,
with parts and names consistent with those
given in the product instructions, in a manner
consistent with the requirements of
SR-NWT-2759, A View of Packaging, Packing,
Palletization, and Marking Requirements.
XPASS
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Executive Summary Febr ua ry 3, 200 5
ES–6
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
R3-7
[7]
(3.2)
All required assembly components (e. g., tools,
instructions and materials) shall be shipped
together.
XPASS
R3-8
[8]
(3.2)
The packaging shall be adequate to ensure that
the attenuators will not be damaged under
normal handling, shipping and storage in
reasonably dry, unheated quarters.
XPASS
R3-9
[9]
(3.2)
Attenuators shall be packaged and shipped with
dust caps or other dust impermeable packaging
material.
XPASS
O3-10
[10]
(3.2)
The packaging materials should be recyclable. XPASS
O3-11
[11]
(3.2)
The information necessary to identify the
product should be bar coded.
XPASS
Optical Fiber Physical Design Criteria
R3-12
[12]
(3.3.1)
All fiber and fiber cable used in attenuators shall
meet the criteria in GR-409-CORE, Generic
Requirements for Premises Fiber Cable.
Attenuators intended for use in outside plant
environments shall meet the outdoor
requirements in GR-409-CORE.
XND
R3-13
[13]
(3.3.1)
The length of individual, unconnectorized fiber
leads shall be ≥ 1 meter to provide sufficient
slack for splicing.
XXNA
CR3-14
[14]
(3.3.1)
For attenuators intended to serve as
interconnects or cross-connects between the
outside plant (OSP) panel and the network
equipment, the length of individual
connectorized fiber pigtails should be
≥ 2 meters.
XXNA
Optical Connector Physical Design
R3-15
[15]
(3.3.2)
Any single-mode optical connectors and/or
connector interfaces used in the construction of
the attenuator shall meet the criteria in
GR-326-CORE, Generic Requirements for
Optical Fiber Connectors.
XND
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Executive Summary
ES–7
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Cleanability
R3-16
[16]
(3.3.3)
Attenuators with accessible attenuation
elements shall not be damaged nor change
attenuation value when cleaned according to
manufacturers’ instructions.
XXPASS
R3-17
[17]
(3.3.3)
Suppliers shall specify cleaning instructions and
materials for cleaning attenuators.
XPASS
R3-18
[18]
(3.3.3)
Cleaning procedures shall meet all applicable
safety requirements.
XPASS
Intermateability
R3-19
[75]
(3.3.4)
Intermateability – Attenuator connectors,
connector interfaces, and couplings shall meet
the Intermateability requirements describe in
GR-326-CORE.
XND
Materials
R3-20
[19]
(3.3.5.1)
All attenuator materials with which personnel
may come in contact shall be non-toxic, and
shall not present any environmental hazards as
defined by applicable federal or state laws and
regulations or current industry standards.
Where the suggested use of certain materials by
the manufacturer may pose hazardous
conditions, the manufacturer shall provide the
necessary instructions for the handling and use
of such materials.
XPASS
R3-21
[20]
(3.3.5.2)
Attenuators containing metallic materials shall
show no significant signs of corrosion on
metallic surfaces or components nor exhibit a
malfunction of any mechanical features
following a 7- day exposure to a salt fog spray in
accordance with ASTM B117. Attenuators shall
be placed inside the salt fog chamber during the
test. The analysis for the degree of rusting on
painted metal surfaces shall be made in
accordance with ASTM D610. A rust grade of 9
or better is required, exclusive of any surface
scratches or nicks noted prior to testing.
X X ND
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Executive Summary Febr ua ry 3, 200 5
ES–8
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
R3-22
[21]
(3.3.5.3)
The attenuator design shall ensure that no
galvanic corrosion will occur when dissimilar
metals are used in its construction.
XND
R3-23
[22]
(3.3.5.4)
Exposed polymeric materials used in the
attenuator design shall not support fungus
growth per ASTM-G21. A rating of zero (0) is
required.
X X ND
O3-24
[23]
(3.3.5.5)
Exposed plastic materials shall have an oxygen
index of at least 28% as determined by actual
test in accordance with ASTM D-2863 and
GR-63-CORE, Section 4.2.3, Use of Fire-
Resistant Materials, Components, Wiring and
Cable.
X X ND
R3-25
[24]
(3.3.5.5)
Exposed plastic materials shall not sustain
combustion when an open flame source is
removed, such that they possess a rating of
94V-1 when tested according to the Vertical
Burning Test for Classifying Material,
Underwriters Laboratories publication UL94,
Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for
Parts in Devices and Appliances, or
GR-63-CORE, Section 5.2.4, Telcordia Needle
Flame Test. Manufacturers may be requested to
provide material samples of appropriate size for
testing.
X X ND
Safety
R3-26
[25]
(3.3.6)
The supplier shall provide written warning of
precautions for use of the product.
XND
R3-27
[76]
(3.3.6)
Radiation Hazard – The instructions that
describe the procedures for cleaning
attenuators shall indicate the possible hazard
due to the presence of invisible (infrared)
radiation when examining connectors with the
naked eye or using a microscope. The
instruction shall also contain ordering
information for an IR indicator card (Edmund
Scientific part #53-031 or equivalent) to allow
visualization of invisible IR light.
XND
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Executive Summary
ES–9
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
R3-28
[77]
(3.3.6)
Cleaning Materials – The instructions that
describe the procedures for cleaning the
attenuators shall contain the following
information regarding any materials that are
used for cleaning that may be considered
hazardous to health or to the environment:
•Warning as to the toxicity hazard
•Instructions for handling and use
•Instructions for disposal.
XPASS Material Safety
Data Sheet #7237
for Isopropyl
Alcohol 99% is
available upon
request.
Mounting
R3-29
[26]
(3.3.7)
Fiber optic attenuators shall be provided with a
means to be installed in Central Offices and
Remote Sites.
XXPASS
O3-30
[27]
(3.3.7)
Attenuators should be capable of being
mounted on standard 23-inch relay racks,
cabinets, pedestals, splice trays, splice
organizers and splice closures or other
protective enclosures.
XXPASS
R3-31
[28]
(3.3.7)
Variable attenuators shall be mounted in such a
way that the adjustment mechanism is easily
recognizable and accessible to craft personnel.
XXNA
Verizon
Require-
ment
Customer shall provide their recommended
chassis/cabinet/housing with the mountable
device for vibration and shock test. If devices
need to be spliced then provide documentation
on the mounting procedure.
XXNA
R3-32
[29]
(3.3.7.1)
Attenuators deployed in an uncontrolled
environment shall have a protective enclosure
to restrict water intrusion into the attenuator
housing package.
XXND
R3-33
[30]
(3.3.7.1)
Installed attenuators shall be easily accessible
for operations and maintenance support.
XXPASS
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Executive Summary Febr ua ry 3, 200 5
ES–10
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Index Matching
R3-34
[31]
(3.3.8)
Application of index-matching materials shall
not be required for use of the attenuator.
XPASS
Change of Attenuation
CR3-35
[32]
(3.3.9)
It shall be possible to vary the attenuation of a
variable attenuator after it is installed in a
transmission system.
XNA
R3-36
[33]
(3.3.9)
It shall not be necessary to access both sides of
the distributing frame, nor remove screws or
other mounting hardware.
XXPASS
R3-37
[34]
(3.3.9)
It shall not be necessary to re-splice fibers for
attenuators other than those designed to be
spliced to a fiber.
XPASS
Performance Criteria - Environments
R4-1
[39]
(4.1.1)
Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and
damage criteria described in Section 4.2.
XFAIL Based on ≤0.5 dB
change in
attenuation criteria
for both digital and
AM video
applications as well
as an attenuation
tolerance of ±0.5V
for both digital and
AM video
applications. Refer
to Section 4 for
sample
performance.
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Executive Summary
ES–11
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
R4-2
[40]
(4.1.1)
Product intended for use in a controlled
environment shall meet the requirement for
operation under Operating Temperature and
Humidity Criteria in Section 4.1.2. of
GR-63-CORE.
XPASS Based on ≤0.5 dB
change in
attenuation criteria
for both digital and
AM video
applications as well
as an attenuation
tolerance of ±0.5V
for both digital and
AM video
applications. Refer
to Section 4 for
sample
performance.
CR4-3
[41]
(4.1.2)
Product intended for use in an uncontrolled
environment shall remain functional (operate
as expected) at all temperatures from –40°C
(–40°F) (uncontrolled humidity) to 75°C (167°F)
(relative humidity of 90 ± 5% non-condensing).
XPASS Based on ≤0.5 dB
change in
attenuation criteria
for both digital and
AM video
applications as well
as an attenuation
tolerance of ±0.5V
for both digital and
AM video
applications. Refer
to Section 4 for
sample
performance.
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Executive Summary Febr ua ry 3, 200 5
ES–12
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
R4-4
[42]
(4.1.3)
Attenuators shall meet the optical criteria and
damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [after
exposure to the specified non-operating
conditions].
XPASS Based on ≤0.5 dB
change in
attenuation criteria
for both digital and
AM video
applications as well
as an attenuation
tolerance of ±0.5V
for both digital and
AM video
applications. Refer
to Section 4 for
sample
performance.
R4-5
[43]
(4.1.3)
All product shall meet the requirements for
transportation and storage under
Transportation and Storage Environmental
Criteria in Sections 4.1.1.1- 4.1.1.3 of
GR-63-CORE. These include requirement [69],
low-temperature exposure and thermal shock,
[70], high-temperature exposure and thermal
shock, and [71] high relative humidity exposure.
XPASS Based on ≤0.5 dB
change in
attenuation criteria
for both digital and
AM video
applications as well
as an attenuation
tolerance of ±0.5V
for both digital and
AM video
applications. Refer
to Section 4 for
sample
performance.
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Executive Summary
ES–13
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
R4-6
[78]
(4.1.4)
Attenuators shall meet the optical criteria and
damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [after
exposure to the specified humidity/
condensation cycling test conditions].
XPASS Based on ≤0.5 dB
change in
attenuation criteria
for both digital and
AM video
applications as well
as an attenuation
tolerance of ±0.5V
for both digital and
AM video
applications. Refer
to Section 4 for
sample
performance.
R4-7
[44]
(4.1.5)
Attenuators shall meet the optical criteria and
damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [after
exposure to the specified water immersion test
conditions].
XPASS Based on ≤0.5 dB
change in
attenuation criteria
for both digital and
AM video
applications as well
as an attenuation
tolerance of ±0.5V
for both digital and
AM video
applications. Refer
to Section 4 for
sample
performance.
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Executive Summary Febr ua ry 3, 200 5
ES–14
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
R4-8
[45]
(4.1.6)
Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and
damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [after
exposure to the specified vibration test
conditions].
XPASS Based on ≤0.5 dB
change in
attenuation criteria
for both digital and
AM video
applications as well
as an attenuation
tolerance of ±0.5V
for both digital and
AM video
applications. Refer
to Section 4 for
sample
performance.
R4-9
[46]
(4.1.7)
Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and
damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [after
exposure to the specified flex test conditions].
XNA Optical fiber leads
are not
incorporated into
this attenuator.
R4-10
[47]
(4.1.8)
Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and
damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [after
exposure to the specified twist test conditions].
XNA Optical fiber leads
are not
incorporated into
this attenuator.
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Executive Summary
ES–15
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
R4-11
[48]
(4.1.9)
Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and
damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [during
and after exposure to the specified side pull test
conditions].
XFAIL Based on ≤0.5 dB
change in
attenuation criteria
for both digital and
AM video
applications as well
as an attenuation
tolerance of ±0.5V
for both digital and
AM video
applications. Refer
to Section 4 for
sample
performance.
Nonconforming
conditions
observed for the
0.5 dB change in
attenuation
requirement for
both digital and AM
video applications.
During the side pull
test, samples i.l.04,
i.l.06 and i.l.10 did
not conform. After
the side pull test,
samples i.l.06 and
i.l.10 did not
conform.
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Executive Summary Febr ua ry 3, 200 5
ES–16
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
R4-12
[49]
(4.1.10)
Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and
damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [after
exposure to the specified cable retention test
conditions].
XFAIL Based on ≤0.5 dB
change in
attenuation criteria
for both digital and
AM video
applications as well
as an attenuation
tolerance of ±0.5V
for both digital and
AM video
applications. Refer
to Section 4 for
sample
performance.
Nonconforming
conditions
observed for the
0.5 dB change in
attenuation
requirement for
both digital and AM
video applications.
After the cable
retention test,
sample i.l.09 did not
conform.
R4-13
[50]
(4.1.11)
Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and
damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [after
exposure to the specified durability test
conditions].
XPASS Based on ≤0.5 dB
change in
attenuation criteria
for both digital and
AM video
applications as well
as an attenuation
tolerance of ±0.5V
for both digital and
AM video
applications. Refer
to Section 4 for
sample
performance.
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Executive Summary
ES–17
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
CR4-14
[51]
(4.1.11)
The value of attenuation, as the attenuator
setting is varied in either direction (including
backlash) over the entire attenuation range,
shall be within the attenuation tolerance, with
no physical damage.
XNA
CR4-15
[52]
(4.1.11)
Adjusting the setting past its endpoint by any
amount shall not result in damage to the
attenuator. Alternatively, there shall be a “stop”
preventing adjustment past the endpoint.
XNA
R4-16
[53]
(4.1.12)
Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and
damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [after
exposure to the specified impact test
conditions].
XPASS Based on ≤0.5 dB
change in
attenuation criteria
for both digital and
AM video
applications as well
as an attenuation
tolerance of ±0.5V
for both digital and
AM video
applications. Refer
to Section 4 for
sample
performance.
Optical Bandpass
CR4-17
[54]
(4.2.1)
For 1310/1550nm attenuators to be used for all
digital applications except long-reach SONET,
all optical requirements shall be met over the
bandpass for both the 1310nm and the 1550nm
regions specified in GR-910 Table 4-3, Column 2.
XPASS
CO4-18
[55]
(4.2.1)
For 1310/1550nm attenuators to be used for all
digital applications, all optical objectives should
be met over the bandpass for both the 1310 nm
and the 1550nm regions specified in
GR-910 Table 4-3, Column 3.
XPASS
CR4-19
[56]
(4.2.1)
For 1310/1550nm attenuators to be used for
long-reach SONET only, all optical requirements
shall be met over the bandpass specified in
GR-910 Table 4-3, Column 4.
XPASS
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Executive Summary Febr ua ry 3, 200 5
ES–18
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
R4-20
[57]
(4.2.1)
For all attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB
video transmission, all optical requirements
shall be met over the bandpass specified in
GR-910 Table 4-3, Column 5.
XPASS
Change In Attenuation
CR4-21
[58]
(4.2.2)
For all digital applications the maximum or
minimum change in attenuation before, during,
or after, any or all environmental or mechanical
tests shall be ≤ 0.5 dB or ≤ 0.15A, whichever is
less.
XFAIL Based on ≤0.5 dB
change in
attenuation criteria.
CR4-22
[59]
(4.2.2)
For all AM video applications the maximum or
minimum change in attenuation before, during,
or after, any or all environmental or mechanical
tests shall be ≤ 0.5 dB or ≤ 0.10A, whichever is
less.
XFAIL Based on ≤0.5 dB
change in
attenuation criteria.
Attenuation Tolerance
CR4-23
[60]
(4.2.3)
For attenuators intended for use in digital
applications the attenuation tolerance shall not
exceed 0.15V.
XPASS Based on an
attenuation
tolerance of ±0.5V.
CR4-24
[61]
(4.2.3)
For attenuators intended for use in AM video
applications the attenuation tolerance shall not
exceed 0.10V.
XPASS Based on an
attenuation
tolerance of ±0.5V.
Attenuation Increments and Range
R4-25
[62]
(4.2.4)
The attenuation range for attenuators shall be at
least ≤ 5 to 20 dB.
XPASS
CR4-26
[63]
(4.2.4)
For digital applications the attenuation
increments for fixed and discretely variable
attenuators shall be ≤ 5 dB. This means that
fixed and variable attenuators can change in
increments of no greater than 5 dB.
XNA
CR4-27
[64]
(4.2.4)
For AM video applications the attenuation
increments for fixed and discretely variable
attenuators shall be ≤ 3 dB.
XNA
CO4-28
[65]
(4.2.4)
For AM video applications the attenuation
increments for fixed and discretely variable
attenuators shall be ≤ 1 dB.
XNA
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Executive Summary
ES–19
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
CO4-29
[66]
(4.2.4)
The attenuation range for attenuators should be
at least ≤ 1 to 25 dB.
XPASS
Reflectance
R4-30
[67]
(4.2.5)
The maximum reflectance for attenuators
intended for use in Digital systems as bit rates
up to 10 Gb/s shall be ≤ −40 dB over the entire
bandpass of GR-910 R4-16 [53] and
GR-910 CR4-17 [54] and operating
temperature range of −40°C to 75°C
(−40°F to 167°F).
XPASS
CR4-31
[68]
(4.2.5)
The maximum reflectance for attenuators
intended for use in AM-VSB systems shall be
≤ −55 dB over the entire bandpass of
GR-910 CR4-19 [56] and operating
temperature range of −40°C to +75°C.
XPASS
CO4-32
[69]
(4.2.5)
The maximum reflectance for attenuators
intended for use in AM-VSB systems should
be ≤ −65 dB over the entire bandpass of
GR-910 CR4-19 [56] and operating
temperature range of−40°C to +75°C.
XFAIL Nonconforming
conditions
observed for all of
the environmental
and mechanical
tests in all of the
samples tested.
Polarization-Dependent Loss
R4-33
[70]
(4.2.6)
All optical requirements shall be met for all
incident SOPs.
XPASS
CR4-34
[71]
(4.2.6)
For digital applications the maximum change in
attenuation shall be ≤ 0.5 dB or ≤ 0.15A,
whichever is less.
XPASS
CR4-35
[72]
(4.2.6)
For AM video applications the maximum change
in attenuation shall be ≤ 0.5 dB or ≤ 0.10A,
whichever is less.
XPASS
Polarization-Mode Dispersion
CR4-36
[79]
(4.2.7)
The maximum value of dispersion (in ps) shall
not exceed 0.2 ps for all operating wavelengths.
XPASS
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Executive Summary Febr ua ry 3, 200 5
ES–20
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Damage Criteria
R4-37
[73]
(4.2.8)
At the completion of all tests there shall be no
damage that would impair the performance of
the attenuator.
XPASS
Passive Optical Component Code (POCC)
R6-1
[74]
(6.1)
The Passive Optical Component Code (POCC)
characters as outlined in GR-910 Table 6-1
should be imprinted on the component housing.
XNA
Qualification Criteria
R7-1
[80]
(7.3)
The equipment supplier shall perform or obtain
verifiable data for the qualification of optical
attenuators, including characterization and
reliability tests.
XND
R7-2
[81]
(7.3.1)
Optical attenuators shall be fully characterized
for optical performance as part of device
qualification. The characterization must include
mechanical, electrical, and optical parameters.
A sample size of at least 11 devices (LTPD of
20%) is required. A failure is defined as any
component that does not meet all the specified
parametric limits.
XND
O7-3
[82]
(7.3.1)
Optical attenuators data also should be obtained
from the vendor (in-house or external) on a
much larger population (~ 50-200 units
representing a minimum of three different date
codes). Distributions (minimum, maximum,
mean, and 3σ) of measured parameters should
be compared to specification limits and design
requirements to assure that adequate margins
exist.
XND
R7-4
[83]
(7.3.2)
Reliability tests for optical attenuators shall
include mechanical/physical tests as well as
endurance tests. … Table 1 lists a minimum set
of tests that must be performed.
XND
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Executive Summary
ES–21
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
R7-5
[84]
(7.3.2)
Mechanical/optical performance tests shall be
completed before and after each of the
reliability tests. Out of specifications shall be
counted as failures. Other pass/fail criteria,
based on degradations in some key parameters,
shall be documented along with the testing
methods.
XND
R7-6
[85]
(7.3.2)
Technical justification of the accelerated aging
factors by stresses, such as temperature,
humidity, or optical power, for different testing
conditions is required. Associated acceleration/
deceleration factors must be clearly identified.
XND
R7-7
[86]
(7.3.2)
For those components with non-hermetic
packages, the thermal shock test will not be
required, but the damp heat testing duration
must be increased to 5000 hours from the
2000 hour test for hermetic components.
XNA
R7-8
[87]
(7.3.2)
If technical data are not available in support of
other values, an activation energy of 0.3 eV shall
be assumed for the dry heat test and an effective
activation energy of 0.6 eV shall be assumed for
the damp heat test. In the latter case, the higher
activation energy accounts for the difference
between the test's high humidity and “average”
operating conditions, such that a separate term
for humidity would not be included in the
calculation of the acceleration factor.
Manufacturers may use a different activation
energy or a different model for calculating
acceleration, if its use can be supported by
empirical data. The empirical data must be
based on reliability testing or field returns, and
shall be available for review by the LECs,
service providers or their representative.
XND
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Executive Summary Febr ua ry 3, 200 5
ES–22
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
O7-9
[88]
(5.4.2.4)
In order of priority, the following life tests
should be performed as part of any effort to
validate alternative acceleration models or
activation energies:
•High temperature damp heat = 75°C, 90% RH
(or 85°C, 85% RH)
•High temperature dry heat = 85°C, ~ 16% RH
•Moderate temperature damp heat = 45°C,
85% RH
Minimum sample size is 22 devices for each life
test. Results should include estimates of median
life or mean-time-to-failure (MTTF), and a
“spread” parameter (e.g., standard deviation).
XND
R7-10
[89]
(7.3.2)
A temperature cycle life test shall be performed
in accordance with the procedures of
Section 6.2.7 in GR-1221-CORE. The minimum
and maximum temperatures shall be at least
–40°C and + 75°C. The minimum sample size is
11 devices (LTPD of 20%). Results after
500 cycles shall be used for “passing” or “failing”
the test. Failures between 500 cycles and
1000 cycles shall be investigated and corrective
actions shall be implemented.
XND
R7-11
[90]
(7.3.2)
Fiber pigtails and optical connectors shall
comply with general flammability requirements
for materials used in telecommunications
systems.
XND
Failure Rate Prediction
R7-12
[91]
(7.3.3)
Equivalent time and temperature requirements
shall be calculated using the Arrhenius
relationship. Technical justification of the
activation energy used for different conditions
in temperature-dependent life tests is required.
Acceleration models (for failure mechanisms
affected by other stresses, such as optical power
or humidity) shall be demonstrated
(theoretically if possible and empirically).
Associated acceleration/deceleration factors
must be clearly identified.
XND
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Executive Summary
ES–23
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
O7-13
[92]
(7.3.3)
The acceleration aging factor from humidity is
recommended to be assessed by the equation
below. Technical justification of the derivation
is required.
where
H1 and H2 are the relative humidity levels in %,
ML is the median life at a given humidity, and
B and n are empirical constants.
XND
R7-14
[93]
(7.3.3)
Wear-out and random failure rates and
acceleration aging factors shall be provided. The
sources and data shall also be provided.
X X ND
O7-15
[94]
(7.3.3)
To simplify review (by customers or their
representatives) of failure rate predictions, the
format in … Table 2 is recommended for use by
device manufacturers and/or equipment
suppliers.
XXND
R7-16
[95]
(7.3.3)
The testing data and supporting evidence for
… Table 2 shall be documented and available for
review at the request of a LEC, service provider
or its representative.
XXND
R7-17
[96]
(7.3.3)
Unless otherwise specified, all failures observed
in qualification testing must normally be
counted and must be reported, regardless of the
failure mode. Omission of any failures from test
results must be clearly justified and must be
reviewed with the LEC, service provider or its
representative.
XXND
O7-18
[97]
(7.3.3)
… Table 3 provides the recommended format
for reporting the status of all reliability tests.
XXND
R7-19
[98]
(7.3.3)
The testing data and supporting evidence for
… Table 3 shall be documented and available for
review at the request of a LEC, service provider
or its representative.
XND
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
ML H2
()
ML H1
()
------------------------- BH1
nBH2
n
–[]exp=
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Executive Summary Febr ua ry 3, 200 5
ES–24
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Quality Assurance and Lot Controls
R7-20
[99]
(7.3.5.1)
Incoming lots of optical attenuators shall be
visually inspected on at least a sample basis (to
be determined in accordance with a statistical
sampling plan established by the equipment
supplier).
XND
O7-21
[100]
(7.3.5.1)
Visual inspection (or another step in lot
acceptance procedures) should check at least
for the following:
•Package condition
•Required documentation
•Product appearance/condition
•Product identification/marking
•Inspection of connectors or fiber-pigtails.
XND
R7-22
[101]
(7.3.5.2)
Parameters specified in Section 4 form the
minimum set of optical parameters which must
be guaranteed. If 100% testing for this purpose is
not performed, adequate data shall be collected
and a statistically justified sampling plan must
be established. This sampling test program must
be approved in writing from the LEC, service
provider or its representative.
XND
R7-23
[102]
(7.3.5.3)
All optical attenuators shall be subjected to a
temperature cycle screen. The minimum
requirements consist of 10 cycles between
temperature limits of at least –40°C and +75°C;
if these are outside the component's
specifications, the minimum- and maximum-
specified storage temperatures shall be used.
X X ND
O7-24
[103]
(7.3.5.3)
The demonstration of the effectiveness of
alternate temperature cycle conditions for
screening should include first characterizing
devices after the proposed number of
temperature cycles and again after 10 cycles,
presumably showing that no significant
degradation nor additional failures occurred.
The demonstration should be proved on
adequate samples over multiple lots.
X X ND
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Executive Summary
ES–25
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
O7-25
[104]
(7.3.5.3)
All optical attenuators should be subjected to a
temperature humidity screen. The minimum
requirement is 72 hours at +75°C and 90% RH.
X X ND
R7-26
[105]
(7.3.5.3)
Optical criteria shall be measured before and
after screening. Any “major” changes (as
defined and documented by the equipment
supplier, in addition to pass/fail criteria) shall
result in rejection of a device.
X X ND
O7-27
[106]
(7.3.5.3)
The pass/fail criteria should be no more than
20% changes on the specified parameters.
XND
O7-28
[107]
(7.3.5.3)
The manufacturer should record the optical
criteria before and after screening on a sample
of components as a production audit.
XND
Quality and Reliability Criteria
R7-29
[108]
(7.4)
The supplier shall, on request, make
documentation available that describes:
•The quality program used in the manufacture
of the product. This shall include but not be
limited to controls, procedures and standards
for component reliability assurance, incoming
material inspection procedures, product
manufacture, in-process testing, equipment
calibration and maintenance, final product
inspection and testing, initial and periodic
qualification testing, and control of
nonconforming materials/product. The
component reliability assurance program shall
address vendor selection/qualification,
component qualification, and lot controls
(incoming inspection, source inspection, and
where appropriate, ship-to-stock practices).
•The installation, operation and maintenance of
the product.
•Support procedures for the product once it is in
use. This includes items such as repair,
technical assistance, training and a means of
notifying the customer of problems and/or
changes in the product.
XND
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Executive Summary Febr ua ry 3, 200 5
ES–26
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
R7-30
[109]
(7.4.1)
The supplier shall allow the performance of a
Reliability Audit at the production facilities
where the product is manufactured and
assembled.
XND
R7-31
[110]
(7.4.1)
The supplier shall have a program in place to
monitor both the early-life and long-term
reliability of the product. The program shall
include documented procedures for analysis,
testing, and measurement of reliability. The
reliability data shall be made available on
request.
XND
R7-32
[111]
(7.4.2)
The supplier's manufacturing process and
associated quality assurance systems, as they
relate to products covered by this document,
shall be subject to periodic quality process and
finished product audits.
XND
TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria
and Conformance Status (Continued)
GR-910
Req. #
[Abs. #]
(Sec. #)
Item
V
E
R
I
F
Y
A
N
A
L
Y
Z
E
I
N
S
P
E
C
T
T
E
S
T
Results
(Pass/
Fail/
NA/
ND)
Comment
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Program Scope
PS–1
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Program Scope
The scope of this program is comprehensive and includes all essential elements
required under GR-910-CORE (Issue 2). Telcordia verifies, analyzes, inspects and
tests Tyco Electronics Corporation’s 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout
Attenuators to determine conformance to each essential Requirement (R),
Objective (O), Conditional Requirement (CR), and Conditional Objective (CO). A
complete list of the criteria to be evaluated is included as TP-910 Table ES-1 located
in the Executive Summary section of this Test Report. Any criteria that may not be
applicable to a specific product will be denoted as “NA” in TP-910 Table ES-1, and
the reason will be stated.
For vendors of Verizon, the requirements specified herein shall be accomplished at
either a certified PFOC ITL or at an approved PFOC ITL client site under the
surveillance of PFOC ITL.
Test Report Format
It is the intent of this Test Plan for it to be converted to a Test Report for delivery to
the client at the completion of the test program. In this way, a uniform correlation
will be maintained between the GR-910-CORE Generic Requirements document,
the Telcordia Test Plan, and the Test Report. It is an essential requirement of
Verizon for there to be a one-to-one mapping between GR-910-CORE Issue
2 and this document for Section 3 (General and Design Criteria), Section 4
(Performance Criteria) and Section 7 (Reliability and Quality Assurance
Program). Section 1 of GR-910-CORE is administrative in nature and does
not contain criteria or require testing, and therefore it is not required or
included in this document. Section 2 of GR-910-CORE does not include
criteria or require any testing, but it does provide useful background
information on passive optical components. Therefore, it is included in this
document. Section 5 of GR-910-CORE describes the test procedures for the
performance analysis of single-mode fiber optic attenuators which are used
within the content of Section 4. Finally, Section 6 of GR-910-CORE
contains the Telcordia Passive Optical Component Code (POCC)
description format which offers a quick reference to mechanical, electrical,
and optical definitions.
For any case where Telcordia will not be evaluating Reliability criteria, Section 7 of
GR-910-CORE may be reduced to a statement to describe why they were not
evaluated by Telcordia (if this is a Verizon PFOC ITL, Verizon should be notified in
advance).
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Program Scope February 3, 2005
PS–2
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Program Initiation Flowchart
The process for initiation of a program under GR-910-CORE is illustrated in the flow
chart shown in TP-910 Figure PS-1 below:
TP-910 Figure PS-1 Program Initiation Flowchart
Receipt of
Signed Service
Order
Legal and Technical
Review; Processing
by Billing Organization
to establish project
numbering codes
Project Leader and
team assigned
Project
Documentation File
Formally
Established
Kickoff discussion
with client to establish
roles, responsibilities
and project action
items
Client provides
product samples for
test and required
documentation
Test Plans Prepared
and Proposed
Schedule is
Established
Test Plans reviewed
by client and client
customers if needed
(req’d for Verizon
programs)
Test plans comments
reflected in updated
test plan as required
Testing and
Documentation
Review Phase Begins
Process Discussion
held at client site to
review and verify
documented
processes as required
to establish
conformance to
general requirements
Samples
Selected for
Testing
Perform all required
tests for GR-910-
CORE Section 4
Analyze supplier
documetnation and
results of onsite
process audit
Record all
findings relative
to test and
measurement
related criteria
Record all
findings relative
to general
criteria
conformance
Completion of
Section 3 and 7
of Analysis
Report
Complete
Section 4 of
Analysis Report
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Program Scope
PS–3
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
High-Level Flowchart for Service Life and General Requirements
Evaluation/Test Program
The overall flow for the entire GR-910-CORE PFOC program is illustrated in the
high-level flow chart shown in TP-910 Figure PS-2. This chart shows each major
step required to assess conformance, and is not intended to demonstrate the most
efficient or actual path for completion.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Program Scope February 3, 2005
PS–4
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure PS-2 High-Level Flowchart for Service Life and General
Requirements Evaluation/Test Program
Samples Received,
Uniquely Identified
and Inspected for
Condition
Section 3 -
General and
Design Criteria
Section 3.1 -
Documentation
Section 3.2 -
Marking,
Packaging and
Shipping
Section 3.3 -
Physical Design
Criteria
Check Calibration of
all test equipment to
be used for
measurements
Set Up of the
Standard Test
Configuration
Perform preparation
and warm up of
specific systems in
accordance with
manuals/instructions
Section 4 -
Performance
Criteria
Section 4.1 -
Environmental
and Mechanical
Criteria
Section 4.1.1 -
Controlled
Operating
Environment
Section 4.1.2 -
Uncontrolled
Operating
Environment
Section 4.1.3 -
Non-Operating
Environment
Section 4.1.4 -
Humidity/
Condensation
Cycling
Section 4.1.5 -
Water
Immersion
Section 4.1.6 -
Vibration
Section 4.1.9 -
Side Pull
Section 4.1.10 -
Cable Retention
Section 4.1.11 -
Durability
Section 4.1.12 -
Impact
Section 4.2 -
Optical Criteria
Section 4.2.1 -
Optical Bandpass
Section 4.2.2 -
Change in
Attenuation
Section 4.2.3 -
Attenuation
Tolerance
Section 4.2.5 -
Reflectance
Section 4.2.6 -
PDL
Section 4.2.7 -
PMD
Section 4.2.8 -
Damage Criteria
Analyze all
results and
complete report
preparation
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Administrative Data (not from GR-910)
1–1
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
1.0 Administrative Data (not from GR-910)
1.1 Description of Test Item(s) (not from GR-910)
Buildout attenuators are 2 port, bidirectional components without integral optical
fiber leads. These attenuators were manufactured to an attenuation tolerance of
3 ±0.5 dB and ≥55 dB return loss.
1.2 Part Number(s) and Serial Number(s) of Test Item(s) (not from GR-910)
Product part number: 209250-3
Serial numbers of tested samples including hot spares are correlated to sample
numbers as follows:
1.3 Location(s) of Manufacturing (not from GR-910)
3/F No. 138 He Dan Road
Waigaoqiao Free Trade Zone
Shanghai 200131, China
TP-910 Table 1-1 Sample Name and Serial Number of Tested Samples, Hot
Spares
Test Sample
Name
Test Sample
Serial
Number
Hot Spare
Serial
Number
i.l.01 63 64
i.l.02 68 67
i.l.03 74 73
i.l.04 75 77
i.l.05 78 80
i.l.06 86 81
i.l.07 88 84
i.l.08 94 85
i.l.09 97 87
i.l.10 98 102
i.l.11 103 108
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Administrative Data (not from GR-910) February 3, 2005
1–2
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
1.4 Test/Evaluation Location(s) and Dates (not from GR-910)
Telcordia Technologies
Raritan River Software Systems Center
One Telcordia Drive
Piscataway, NJ 08844-4157
Laboratory: RRC-1D169
Laboratory: RRC-1D183
Testing/Evaluation commenced on: April 12, 2004
Testing/Evaluation concluded on: August 3, 2004
1.5 References (not from GR-910)
Telcordia References
•BR 781-826-127, Optical Cross-Connect Planning (A Module of the OXPEG)
•GR-63-CORE, Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Generic
Equipment Requirements
•GR-253-CORE, Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems:
Common Generic Criteria, (A Module of TSGR, FR-440)
•TR-NWT-000264, Optical Fiber Cleavers
•GR-326-CORE, Generic Requirements for Single-Mode Optical Connectors and
Jumper Assemblies
•TR-NWT-000357, Generic Requirements for Assuring the Reliability of
Components used in Telecommunications Equipment
•GR-409-CORE, Generic Requirements for Premises Fiber Optic Cable
•GR-765-CORE, Generic Requirements for Single Fiber Optical Splices and
Systems
•TA-NWT-000909, Generic Requirements and Objectives for Fiber In The Loop
Systems
•GR-1209-CORE, Generic Requirements for Passive Optical Components
•GR-1221-CORE, Generic Reliability Assurance Requirements for Fiber Optic
Branching Components
•GR-1252-CORE, Quality System Generic Requirements for Hardware (A
Module of RQGR, FR-796).
•SR-NWT-001907, Transport Reliability Analysis Generic Guidelines (TRAGG)
•SR-NWT-002014, Suggested Optical Cable Code (SOCC)
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Administrative Data (not from GR-910)
1–3
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
•SR-NWT-2759, A View of Packaging, Packing, Palletization, and Marking
Requirements
Electronic Industries Association (EIA) References
The EIA/TIA-455 documents (the official document numbers) are more commonly
known as FOTPs (for Fiber Optic Test Procedures), and are referred to as such in
the text of this document.
•EIA/TIA-455-A, Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables,
Transducers, Sensors, Connecting and Terminating Devices, and Other Fiber
Optic Components
•EIA/TIA-455-1A, FOTP-1: Cable Flexing for Fiber Optic Interconnecting
Devices
•EIA/TIA-455-2B, FOTP-2: Impact Test Measurements for Fiber Optic Devices
•EIA/TIA-455-3A, FOTP-3: Procedure to Measure Temperature Cycling Effects
on Optical Fibers, Optical Cable, and Other Passive Fiber Optic Components
•EIA/TIA-455-5A, FOTP-5: Humidity Test Procedure for Fiber Optic
Connecting Devices
•EIA/TIA-455-6A, FOTP-6: Cable Retention Test Procedure For Fiber Optic
Cable Interconnecting Devices
•EIA/TIA-455-11, FOTP-11: Vibration Test Procedure For Fiber Optic
Connecting Devices
•EIA/TIA-455-12A, FOTP-12: Fluid Immersion Test for Fiber Optic Components
•EIA/TIA-455-13, FOTP-13: Visual and Mechanical Inspection of Fiber Optic
Devices
•EIA/TIA-455-20A, FOTP-20: Measurement of Change In Optical
Transmittance
•EIA/TIA-455-36, FOTP-36: Twist Test For Fiber Optic Connecting Devices
•EIA/TIA-455-57, FOTP-57: Optical Fiber End Preparation and Examination
•EIA/TIA-455-78, FOTP-78: Spectral Attenuation Cutback Measurement for
Single-Mode Optical Fibers
•EIA/TIA-455-107, FOTP-107: Return Loss for Fiber Optic Components
•EIA/TIA-455-127, FOTP-127: Spectral Characterization of Multimode Lasers
Other References
•ASTM B117, Salt Spray (Fog) Testing
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Administrative Data (not from GR-910) February 3, 2005
1–4
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
•ASTM D610, Standard Method of Evaluating Degree of Rusting on Painted
Steel Surfaces
•ASTM D2863, Standard Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen
Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen
Index)
•ASTM G21, Determining Resistance of Polymeric Material to Fungi
•MIL-M-38510J, General Specification for Microcircuits, Military Specification,
(November 1991)
•UL 94, Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and
Appliances
Optical Safety References
•ANSIZ136.2, American National Standard for the Safe Use of Optical Fiber
Communications Systems Utilizing Laser Diode and LED Sources, 1997.
•FDA 79-8035, United States Food and Drug Administration, Bureau of
Radiological Health Laser Product Safety Classifications, 21 CFR 1040,
August 20, 1985.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General Information
2–1
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
2.0 General Information
2.1 General Product Description
A fiber optic attenuator is a passive, in-line, optical component that intentionally
reduces (attenuates) the optical power propagating in fiber. GR-910 Figure 2-1a)
shows a schematic representation of a Fixed Attenuator and GR-910 Figure 2-1b)
shows a Variable Attenuator.
Variable attenuators may adjust power continuously or in discrete steps. The ideal
attenuator has a stable attenuation over a wide temperature range and mechanical
stress. It is independent of wavelength and state of polarization, and causes no
reflection or interference of the optical signal. In addition, a variable attenuator
should have small attenuation increments, wide attenuation range, and accurate
control of attenuation.
2.2 Attenuator Technology
Manufacturing technology is not considered in detail here, other than to describe
some of the methods used to produce attenuators. In an all-fiber attenuator1, a
Ge-Al co-doped silica core attenuation fiber is cleaved at a specific length and
fusion spliced between two standard single-mode fibers. The attenuator is epoxied
into ferrules that are polished and packaged appropriately. In fused tapered
attenuators a tapered region of a specific length is produced by heating and pulling
the fiber. The tapered region is epoxied and packaged in a protective housing, ready
for connectorization or fusion splicing.
Several physical phenomena can be utilized to fabricate fixed and variable
attenuators, including divergence of light (in an air-gap attenuator), light absorption
or scattering through a partially opaque film or filtering material, reflection from, (a
bend radius, refractive index discontinuity, or at an angled surface), and optical
polarization. Air-gap attenuators inherently have high reflections and can cause
systems power penalties in high bit rate systems. Currently there are commercially
GR-910 Figure 2-1 The a) Fixed and b) Variable Attenuator Components
1. Chia, Shin-Lo, Cost-effective Single-Mode wavelength independent all-fiber attenuator, NFOEC June 1992.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General Information February 3, 2005
2–2
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
available attenuators that attenuate optical power via bend radius that do not
increase optical reflectance. These bend radius attenuators are currently designed
for the 1310 nm wavelength region. Further study needs to be undertaken to
evaluate the long term effects of small bend radii on optical fiber.
Both fixed and variable attenuators for use in fiber optic transmission systems will
be considered in this GR. Both types of attenuators can be used for BER
characterization of transmission systems by representing system power penalties.
•Fixed Attenuator An attenuator having a constant, non-adjustable value of
attenuation. Attenuation can be changed only by removing and replacing or by
concatenating fixed attenuators.
•Variable AttenuatorsAn attenuator that has a variable attenuation, varied with
an integral adjustment that can be either calibrated or uncalibrated
Attenuators may or may not have attached optical fiber pigtails, but attenuators
without fiber pigtails have either integral connector receptacles or optical
connector interfaces, for coupling to connectorized fiber cables. There are three
basic types of in-line attenuators: connector receptacle, optical pad, and patchcord
attenuators. Connector receptacles include bulkhead, barrel build-out, sleeve,
adaptor, or coupling. The connector receptacle attenuating element is either an air-
gap or filter and is part of the receptacle. Attenuators with male/female connector
interfaces attached to the body of the attenuator are referred to as optical pad
attenuators and look much like electrical pad attenuators. A patchcord attenuator
has one or two permanently attached fiber pigtails, which may or may not be
connectorized. The attenuating element in optical pad and patchcord attenuators is
a filter, a chemically etched fiber, or a fused tapered fiber. See GR-910 Figure 2-2 for
examples of types of attenuators.
GR-910 Figure 2-2 Attenuator Types a) Connector Receptacle, b) Optical Pad,
c) Patchcord
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General Information
2–3
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
The requirements of this document are intended for attenuators with single-mode
input and single-mode or multimode output, at nominal wavelengths of 1310 nm and
1550 nm. An air-gap attenuator, used to couple light from single-mode fiber to
multimode fiber, typically has a lower attenuation than it would have for coupling
light between single-mode fibers, because multimode fiber is able to capture more
diverging light. These attenuators are needed when multimode fiber is used to
connect the receiver input from a single-mode transmission link.
The non-mechanical control of attenuation, where an electrical (or magnetic) input
signal directly varies the optical attenuation, may be advantageous. For example,
liquid crystals rotate the polarization of light depending on an applied voltage.
Combined with a polarizing beam-splitter, polarization independent, electrically
variable attenuation is possible. Electro-optic attenuators are available that are
designed to control power in optical amplifiers used in Wavelength Division
Multiplexer (WDM) systems. However, electrically, magnetically, acoustically, or
optically variable attenuators are not be considered in this issue. However, as this
technology becomes available it may be necessary to include these technologies in
future issues of GR-910-CORE as the technology matures. Attenuators designed for
use in test or laboratory instruments (not designed to remain as part of a
transmission system) will also not be considered. This document considers only
passive optical attenuators that are intended for use in telecommunications
systems.
2.3 Attenuator Applications
Attenuators are used in fiber-optic transmission systems to reduce the optical
power received by the photodetector to a level that is within the dynamic range of
the optical receiver. The light intensity control of laser diodes and LEDs is limited
in dynamic range and can result in an undesired change in radiation pattern, modal
structure and central wavelength. Light intensity control at the transmitter has the
additional disadvantage of requiring either remote power monitoring at the
destination central office (CO) receiver or loop-back. Therefore, for interoffice
transmission applications, attenuators are normally deployed at the destination CO,
immediately in front of the receiver. A fixed value of attenuation is often adequate
to adjust the received power level to within the required range.
GR-910 Figure 2-3 shows a fiber optic transmission system with a variable
attenuator in front of the receiver. Such attenuators are useful for periodic
adjustment of received power should the link loss output power increase or
decrease during the life of the transmission system. Increased link loss may be
caused by degradation of the fiber, splices, or optical connectors. Variable
attenuators are also important for making optical measurements, such as BER as a
function of received power, which are important for characterizing the
performance of transmission systems.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General Information February 3, 2005
2–4
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Fiber-optic attenuators may be used in central offices or in outside enclosures such
as cabinets, huts, or underground vaults, and are intended for use in both controlled
and uncontrolled environments. Outside plant applications may involve locating
attenuators underground in subsurface enclosures which may be subject to
flooding, on outdoor walls, or on utility poles. The closures which enclose them may
be “free breathing” or they may be hermetic. Free-breathing closures will subject
them to temperature and humidity swings, possible condensation, and possible
biological action from airborne bacteria, insects, etc. Hermetic closures will subject
the attenuators within to temperature swings unless they are breached. Attenuators
in the underground plant may be subjected to groundwater immersion if closures
containing them are breached or improperly assembled.
A new application for attenuators is controlling gain in Ebrium Doped Fiber
Amplifiers (EDFA) and optical power in Dense WDM (DWDM) systems. These are
electro-optic attenuators that operate in the 1550 nm wavelength region. Electro-
optic attenuators are not covered in this document, but may be included in future
issues.
2.3.1 Environmental Conditions
A central office/node2 has a controlled environment with an ambient temperature
from 4°C to 38°C, and short-term ambient temperature for −5°C to 50°C, as stated
in Telcordia document GR-63-CORE. Short-term is defined as a period of not more
than 72 consecutive hours and a total of not more than 15 days in one year. Remote
sites and customer premises can have the same environment as a central office, as
in a controlled environment vault (CEV), or an uncontrolled environment, as in an
above-ground cabinet. In an uncontrolled environment, transmission systems must
operate over a temperature range from −40°C with no solar load to 46°C with
maximum solar load and power dissipation and a relative humidity of 5 to 95% for
the projected length of service. The worst-case operating temperature range for
passive components is defined as -40°C to 75°C with a relative humidity of
90 ± 5% RH (75°C is obtained by assuming the maximum solar load and power
dissipation results in a 29°C increase of the component above the maximum
ambient temperature of 46°C).
GR-910 Figure 2-3 Optical Transmission Using a Variable Attenuator.
2. Including remote nodes and customer premises.
TX RX
dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General Information
2–5
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Due to the difficulty of providing electrical power, the optical source at the ONU is
unlikely to have temperature control. This means that source wavelength can vary
with ambient temperature according to GR-910 Figure 2-4.
The shift in emission wavelength amounts to ~ 0.7°C and is roughly linear with
temperature. All optical sources are required to operate within the wavelength
range shown in gray. The optical bandpass objective for attenuators is designed to
match this wavelength range. The intent is to make generic attenuator components
compatible with all transmission equipment, regardless of environment.
2.4 Recommended Methods and Procedures (not from GR-910)
•CAUTION: Handle all cabling with care. Avoid handling damaged cables
with bare hands.
NOTE: FOR A MULTI-PORT DEVICE, ALL THE PORTS MUST BE
SUBJECTED TO OPTICAL, ENVIRONMENTAL AND MECHANICAL
TESTS.
Sections 3 through 7 of this test plan lists test conditions and outlines of
recommended test procedures. These methods and procedures are recommended
only. Telcordia recognizes that there are equivalent methods and procedures that
can be used to determine conformance or nonconformance. These methods and
procedures are used in Telcordia testing facilities and will be used in comparison
during witness testing.
GR-910 Figure 2-4 Central Wavelength Variation of Uncontrolled Optical Source
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General Information February 3, 2005
2–6
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
2.5 Test Equipment (not from GR-910)
Equipment that may be used to perform the testing of passive fiber optic
components is listed in the Test Apparatus section for each individual test
performed. The equipment used may differ from the particular equipment listed, but
must be equivalent to that equipment. For operating instructions on any particular
test equipment, please refer to the manufacturer’s user manual. Typical test setups
and facilities are described in the sections associated with the individual criteria, as
needed for the performance of the testing.
2.6 Optical Data Guidelines (not from GR-910)
2.6.1 Acquisition of Optical Data (not from GR-910)
The following guidelines apply to the collection of data:
•A minimum of four reference transmission paths will be monitored during
testing to determine the stability of the test system. The transmission paths will
consist of splice(s), identical fiber media of the same length spliced to the
samples, and adjacent optical switch channels
•A reflectance reference with a value of –60 dB shall be monitored during the
testing
•All the optical equipment used for measuring characteristics of the component
must be referenced out prior to the actual measurements
•The data is to be collected via software-controlled data acquisition systems,
where applicable
•All guidelines mentioned in Section 4 of GR-910-CORE, Issue 2 must be followed
for the applicable component type.
2.6.2 Analysis of Optical Data (not from GR-910)
The optical performance data will consist of initial, during, and post values for the
applicable characteristic at applicable wavelengths. The average value of the
references will be used to normalize the measured values. Each unit tested will be
included in the test report.
2.7 Test Sequence and Schedule (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Table 2-1 below lists the test sequences and approximate duration to
perform the tests required in a GR-910 analysis. Test durations are based on the
estimated test execution time, as test setup and sample preparation time can vary
depending on test equipment availability and level of sample preparedness
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General Information
2–7
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
performed by the supplier when submitting the samples for test. Analysis of
conformance to the General Requirements, which are verification based and do not
require specific tests to be performed, will be conducted in parallel to those criteria
that are addressed via testing. A draft test report is developed in parallel to all
testing, incorporating results as tests are completed, and the full draft report is
planned to be completed within two weeks of completion of all testing.
TP-910 Table 2-1 Testing Sequences and Estimated Durations
Test Title GR-910
Section Estimated Duration
1Environmental and Mechanical
Criteria
4.1
2Controlled Operating Environment 4.1.1 8 days
3Uncontrolled Operating Environment 4.1.2 8 days
4Non-Operating Environment 4.1.3 15 days
5Humidity/Condensation Cycling Test 4.1.4 8 days
6Water Immersion 4.1.5 8 days
7Vibration 4.1.6 1-2 days
8Flex Test 4.1.7 1-2 days
9Twist Test 4.1.8 1-2 days
10 Side Pull Load 4.1.9 2-3 days
11 Cable Retention 4.1.10 3-4 days
12 Durability 4.1.11 5 days
13 Impact Test 4.1.12 1-2 days
14 Optical Criteria 4.2
15 Optical Bandpass 4.2.1 1-2 days
16 Change in Attenuation 4.2.2 NA
17 Attenuation Tolerance 4.2.3 1 day
18 Attenuation Increments and Range 4.2.4 1 day
19 Reflectance 4.2.5 1 day
20 Polarization-Dependent Loss (PDL) 4.2.6 1 day
21 Polarization-Mode Dispersion (PMD) 4.2.7 1 day
22 Damage Criteria 4.2.8 NA
23 Documentation 3.1 1 day
24 Marking, Packaging and Shipping 3.2 1 day
25 Physical Design Criteria 3.3 3 days
26 Qualification Criteria 7.3 1 day
27 Quality and Reliability Criteria 7.4 3 days
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General Information February 3, 2005
2–8
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
2.8 Test Samples
NOTE: All ports must be subjected to the full suite of GR-910 tests
Per Verizon requirements, a minimum of eleven (11) module test samples shall be
required for statistical sampling purposes. Suppliers may elect at their option to test
a higher number of samples, however eleven samples will be the minimum to
remain in accord with Verizon specifications.
The length of individual, unconnectorized fiber leads shall be a minimum of two (2)
meters in length to provide adequate slack for splicing. In some intra-office (CO)
applications, passive optical components may be needed with leads long enough to
span the gap between distributing frames.
For passive optical components intended to serve as interconnects or cross-
connects between the Outside Plant (OSP) panel and the network equipment, the
length of individual connectorized fiber pigtails should be at least two (2) meters in
length.
Customer shall provide twenty five (25) fiber optic attenuator samples. From these
25 samples, Telcordia will choose eleven (11) test samples randomly for optical
testing and eleven (11) hot spares, to be used in the event of non-conformance(s).
Per Verizon requirements, the supplier shall provide their recommended chassis/
cabinet/housing with the mountable device, if applicable, for vibration and shock
testing. If devices need to be spliced, detailed documentation on the mounting
procedure shall be provided.
As previously noted, all ports are intended to be tested. Customer shall however
provide terminators to be available in the event that any ports are disconnected for
any reason in the execution of any of the testing.
Reliability test sample sizes will be confirmed with Verizon prior to any related
GR-1221 reliability testing done in concurrence with the GR-910 tests.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General and Design Criteria
3–1
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.0 General and Design Criteria
Generic requirements are identified by the word “shall” and denoted by GS-N,
where G is an R, O, CR, or CO, S is the section number and N is the number of the
criterion within the section. In addition, the criterion is marked with a number in
brackets [] that corresponds to the criterion number within the entire document.
Refer to Section 1.3 of GR-910-CORE for further explanation of requirements and
objectives.
3.1 Documentation
Requirements on product documentation are twofold: general and user-specific.
3.1.1 General Documentation
General documentation includes all information a customer needs to select, order
and use a product. This type of information is typically found in product literature
such as catalogs, sales brochures, manuals, product data, and instructions sheets.
3.1.1.1 Criteria - General Documentation (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R3-1 [1] On request, the supplier shall provide a complete set of documentation
that includes:
•Product Description
— General features
— Manufacturer name, model number and date made
— Type of attenuator, fixed or variable
— Attenuator component termination (e. g., pigtail, connector type)
— Fiber-type
— Description of attenuating element (e. g., filter, type of fiber)
— Applications.
•Performance Specifications
— Increments and range of attenuation
— Optical characteristic in Section 4.2 (attenuation tolerance, bandpass,
reflectance and polarization)
— Storage environment temperature and humidity range
— Maximum fiber and fiber cable retention, flex, and twist force
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General and Design Criteria February 3, 2005
3–2
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
— Thermal stability
— Humidity resistance
— Vibration stability
— Impact resistance
— Resistance to airborne contaminants.
•Installation Instructions
— Component dimensions
— Tools necessary for installation
— Mounting features, conditions, and location in relation to other system
components
— Safety precautions
— Test equipment and testing methods to be used when the item is
provisioned.
•Operating Instructions
— Use and handling including optical connector mating and splicing.
•Maintenance
— Cleaning instructions
— Routine maintenance schedule
— Instructions to identify the effects of faults and the methods used to isolate
a problem
— Service and service contact information.
•Ordering Information
— Model numbers
— Connector interface options
— Available fiber types, lengths, and mode field diameter
— Mounting options
— Package configuration & package material options
— All other options.
•Testing and troubleshooting procedure
•Repair instructions and contact for repair service
•Storage and transportation instructions.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General and Design Criteria
3–3
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.1.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
A. Verify that the Product Description under the terms of this document includes:
1. General features
2. Manufacturer name, model number and date made
3. Type of attenuator, fixed or variable
4. Attenuator component termination (e. g., pigtail, connector type)
5. Fiber-type
6. Description of attenuating element (e. g., filter, type of fiber)
7. Applications.
B. Verify that the Performance Specifications under the terms of this document
includes:
1. Increments and range of attenuation
2. Optical characteristic in GR-910-CORE Section 4.2 (attenuation tolerance,
bandpass, reflectance and polarization)
3. Storage environment temperature and humidity range
4. Maximum fiber and fiber cable retention, flex, and twist force
5. Thermal stability
6. Humidity resistance
7. Vibration stability
8. Impact resistance
9. Resistance to airborne contaminants.
C. Verify that the Installation Instructions under the terms of this document
includes:
1. Component dimensions
2. Tools necessary for installation
3. Mounting features, conditions, and location in relation to other system
components
4. Safety precautions
5. Test equipment and testing methods to be used when the item is
provisioned.
D. Verify that the Operating Instructions under the terms of this document includes
use and handling, including optical connector mating and splicing.
E. Verify that the Maintenance under the terms of this document includes
1. Cleaning instructions
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General and Design Criteria February 3, 2005
3–4
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
2. Routine maintenance schedule
3. Instructions to identify the effects of faults and the methods used to isolate
a problem
4. Service and service contact information.
F. Verify that the Ordering Information under the terms of this document includes:
1. Model numbers
2. Connector interface options
3. Available fiber types, lengths, and mode field diameter
4. Mounting options
5. Package configuration & package material options
6. All other options.
G. Verify that the Testing and Troubleshooting procedures are provided.
H. Verify that the Repair Instructions and contact for repair service are provided.
I. Verify that the Storage and Transportation Instructions are provided.
J. Record test results.
K. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer
authorized representative in accordance with the Quality Assurance Program of
Telcordia.
L. Go to the next test group.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General and Design Criteria
3–5
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.1.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
3.1.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Not applicable
3.1.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Not applicable
3.1.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.1.1.1 of this document has been
established. Conformance is based on the verification that the Product Description
TP-910 Figure 3-1 Test Flowchart - General Documentation (not from GR-910)
Does the
documentation cover all
of the topics listed in GR-
910 R3-1 [1]?
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Yes
No
Test Product and
associated
documentation are
provided by supplier
Review product
documentation for
inclusion of required
information
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General and Design Criteria February 3, 2005
3–6
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
under the terms of this document have been met, verification that the Performance
Specifications under the terms of this document have been met, verification that the
Installation Instructions under the terms of this document have been met,
verification that the Operating Instructions under the terms of this document have
been met, verification that the Maintenance under the terms of this document have
been met, verification that the Ordering Information under the terms of this
document have been met, verification that the Testing and Troubleshooting
procedures are provided, verification that the Repair Instructions and contact for
repair service are provided, and verification that the Storage and Transportation
Instructions are provided.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
3.1.2 Workcenter Information Package
The manufacturer may be requested to prepare instructional material for individual
Telcordia clients. Such instructional material could include a Workcenter
Information Package (WIP) which may be an audio-visual training presentation.
Information regarding the specific requirements for this documentation will be
provided by the company making the request.
No specific WIP testing specifications are provided at this time.
3.2 Marking, Packaging and Shipping
The Passive Optical Component Code (POCC) is proposed as a uniform method for
identifying and ordering components. The POCC offers a quick reference to optical
component characteristics in a minimum number of characters. It is described in
Section 6.
3.2.1 Criteria - Marking, Packaging and Shipping (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 O3-2 [2] Buffering and jacket color for single-mode attenuators should be yellow.
GR-910 O3-3 [3] Buffering and jacket color for multimode attenuators should be orange.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General and Design Criteria
3–7
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
GR-910 O3-4 [4] The POCC should appear on the attenuator housing, including the
manufacturer serial number (if applicable).
GR-910 R3-5 [5] Attenuators designed to comply with specific applications (such as those
indicated by CR in this document) shall be labeled to clearly distinguish them from
other products that they may resemble.
The following requirements apply to the packaging and shipping of attenuators.
GR-910 R3-6 [6] The packaged part(s) shall be clearly labeled, with parts and names
consistent with those given in the product instructions, in a manner consistent with
the requirements of SR-NWT-2759, A View of Packaging, Packing, Palletization,
and Marking Requirements.
GR-910 R3-7 [7] All required assembly components (e. g., tools, instructions and materials)
shall be shipped together.
GR-910 R3-8 [8] The packaging shall be adequate to ensure that the attenuators will not be
damaged under normal handling, shipping and storage in reasonably dry, unheated
quarters.
GR-910 R3-9 [9] Attenuators shall be packaged and shipped with dust caps or other dust
impermeable packaging material.
GR-910 O3-10 [10] The packaging materials should be recyclable.
GR-910 O3-11 [11] The information necessary to identify the product should be bar coded.
3.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
A. Visually inspect and verify that:
1. Loose tube and jacket color for single-mode attenuators are yellow
2. Loose tube and jacket color for multimode attenuators are orange
3. The POCC appears on the attenuator housing, including the manufacturer
serial number (if applicable)
4. Components designed to conform with specific applications (such as those
indicated by CR in this document) are labeled to clearly distinguish them
from other products that they may resemble.
B. Visually inspect that the following requirements involving shipping and
packaging of attenuators:
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General and Design Criteria February 3, 2005
3–8
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
1. The packaged part(s) are clearly labeled, with parts and names consistent
with those given in the product instructions, in a manner consistent with the
requirements of SR-NWT-2759, A View of Packaging, Packing,
Palletization, and Marking Requirements.
2. All required assembly components (e. g., tools, instructions and materials)
are shipped together.
3. The packaging shall be adequate to ensure that the attenuators will not be
damaged under normal handling, shipping and storage.
4. Attenuators are packaged and shipped with dust caps or other dust
impermeable packaging material.
5. The packaging materials should be recyclable.
6. The information necessary to identify the product should be included on the
packaging.
C. Record test results.
D. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer
authorized representative in accordance with the Quality Assurance Program of
Telcordia.
E. Go to the next test group.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General and Design Criteria
3–9
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 3-2 Test Flowchart - Marking, Packaging and Shipping (not from
GR-910)
Does the
product meet
GR-910 O3-2 [2],
GR-910 O3-3 [3],
GR-910 O3-4 [4] and
GR-910 R3-5 [5]?
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Yes
No
Test Product is
selected
Perform visual inspection
for specified markings
Yes
Does the
product meet
GR-910 R3-6 [6] thru
GR-910 R3-9 [9],
GR-910 O3-10 [10] &
GR-910 O3-11 [11]?
Perform visual inspection
of materials related to
packaging and shipping
No
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General and Design Criteria February 3, 2005
3–10
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Not applicable
3.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Not applicable
3.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.2.1 of this document has been established.
Conformance is based on the verification that visual inspection has been performed
to verify that loose tube and jacket color for single-mode attenuators are yellow,
loose tube and jacket color for multimode attenuators are orange, the POCC
appears on the attenuator housing, and that the components designed to conform
with specific applications are labeled. Conformance is also based on the visual
inspection of the shipping and packaging of the attenuators.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
3.3 Physical Design Criteria
3.3.1 Optical Fiber
The 250-µm coated fiber leads must be protected from damage. For attenuators in
which such leads are user-accessible, handling precautions must be observed, and
the attenuators must be mounted in a protective housing such as a splice closure.
Handling precautions are intended to prevent fiber breakage when unpackaging,
transporting and mounting attenuators.
Buffering and cabling reduce the likelihood of fiber breakage, and make the leads
less susceptible to tangling. However, some 900-µm tight buffered fiber is difficult
to strip. Therefore, users that plan to splice or connectorize attenuators with leads
should specify or ascertain the type of tight buffered fiber used by the supplier for
the attenuator leads. Otherwise, attenuator leads consisting of separately strippable
or loose buffered fiber1 are normally used. Fiber and fiber cable used in attenuators
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General and Design Criteria
3–11
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
must be compatible with fiber used in the Telcordia client networks in order to
minimize losses at splices and connectors. Any fiber is expected to be spliced using
splices as described in GR-765-CORE.
3.3.1.1 Criteria - Optical Fiber (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R3-12 [12] All fiber and fiber cable used in attenuators shall meet the criteria in
GR-409-CORE, Generic Requirements for Premises Fiber Cable. Attenuators
intended for use in outside side plant environments shall meet the outdoor
requirements in GR-409-CORE.
To determine compliance with GR-409-CORE, test samples with ≥ 2 meter length
lead may be required.
For leads that are unconnectorized, or otherwise unterminated, a minimum fiber
length is necessary for splicing or connectorizing.
GR-910 R3-13 [13] The length of individual, unconnectorized fiber leads shall be ≥ 1 meter
to provide sufficient slack for splicing.
In some intraoffice (CO) applications, attenuators may be needed with leads long
enough to span the gap between distributing frames.
GR-910 CR3-14 [14] For attenuators intended to serve as interconnects or cross-connects
between the outside plant (OSP) panel and the network equipment, the length of
individual connectorized fiber pigtails should be ≥ 2 meters.
Rationale: Attenuators with 2 meter long pigtails should permit connections
between the interconnect/cross-connect panel and network equipment without the
need for additional jumpers.
3.3.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
A. Verify that:
1. all fiber and fiber cable used in attenuators meet the criteria in GR-409-
CORE, Generic Requirements for Premises Fiber Cable
2. attenuators intended for use in outside plant environment meet the outdoor
requirements in GR-409-CORE
3. the length of individual, unconnectorized fiber leads is ≥ 1 meter
1. Loose buffered fiber has a buffer coating material that is in contact with, but does not adhere strongly to the
fiber coating, such that it can be easily removed without damaging the fiber coating.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General and Design Criteria February 3, 2005
3–12
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4. the length of individual connectorized fiber pigtails is ≥ 2 meters for
attenuators intended to serve as interconnects or cross-connects between
the outside plant (OSP) panel and the network equipment.
B. Record test results.
C. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer
authorized representative in accordance with the Quality Assurance Program of
Telcordia.
D. Go to the next test group.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General and Design Criteria
3–13
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 3-3 Test Flowchart - Optical Fiber Physical Design (not from
GR-910)
Does the
product meet the
applicable criteria from
GR-409?
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Yes
No
Test Product and associated
conformance documentation
are provided by supplier
Review GR-409 conformance
documentation provided by supplier
Do the
fiber leads/pigtails meet
GR-910 R3-13 [13] and
GR-910 CR3-14 [14]?
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
No
Yes
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General and Design Criteria February 3, 2005
3–14
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Shall be included in conformance documentation provided by supplier.
3.3.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Shall be included in conformance documentation provided by supplier.
3.3.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.1.1 of this document has been partially
established. Results for requirement GR-910 R3-12 [12] were not determined and
the criteria for requirement GR-910 R3-13 [13] and GR-910 CR3-14 [14] were not
applicable. Conformance is based on the verification that all of the fiber and fiber
cable used in the attenuator meet the criteria in GR-409-CORE, verification that
attenuators intended for use in an outside plant environment meet the outdoor
requirements in GR-409-CORE, verification that the length of individual,
unconnectorized fiber leads are ≥ 1 meter, and verification that the length of
individual connectorized fiber pigtails are ≥ 2 meters for attenuators intended to
serve as interconnects or cross-connects between the outside plant panel and the
network equipment.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
Sample Size
Not applicable.
3.3.2 Optical Connectors
3.3.2.1 Criteria - Optical Connectors (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R3-15 [15] Any single-mode optical connectors and/or connector interfaces used
in the construction of the attenuator shall meet the criteria in GR-326-CORE,
Generic Requirements for Optical Fiber Connectors.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General and Design Criteria
3–15
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
This requirement applies to attenuators with built-in connector receptacles,
connector interfaces, and connectorized pigtails.
3.3.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
A. Perform testing or verify conformance for any single mode optical connector
used in the construction of the attenuator per GR-326-CORE Generic
Requirements for Single-mode Optical Connectors and Jumper Assemblies.
B. Record test results.
C. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer
authorized representative.
D. If the criteria are met, then subject the DUT to the next test group.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General and Design Criteria February 3, 2005
3–16
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
3.3.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Shall be included in conformance documentation provided by supplier.
3.3.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Shall be included in conformance documentation provided by supplier.
TP-910 Figure 3-4 Test Flowchart - Optical Connectors (not from GR-910)
Does the
product meet the
applicable criteria from
GR-326?
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Yes
No
Test Product and
associated
conformance
documentation are
provided by supplier
Review GR-326
conformance
documentation provided
by supplier
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General and Design Criteria
3–17
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.2.1 of this document has not been
established. Results for requirement GR-910 R3-15 [15] were not determined.
Conformance is based on the attenuator’s single-mode optical connectors and/or
connector interface used in the construction meeting the criteria in GR-326-CORE.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
3.3.3 Cleanability
3.3.3.1 Criteria - Cleanability (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R3-16 [16] Attenuators with accessible attenuation elements shall not be damaged
nor change attenuation value when cleaned according to manufacturers’
instructions.
GR-910 R3-17 [17] Suppliers shall specify cleaning instructions and materials for cleaning
attenuators.
GR-910 R3-18 [18] Cleaning procedures shall meet all applicable safety requirements.
3.3.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
A. Verify the manufacturer has specified cleaning instructions and cleaning
materials for cleaning attenuators.
B. Verify that the manufacturer’s cleaning procedures meet all applicable safety
requirements. Also see cleaning safety requirements of Section 3.3.6.
C. Verify that attenuators with accessible attenuation elements are not damaged
nor change attenuation value when cleaned according to manufacturers’
instructions.
D. Record test results.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General and Design Criteria February 3, 2005
3–18
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
E. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer
authorized representative.
F. If the criteria are met, then subject the DUT to the next test group.
3.3.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 3-5 Test Flowchart - Cleanability (not from GR-910)
Are
cleaning procedures
complete and compliant to safety
criteria?
Document Results and go
to next criteria section
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Yes
No
Test Product, cleaning instructions, and
associated conformance documentation
are provided by supplier
Review cleaning instructions and
conformance documentation related to
safety compliance.
Are
accessible attenuation
elements damaged or is
attenuation value
changed?
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
No
Yes
Clean attenuators according to
manufacture’s instructions.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General and Design Criteria
3–19
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Shall be included in the cleaning procedure documentation provided by supplier.
3.3.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Shall be included in the cleaning procedure documentation provided by supplier.
3.3.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.3.1 of this document has been
established. Conformance is based on the verification that the manufacturer has
specified cleaning instructions and cleaning materials for cleaning attenuators,
verification that the manufacturer’s cleaning procedures meet all applicable safety
requirements, and verification that attenuators with accessible attenuation
elements are not damaged or that the attenuation value does not change when
cleaning.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
Photographs
Not applicable.
3.3.4 Intermateability
Users must be able to purchase attenuators and connectors of a specific design,
from a variety of manufacturers, with assurance that the product purchased from
one supplier will function satisfactorily when intermated with a product
manufactured by another supplier.
Attenuator Intermateability is the ability to integrate different manufacturers’
attenuators and optical connectors, that meet specific performance criteria for
attenuator and connector design, even though they may come from different
suppliers.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General and Design Criteria February 3, 2005
3–20
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.4.1 Criteria - Intermateability (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R3-19 [75] Intermateability – Attenuator connectors, connector interfaces, and
couplings shall meet the Intermateability requirements describe in GR-326-CORE.
This requirement will help to ensure not only the intermateability of the suppliers’
product to themselves, but also the intermateability of different suppliers’ products
to each other.
3.3.4.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
A. Perform testing or verify conformance of the attenuator to the Intermateability
requirements describe in GR-326-CORE, Generic Requirements for Single-
mode Optical Connectors and Jumper Assemblies.
B. Record test results.
C. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer
authorized representative.
D. If the criteria are met, then subject the DUT to the next test group.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General and Design Criteria
3–21
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.4.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
3.3.4.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Shall be included in conformance documentation provided by supplier.
3.3.4.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Shall be included in conformance documentation provided by supplier.
3.3.4.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.4.1 of this document has not been
established. Results for requirement GR-910 R3-19 [75] were not determined.
TP-910 Figure 3-6 Test Flowchart - Intermateability (not from GR-910)
Does the
product meet the
applicable criteria from
GR-326?
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Yes
No
Test Product and associated
conformance documentation
are provided by supplier
Review GR-326 Intermateability
conformance documentation
provided by supplier
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General and Design Criteria February 3, 2005
3–22
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Conformance is based on the verification that the attenuator connectors, connector
interfaces, and couplings meet the Intermateability requirements described in
GR-326-CORE.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
3.3.5 Materials
3.3.5.1 Toxicity
GR-910 R3-20 [19] All attenuator materials with which personnel may come in contact
shall be non-toxic, and shall not present any environmental hazards as defined by
applicable federal or state laws and regulations or current industry standards.
Where the suggested use of certain materials by the manufacturer may pose
hazardous conditions, the manufacturer shall provide the necessary instructions for
the handling and use of such materials.
3.3.5.2 Corrosion Resistance
GR-910 R3-21 [20] Attenuators containing metallic materials shall show no significant
signs of corrosion on metallic surfaces or components nor exhibit a malfunction of
any mechanical features following a 7- day exposure to a salt fog spray in
accordance with ASTM B117. Attenuators shall be placed inside the salt fog
chamber during the test. The analysis for the degree of rusting on painted metal
surfaces shall be made in accordance with ASTM D610. A rust grade of 9 or better
is required, exclusive of any surface scratches or nicks noted prior to testing.
3.3.5.3 Dissimilar Metals
GR-910 R3-22 [21] The attenuator design shall ensure that no galvanic corrosion will occur
when dissimilar metals are used in its construction.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General and Design Criteria
3–23
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.5.4 Fungus Resistance
GR-910 R3-23 [22] Exposed polymeric materials used in the attenuator design shall not
support fungus growth per ASTM-G21. A rating of zero (0) is required.
3.3.5.5 Flammability
These flammability requirements apply to attenuators that are intended to be
located inside buildings.
GR-910 R3-24 [23] Exposed plastic materials shall have an oxygen index of at least 28% as
determined by actual test in accordance with ASTM D-2863 and GR-63-CORE,
Section 4.2.3, Use of Fire-Resistant Materials, Components, Wiring and Cable.
GR-910 R3-25 [24] Exposed plastic materials shall not sustain combustion when an open
flame source is removed, such that they possess a rating of 94V-1 when tested
according to the Vertical Burning Test for Classifying Material, Underwriters
Laboratories publication UL94, Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for
Parts in Devices and Appliances, or GR-63-CORE, Section 5.2.4, Telcordia Needle
Flame Test. Manufacturers may be requested to provide material samples of
appropriate size for testing.
“Exposed plastic materials” refers to the exterior of the final attenuator packaging
that would be used for indoor applications.
3.3.5.6 Test Method (not from GR-910)
A. Verify the manufacturer has provided all documentation on all attenuator
materials with which personnel may come in contact are non-toxic, and do not
present any environmental hazards as defined by applicable federal or state
laws and regulations or current industry standards. Where the suggested use of
certain materials by the manufacturer may pose hazardous conditions, the
manufacturer shall provide the necessary instructions for the handling and use
of such materials.
B. Verify that attenuators containing metallic materials show no significant signs
of corrosion on metallic surfaces or components nor exhibit a malfunction of
any mechanical features following a 7-day exposure to a salt fog spray in
accordance with ASTM B117. Attenuators shall be placed inside the salt fog
chamber during the test. The analysis for the degree of rusting on painted metal
surfaces shall be made in accordance with ASTM D610. A rust grade of 9 or
better is required, exclusive of any surface scratches or nicks noted prior to
testing.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General and Design Criteria February 3, 2005
3–24
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
C. Verify that the attenuator design ensures that no galvanic corrosion will occur
when dissimilar metals are used in its construction.
D. Verify that exposed polymeric materials used in the attenuator design do not
support fungus growth per ASTM-G21. A rating of zero (0) is required.
E. Verify that exposed plastic materials have an oxygen index of at least 28% as
determined by actual test in accordance with ASTM D-2863 and GR-63-CORE,
Section 4.2.3, Use of Fire-Resistant Materials, Components, Wiring, and
Cable.
F. Verify that exposed plastic materials do not sustain combustion when an open
flame source is removed, such that they possess a rating of 94V-l when tested
according to the Vertical Burning Test for Classifying Material, Underwriters
Laboratories publication UL94, Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for
Parts in Devices and Appliances, or GR-63-CORE, Section 5.2.4, Telcordia
Needle Flame Test. Manufacturers may be requested to provide material
samples of appropriate size for testing.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General and Design Criteria
3–25
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.5.7 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
3.3.5.8 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Not applicable
3.3.5.9 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Not applicable
TP-910 Figure 3-7 Test Flowchart - Materials (not from GR-910)
Does the
product meet the
applicable toxicity, corrosion,
fungus and flammability
criteria?
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Yes
No
Test Product and associated
conformance documentation
are provided by supplier
Review conformance
documentation related to
toxicity, corrosion, fungus and
flammability
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General and Design Criteria February 3, 2005
3–26
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.5.10 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.5.1 has been completely established.
Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.5.2, Section 3.3.5.3, Section 3.3.5.4, and
Section 3.3.5.5 of this document has not been established. Results for requirements
GR-910 R3-21 [20], GR-910 R3-22 [21], GR-910 R3-23 [22],
GR-910 R3-24 [23] and GR-910 R3-25 [24] were not determined. Conformance is
based on the verification that the manufacturer has provided all documentation on
all attenuator materials indicating the materials personnel may come in contact
with are non-toxic and do not present any environmental hazards as defined by
applicable federal or state laws and regulations or current industry standards. If the
suggested use of certain materials by the manufacturer poses hazardous conditions,
the necessary instructions for the handling and use of such materials are provided.
Conformance is also based on the verification that attenuators containing metallic
materials show no significant signs of corrosion on metallic surfaces or
components nor exhibit a malfunction of any mechanical features following a 7-day
exposure to a salt fog spray in accordance with ASTM B117, and that the degree of
rusting on painted metal surfaces, in accordance with ASTM D610, meet a rust
grade of 9 or better, exclusive of any surface scratches or nicks noted prior to
testing. Conformance is also based on the verification that the attenuator design
shows no galvanic corrosion when dissimilar metals are used in its construction,
verification that fungus growth on exposed polymeric materials used in the
attenuator design does not exceed a rating of zero (0) as per ASTM-G21, verification
that exposed plastic materials have an oxygen index of at least 28% as determined
by actual testing in accordance with ASTM D-2863 and GR-63-CORE, Section 4.2.3,
and verification that exposed plastic materials do not sustain combustion when an
open flame source is removed and posses a rating of 94V-1 when tested according
to the vertical Burning Test for Classifying Material, Underwriters Laboratories
publication UL94 or GR-63-CORE, Section 5.2.4.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General and Design Criteria
3–27
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.6 Safety
3.3.6.1 Criteria - Safety (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R3-26 [25] The supplier shall provide written warning of precautions for use of the
product.
GR-910 R3-27 [76] Radiation Hazard – The instructions that describe the procedures for
cleaning attenuators shall indicate the possible hazard due to the presence of
invisible (infrared) radiation when examining connectors with the naked eye or
using a microscope. The instruction shall also contain ordering information for an
IR indicator card (Edmund Scientific part #53-031 or equivalent) to allow
visualization of invisible IR light.
GR-910 R3-28 [77] Cleaning Materials – The instructions that describe the procedures for
cleaning the attenuators shall contain the following information regarding any
materials that are used for cleaning that may be considered hazardous to health or
to the environment:
1. Warning as to the toxicity hazard
2. Instructions for handling and use
3. Instructions for disposal.
3.3.6.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
A. Verify the supplier has provided written warning of precautions for use of the
product.
B. Verify that the attenuator cleaning instructions describe procedures for
indicating possible hazard due to the presence of invisible (infrared) radiation
when examining connectors with the naked eye or using a microscope. Also
verify that the instruction contain ordering information for an IR indicator card
(Edmund Scientific part #53-031or equivalent).
C. Verify that attenuator cleaning instructions contain the following information
regarding any materials that are used for cleaning that may be considered
hazardous to health or to the environment: (1) Warning as to the toxicity hazard,
(2) Instructions for handling and use, and (3) Instructions for disposal.
D. Record test results.
E. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer
authorized representative.
F. If the criteria are met, then subject the DUT to the next test group.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General and Design Criteria February 3, 2005
3–28
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.6.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 3-8 Test Flowchart - Safety (not from GR-910)
Are
written warning of
precautions for use of the
product provided?
Document Results and go
to next criteria section
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Yes
No
Test Product, cleaning instructions,
and precaution documentation are
provided by supplier
Review cleaning instructions and conformance
documentation related to safety compliance.
Are
the safety instructions
and warnings specified in
GR-910 R3-27 [76] and
GR-910 R3-28 [77]
provided?
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Yes
No
Review the instructions that describe the
procedures for cleaning the attenuator. Clean
attenuators according to manufacture’s
instructions.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General and Design Criteria
3–29
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.6.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Not applicable
3.3.6.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Not applicable
3.3.6.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.6.1 of this document has been partially
established. Results for requirement GR-910 R3-26 [25] and GR-910 R3-27 [76]
were not determined. Conformance is based on the verification that the supplier has
provided written warning of precautions for use of the product, verification that the
attenuator cleaning instructions describe procedures for indicating possible hazard
due to the presence of invisible (infrared) radiation when examining connectors
with the naked eye or using a microscope and that the instructions contain ordering
information for an IR indicator card, and verification that the attenuator cleaning
instructions contain the information outlined in GR-910 R3-28 [77] regarding any
materials that are used for cleaning that may be considered hazardous to health or
to the environment.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
3.3.7 Mounting
Depending on the application and on specific Telcordia client practices, attenuators
may be located in Central Offices and in various locations in the Outside Plant,
including the underground, buried and aerial plant.2
2. Attenuators may also be located in an Alternate Splice Area (ASA), also referred to as an Optical Cable
Rearrangement Facility (OCRF), a splice area within the CO that is not within the Cable Entrance Facility.
For more information, see Section 2.5.2 of BR 781-826-127, Optical Cross-Connect Planning.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General and Design Criteria February 3, 2005
3–30
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.7.1 Criteria - Mounting (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R3-29 [26] Fiber optic attenuators shall be provided with a means to be installed
in Central Offices and Remote Sites.
GR-910 O3-30 [27] Attenuators should be capable of being mounted on standard 23-inch
relay racks, cabinets, pedestals, splice trays, splice organizers and splice closures
or other protective enclosures.
GR-910 R3-31 [28] Variable attenuators shall be mounted in such a way that the
adjustment mechanism is easily recognizable and accessible to craft personnel.
The location of the attenuator is important because it determines how accessible
the attenuators will be to craftpersons for testing, repair and growth of future
services. Attenuators terminated in connectors can be mounted in racks and
cabinets, and are more accessible than attenuators mounted in OSP closures, which
are usually spliced.
Outside Plant Location
GR-910 R3-32 [29] Attenuators deployed in an uncontrolled environment shall have a
protective enclosure to restrict water intrusion into the attenuator housing
package.
GR-910 R3-33 [30] Installed attenuators shall be easily accessible for operations and
maintenance support.
3.3.7.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
A. Perform visual inspection on the mounting of the attenuator to determine the
following:
1. Verify that the attenuator provides a means to be installed in Central Offices
and Remote Sites.
2. Determine if the attenuator is capable of being mounted on standard 23-inch
relay racks, cabinets, pedestals, splice trays, splice organizers and splice
closures or other protective enclosures.
3. Verify that variable attenuators can be mounted in such a way that the
adjustment mechanism is easily recognizable and accessible to craft
personnel.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General and Design Criteria
3–31
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4. Verify that attenuators intended for deployment in an uncontrolled
environment have a protective enclosure to restrict water intrusion into the
attenuator package.
5. Verify that the installed attenuator can be easily accessible for operations
and maintenance support.
B. Record test results.
C. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer
authorized representative in accordance with the Quality Assurance Program of
Telcordia. A determination shall be made regarding possible employment of hot
spares or if the testing is to be continued.
D. If the criteria are met, then subject the DUT to the next test group.
3.3.7.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 3-9 Test Flowchart - Mounting (not from GR-910)
Does the
product meet the
applicable criteria from
Section 3.3.7.1?
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Yes
No
Test Product and
associated installation
documentation are
provided by supplier
Visually inspect mounting
capabilities and review
installation
documentation
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General and Design Criteria February 3, 2005
3–32
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.7.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Not applicable
3.3.7.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Not applicable
3.3.7.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.7.1 of this document has been partially
established. The criteria for requirements GR-910 R3-31 [28] and Verizon’s
Requirement were not applicable, and results for requirement GR-910 R3-32 [29]
were not determined. Conformance is based on the verification that the attenuator
provides a means to be installed in Central Offices and Remote Sites and that the
attenuator is capable of being mounted on standard 23-inch relay racks, cabinets,
pedestals, splice trays, splice organizers and splice closures or other protective
enclosures. Conformance is also based on the verification that attenuators intended
for deployment in an uncontrolled environment have a protective enclosure to
restrict water intrusion into the attenuator package, and verification that the
installed attenuator can be easily accessible for operations and maintenance
support.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
Sample Size
Not applicable
Photographs
Not applicable
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General and Design Criteria
3–33
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.8 Index Matching
3.3.8.1 Criteria - Index Matching (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R3-34 [31] Application of index-matching materials shall not be required for use of
the attenuator.
3.3.8.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
A. Examine the attenuator and the supplier documentation to verify that the
application of index-matching materials is not required for use of the attenuator.
B. Record test results.
C. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer
authorized representative in accordance with the Quality Assurance Program of
Telcordia. A determination shall be made regarding possible employment of hot
spares or if the testing is to be continued.
D. If the criteria are met, then subject the DUT to the next test group.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General and Design Criteria February 3, 2005
3–34
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.8.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
3.3.8.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Not applicable
3.3.8.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Not applicable
TP-910 Figure 3-10 Test Flowchart - Index Matching (not from GR-910)
Does the
product require the
application of index-
matching materials?
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
No
Yes
Test Product and
associated installation
documentation are
provided by supplier
Visually inspect
attenuator and review
installation
documentation
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General and Design Criteria
3–35
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.8.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.8.1 of this document has been
established. Conformance is based on the verification that the attenuator and the
supplier documentation does not require the application of index-matching
materials for use of the attenuator.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
3.3.9 Change of Attenuation
3.3.9.1 Criteria - Change of Attenuation (heading not from GR-910)
To change the attenuation of a variable attenuator or remove and replace fixed
attenuators in an optical transmission system:
GR-910 CR3-35 [32] It shall be possible to vary the attenuation of a variable attenuator
after it is installed in a transmission system.
GR-910 R3-36 [33] It shall not be necessary to access both sides of the distributing frame,
nor remove screws or other mounting hardware.
GR-910 R3-37 [34] It shall not be necessary to re-splice fibers for attenuators other than
those designed to be spliced to a fiber.
3.3.9.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
A. Verify the following:
1. The attenuation of a variable attenuator can be changed after it is installed
in a transmission system.
2. To change the attenuation of a variable attenuator or remove and replace
fixed attenuators in an optical transmission system it is not necessary to
access both sides of the distributing frame, nor remove screws or other
mounting hardware.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General and Design Criteria February 3, 2005
3–36
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3. It is not necessary to re-splice fibers for attenuators (other than those
designed to be spliced to a fiber) to change the attenuation of a variable
attenuator or remove and replace fixed attenuators in an optical
transmission system.
B. Record test results.
C. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer
authorized representative in accordance with the Quality Assurance Program of
Telcordia. A determination shall be made regarding possible employment of hot
spares or if the testing is to be continued.
D. If the criteria are met, then subject the DUT to the next test group.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 General and Design Criteria
3–37
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.9.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 3-11 Test Flowchart - Change in Attenuation (not from GR-910)
Can
variable attenuator
be changed after it
is installed?
Document Results and go
to next criteria section
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Yes
No
Test Product and application
documentation are provided by
supplier
Examine the attenuator and review
application instructions for
changing attenuation.
Are
the change of
attenuation criteria in R3-36
and R3-37 met?
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Yes
No
Examine the attenuator and review
application instructions for
changing attenuation.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
General and Design Criteria February 3, 2005
3–38
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
3.3.9.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Not applicable
3.3.9.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Not applicable
3.3.9.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.9.1 of this document has been partially
established. Results for requirement GR-910 CR3-35 [32] were not applicable.
Conformance is based on the verification that it is not necessary to access both
sides of the distributing frame, nor remove screws or other mounting hardware
when removing and replacing fixed attenuators in an optical transmission system,
and verification that it is not necessary to re-splice fibers for attenuators other than
those designed to be spliced to a fiber when removing and replacing fixed
attenuators in an optical transmission system.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
Sample Size
Not applicable.
Photographs
Not applicable.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–1
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.0 Performance Criteria
For the definition of requirements, objectives, and conditional requirements, see
the “Requirements Terminology:” section in the Executive Summary. The criteria
fall into two categories: Optical Criteria that address unstressed, optical
performance characteristics and Environmental and Mechanical Criteria that
address compliance with the change in attenuation requirements, ∆A, for either
analog transmission, digital transmission, or both, whichever applies, when
attenuators are subjected to stress. The change in attenuation criteria in
Section 4.2.2 must be met after (and in some cases during) each individual stress
test in Section 4.1.
GR-910 Table 4-1 summarizes attenuator performance Requirements and
Objectives. The criteria appear in the chronological order intended for testing and
in the order of their appearance in this document. Compliance with all criteria is
verified according to the test procedures in Section 5. The Optical Criteria are
verified only after the Environmental and Mechanical Tests.
GR-910 Table 4-1 Summary of Attenuator Performance Criteria and Test
Sequence
CHARACTERISTIC SECT. CRITERIA
Environmental & Mechanical 4.1 Conditions
Controlled Operating Environment 4.1.1 –5°C to 50°C, 5 to 95% RH
Uncontrolled Operating Environment 4.1.2 –40°C to 75°C, RH 0 to 90% ±5%
Non-operating Environment 4.1.3 –40°C to 70°C, 0 to 95% RH
Humidity/Condensation Cycling Test 4.1.4 –10°C to 65°C, ≥ 90% RH
Water Immersion 4.1.5 43°C, PH 5.5, 7 days
Vibration 4.1.6 10 - 55 Hz, 1.52 mm amplitude, for 2 hrs
Flex Test 4.1.7 0.5, or 2 lb load, 100 cycles
Twist Test 4.1.8 1.1, 1.65 lb, or 3 lb load, 10 cycles
Side Pull 4.1.9 0.55 or 2.75 lb load, 90°angle, active
Cable Retention 4.1.10 1 lb, 1.54 lb, or 4.4 lb load, for 1 min.
Durability 4.1.11 200 cyc., 3 ft, 4.5 ft, 6 ft per GR-326
Impact Test 4.1.12 6 ft. drop, 8 cycles, 3 axes
Optical Criteria 4.2 Digital (CR) AM-Video (CR)
Optical Bandpass (nm) 4.2.1 1260 –>1360 1290 –>1330
" & 1480 –>1580# & (1530 –>1570)†
Change in Attenuation ∆A (dB) 4.2.2 ±0.5 or 0.15A±0.5 or 0.10A
Attenuation Tolerance (dB) 4.2.3 ±0.15V±0.10V
Attenuation Increments and Range (dB) 4.2.4 ≥ 5 dB,
≥ 5 to 20 dB
≥ 3 dB,
≥ 3 to 20 dB@
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–2
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Notes:
# The conditional objective for digital applications in the upper window is 1430 to
1580nm.
†The conditional requirement for LR-SONET applications is 1280 to 1335 and 1525
to 1575nm. See Section 4.2.1 for more on LR-SONET.
@ The increment conditional objective for attenuators used in AM video
applications is ≥ 1 dB. The range objective for attenuators in all applications is
≥ 1 to 25 dB.
4.1 Environmental and Mechanical Criteria
The change in attenuation and reflectance criteria in GR-910 Table 4-1 are used as
the pass/fail criteria for environmental and mechanical tests, in which attenuators
are subjected to thermal, water-related and mechanical stress. Mechanical stress in
attenuators can physically damage attenuators, attenuation elements, optical
interfaces, and adjustment mechanisms in variable attenuators, thereby degrading
product performance. Elevated temperature and humidity may degrade the
performance of adhesives, attenuating fibers, and attenuating elements used to
manufacture attenuators.
The thermal and water-related tests are also intended to indicate the performance
of attenuators exposed to short-term freezing, heat, high humidity and water
immersion, as may exist in a controlled CO, CEV, or uncontrolled loop plant
environment. The other tests are intended to ensure the mechanical integrity and
ruggedness of attenuators. The Vibration, Cable Retention, Side Pull, and Impact
Tests apply to all attenuators. The Flex and Twist tests apply only to attenuators
with optical fiber leads and are intended to stress the attenuator-to-fiber interface.
The Durability Test applies to variable attenuators and attenuators with connectors
or connector interfaces that are an integral part of the attenuation mechanism.
Refer to GR-910 R4-37 [73] for a description of what constitutes physical damage.
Tensile loads for the mechanical tests are shown in GR-910 Table 4-2. The applied
load depends on the attenuators media type.
Environmental Requirements and Objectives refer to the reflectance, and change in
attenuation, ∆A, before, during, and after attenuators are subjected to the
Temperature and Humidity Criteria described in Section 4.1 of GR-63-CORE.
Mechanical requirements and objectives refer to the reflectance and change in
Reflectance (dB) 4.2.5 –40 –55 (–65)
PDL (dB) 4.2.6 ±0.5 or 0.15A±0.5 or 0.10A
PMD (dB) 4.2.7 0.2 ps
GR-910 Table 4-1 Summary of Attenuator Performance Criteria and Test
Sequence (Continued)
CHARACTERISTIC SECT. CRITERIA
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–3
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
attenuation, ∆A, before and after the Flex, Twist, Vibration, Cable Retention, and
Impact Tests and during and after the Side Pull Test.
Fiber media types are defined in the Glossary.
4.1.1 Controlled Operating Environment
4.1.1.1 Criteria - Controlled Operating Environment (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R4-1 [39] Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in
Section 4.2.
GR-910 R4-2 [40] Product intended for use in a controlled environment shall meet the
requirement for operation under Operating Temperature and Humidity Criteria in
Section 4.1.2. of GR-63-CORE.
NEBS requires product to remain functional (to operate as expected) in a room
ambient temperature of 5 to 40°C (41 to 104°F) and a relative humidity of
5% to 85%. Product must also remain functional for a period of ≤ 72 consecutive
hours and ≤ 15 days in one year, in a room ambient temperature of − 5 to + 50°C
(23 to 122°F) and a relative humidity of 5% to 90%, but not exceeding 0.024 lb of
water/lb of dry air. As used here, the term “remain functional” shall be interpreted
as meeting the optical performance criteria in this document.
Rationale: Attenuators are expected to operate typically in a controlled
environment, such as the FOT in a CO or CEV, as described in GR-63-CORE.
4.1.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
This section presents test methods to determine whether the attenuator can operate
in controlled environments. The attenuator is to be in operation for the entire
duration of the test. Conformance is based on the ability of the attenuator to operate
throughout the test period. The step numbers below correspond to the numbers
shown in TP-910 Figure 4-2 of Section 4.1.1.4.
GR-910 Table 4-2 Tensile Loads for Mechanical Tests
Media Type Flex Test
kg (lb)
Twist
Test
kg (lb)
Side Pull
kg (lb)
Cable
Retention
kg (lb)
Type III 250-µm coated or tight buffered 0.23 (0.5) 0.5 (1.1) 0.25 (0.55) 0.5 (1.1)
Type II 900-µm loose buffered "0.75 (1.65) "0.7 (1.54)
Type I reinforced cable (≥ 2 mm dia.) 0.9 (2.0) 1.35 (3.0) 1.25 (2.75) 2.0 (4.4)
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–4
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Test Sequence - Monitor the chamber's temperature continuously during the test.
Verify lab ambient conditions, calibration and appropriate setup of product under
test. Inspect product physical conditions and perform initial optical measurements.
Optical measurements shall be made throughout the thermal cycle.
1. Operate the attenuator at an ambient temperature of 23°C (73°F) and RH level
of 50% for a minimum period of 24 hrs.
2. Decrease the chamber's temperature at a rate of 30°C/ hr (54°F/hr) to –5°C
(23°F). RH is not controlled.
3. Maintain a temperature of –5°C (23°F) and any RH for 16 hrs.
4. Increase the chamber's temperature at a rate of 5°C/hr (9°F/hr) to 5°C (41°F).
RH is not controlled.
5. Increase the chamber's temperature at a rate of 5°C/hr (9°F/hr) to 28°C (82°F).
Increase the RH to attain a 90% level by the time the target temperature is
attained.
6. Maintain a temperature of 28°C (82°F) and RH of 90% for 96 hrs.
7. Increase the chamber's temperature at a rate of 5°C/hr (9°F/hr) to 50°C1
(122°F). Decrease the RH to less than 32% (by the time the target temperature
is attained).
8. Maintain a temperature of 50°C* (122°F) and less than 32% RH for 12 hrs.
9. Maintain a temperature of 50°C* (122°F) for an additional 4 hrs. During these 4
hrs, reduce the RH to less than 15%.
10. Decrease the chamber's temperature at a rate of about 5°C/hr (9°F/hr) to 5°C
(41°F) and maintain the RH to less than 15%.
11. Maintain a temperature of 5°C (41°F) and a RH of less than 15% for 3 hrs.
12. Increase the chamber's temperature at a rate of 30°C/hr (54°F/hr) to 50°C
(122°F). RH is not controlled.
13. Maintain a temperature of 50°C (122°F) and any RH for 3 hrs.
14. Decrease the chamber's temperature at a rate of 30°C/hr (54°F/hr) to 23°C
(73°F). RH is not controlled.
15. Perform final optical measurements, inspect physical damage and record
results.
1. The 50°C temperature is applied to frame-level equipment. For s helves (equipment that occupy less than half a frame), a
temperature of 55°C (131°F) and 25% RH shall be used.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–5
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 4-1 Test Flowchart - Controlled Operating Environment Test (not
from GR-910)
Were the
components
undamaged and the
optical measurements
within specs?
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Yes
No
Clean connection points
and perform initial optical
measurements
Prepare/warm-up test
equipment per
manufacturers’
instructions
Verify test equipment
calibration
Verify lab ambient
conditions of 23 ±5°C
and 30 to 70% RH
Verify product under test
is configured per
supplier’s instructions
Inspect physical
condition of product
under test
Stabilize product under
test at room temperature
with less than 50% RH
for 2 hours
Place all components in
environmental chamber
Perform final optical
measurements and
inspect for any physical
damage
Stabilize components at
room temperature for
2 hours
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Run chamber control
program and execute
(and record results of)
daily optical
measurements at
specified temperatures
Program environmental
chamber to perform
temperature and humidity
profile shown in
TP-910 Figure 4-2
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–6
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 4-2 Operating Temperature and Humidity Test
Temperature °C
Time - Hours
* 55°C, 25% RH for shelves that fill less than 50% the frame length.
6
50
40
30
20
10
0
24 72 120 168 216
14
12
11
10
13
9
8
7
5
1
2
4
3
1. Dwell, 23°C, 50% RH, (24 hrs)
2. Transition, 30°C/hr, any RH (1 hr)
3. Dwell, –5°C, any RH (16 hrs)
4. Transition to +5°C, any RH, 5°C/hr
(2 hrs)
5. Transition to 28°C and 90% RH, 5°C/hr
(4.6 hrs)
6. Dwell, 28°C, 90% RH (96 hrs)
7. Transition to (50°C*, 32%* RH), 5°C/
hr (5.4 hrs)
8. Dwell, 50°C*, 32% RH (12 hrs)
9. Dwell, 50°C*, 15% RH (4 hrs)
10. Transition to +5°C, <15% RH, 5°C/hr
(9 hrs)
11. Dwell, 5°C, <15% RH (3 hrs)
12. Transition to 50°C, 30°C/hr, any RH
(1.5 hrs)
13. Dwell, 50°C, any RH (3 hrs)
14. Transition to 23°C, 30°C/hr, any RH
(1hr)
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–7
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Optical Measurements
For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined
by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical
transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test.
The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring
reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical
inspection should follow FOTP-13.
The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during
testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility
shown in TP-910 Figure 4-3, or another comparable system.
In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make
measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm,
accurate to ±0.05 dB for transmittance and ±1 dB for reflectance down to –60 dB.
While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of
meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in
which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads
should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in
additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss.
The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of
four laser sources emitting near λ1 = 1310 nm, λ2 = 1490 nm, λ3 = 1550 nm or
λ4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source
switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to
launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any
DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The
Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for
detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct
for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value
TP-910 Figure 4-3 Transmission Measurement Facility
Source
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–8
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
is −60 ±1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance
from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the
power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through
the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the
reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports
are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers
are computer controlled via GPIB interface.
Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the
DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for
their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements,
all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and
switches, should have a reflectance of ≤ −65 dB. The Coupler should have a
directivity of ≥ 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode
transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter,
provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there
are at least two 360° loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for
additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the
Transmission Measurement Facility.
4.1.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Multimeter
Frame
HP 8153A - n.a.
Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months -
Laser Source (dual
wl)
HP 81554SM 12 months -
90/10% Coupler - -
Reflectance
Standard
- -
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a.
Env.Chamber Espec PLA2AP 12 months -
Optical Tunable
Light Source
Agilent 8164A 12 months -
Sensor for tunable
multimeter
Agilent 81640A 12 months -
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–9
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in
Section 4.1.1.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this
criteria.
However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-8, the insertion loss of sample i.l.08 did not
conform to, while sample i.l.07 showed borderline performance to the more
stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators
intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not
exceed ±0.10V. Sample i.l.08 showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.42 ±0.05 dB.
As shown in TP-910 Figure 4-9, the insertion loss of sample i.l.07 showed borderline
performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states
that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation
tolerance shall not exceed ±0.10V.
As shown in TP-910 Figure 4-11, the insertion loss of sample i.l.07 did not conform
to, while samples i.l.05, i.l.06 and i.l.10 showed borderline performance to the more
stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators
intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not
exceed ±0.10V. Sample i.l.07 showed a minimum insertion loss of 2.64 ±0.05 dB.
In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-12, samples i.l.03 at the 1625 nm
wavelength, i.l.05 at the 1625 nm wavelength, and i.l.11 at the 1490 nm wavelength
showed borderline performance to GR-910 CR4-31 [68] which states that the
maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems shall be
≤ –55 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating
temperature range of –40°C to +75°C.
Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-12, conformance to
GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators
intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be ≤ –65 dB over the entire bandpass of
GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of –40°C to +75°C was not
met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the
significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on
demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the
optical criteria described in Section 4.2.
Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing.
Sample Size
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Failure History
Not applicable.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–10
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
The following graphs represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total
of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-4 through
TP-910 Figure 4-7 present change-in-attenuation measurements during the
Controlled Operating Environment test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm,
1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, respectively. TP-910 Figure 4-8 through
TP-910 Figure 4-11 present insertion loss measurements (including connection
losses of about 0.5 dB) during the Controlled Operating Environment test for all of
the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, respectively.
TP-910 Figure 4-12 presents the reflectance measurements during the Controlled
Operating Environment test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm,
1550 nm and 1625 nm.
TP-910 Figure 4-4 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm during Controlled Operating
Environment test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1310 nm.,
Controlled Operating Temperature
-0.7
-0.5
-0.3
-0.1
0.1
0.3
0.5
0.7
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Time (h)
Change in Attenuation (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Video
Di gi t al
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–11
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-5 Change in Attenuation at 1490 nm during Controlled Operating
Environment test
TP-910 Figure 4-6 Change in Attenuation at 1550 nm during Controlled Operating
Environment test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1490 nm.,
Controlled Operating Temperature
-0.7
-0.5
-0.3
-0.1
0.1
0.3
0.5
0.7
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Time (h)
Change in Attenuation (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Video
Di gi t al
+/- 0.5 d
B
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1550 nm.,
Controlled Operating Temperature
-0.7
-0.5
-0.3
-0.1
0.1
0.3
0.5
0.7
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Time (h)
Change in Attenuation (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Video
Digital
+/- 0. 5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–12
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-7 Change in Attenuation at 1625 nm during Controlled Operating
Environment test
TP-910 Figure 4-8 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm during Controlled Operating
Environment test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1625 nm.,
Controlled Operating Temperature
-0.7
-0.5
-0.3
-0.1
0.1
0.3
0.5
0.7
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Time (h)
Change in Attenuation (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Video
Digit al
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1310 nm.,
Controlled Operating Temperature
2.3
2.5
2.7
2.9
3.1
3.3
3.5
3.7
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Time (h)
Insertion Loss (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Video
Di gi t al
+/ - 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–13
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-9 Insertion Loss at 1490 nm during Controlled Operating
Environment test
TP-910 Figure 4-10 Insertion Loss at 1550 nm during Controlled Operating
Environment test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1490 nm.,
Controlled Operating Temperature
2.3
2.5
2.7
2.9
3.1
3.3
3.5
3.7
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Time (h)
Insertion Loss (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Video
Di gi t al
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1550 nm.,
Controlled Operating Temperature
2.3
2.5
2.7
2.9
3.1
3.3
3.5
3.7
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Time (h)
Insertion Loss (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Video
Di gi t al
+/- 0. 5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–14
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-11 Insertion Loss at 1625 nm during Controlled Operating
Environment test
TP-910 Figure 4-12 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
during Controlled Operating Environment test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1625 nm.,
Controlled Operating Temperature
2.3
2.5
2.7
2.9
3.1
3.3
3.5
3.7
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Time (h)
Insertion Loss (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Video
Di gi t al
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators,
Controlled Operating Temperature, Reflectance
-70.0
-65.0
-60.0
-55.0
-50.0
-45.0
-40.0
-35.0
-30.0
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample
Reflectance (dB)
1310 nm 1490 nm
1550 nm 1625 nm
Req (D) Req (A)
CR (A)
`
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–15
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.2 Uncontrolled Operating Environment
4.1.2.1 Criteria - Uncontrolled Operating Environment (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 CR4-3 [41] Product intended for use in an uncontrolled environment shall remain
functional (operate as expected) at all temperatures from –40°C (–40°F)
(uncontrolled humidity) to 75°C (167°F) (relative humidity of 90 ±5% non-
condensing).
Rationale: The conditional requirement is intended for attenuators that are
designed to operate in an OSP (uncontrolled environment).
4.1.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Verify that the lab ambient conditions are in the range of 23 ±5°C, and 30 to 70%
relative humidity
2. Prepare/warm up and stabilize test equipment per manufacturers instructions,
up to 1 hour
3. Verify that the test equipment to be used meets calibration requirements
4. Review manufacturer instructions/procedures for product under test, to assure
product usage/configuration is appropriate
5. Allow product under test to stabilize at room temperature with relative humidity
less than 50%, for two hours prior to initial optical power reading
6. Program thermal chamber to test cycle shown in GR-910 Figure 5-3 (and shown
below in Section 4.1.2.4).
7. Perform initial optical measurements and record data
8. Subject product under test to temperature cycling with maximum temperature
of 75°C and minimum temperature of –40°C with temperature rate of change of
approximately 1°C per minute, with the test beginning at the high temperature.
Twenty-one cycles must be performed and the chamber shall be programmed to
assure minimum one half hour dwells at the extremes of each cycle to assure
thermal equilibrium.
9. Optical power measurements shall be made daily at each temperature plateau
(23°C, 75°C and –40°C) with measurements being taken no less than 30 minutes
after the temperature has been reached
10. At conclusion of all cycles, allow product under test to stabilize at room
conditions for at least 2 hours
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–16
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
11. Perform final optical power readings and record data
12. Inspect product under test for any physical damage and record observations
13. Record conformance status. If non-conforming, notify supplier.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–17
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 4-13 Test Flowchart - Uncontrolled Operating Environment Test
(not from GR-910)
Were the
components
undamaged and the
optical measurements
within specs?
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Yes
No
Clean connection points
and perform initial optical
measurements
Prepare/warm-up test
equipment per
manufacturers’
instructions
Verify test equipment
calibration
Verify lab ambient
conditions of 23 ±5°C
and 30 to 70% RH
Verify product under test
is configured per
supplier’s instructions
Inspect physical
condition of product
under test
Stabilize product under
test at room temperature
with less than 50% RH
for 2 hours
Place all components in
environmental chamber
Perform final optical
measurements and
inspect for any physical
damage
Stabilize components at
room temperature for
2 hours
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Run chamber control
program and execute
(and record results of)
daily optical
measurements at
specified temperatures
Program environmental
chamber to perform
temperature and humidity
profile shown in
GR-910 Figure 5-3
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–18
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Attenuators intended for use in an uncontrolled environment (outside plant) shall
be subjected to the temperature cycling profile in TP-910 Figure 4-14 per FOTP 3A,
for 21 cycles, 168 hours. The relative humidity is uncontrolled. Measurements
should be taken at each temperature plateau once per day. Upon reaching a
temperature measurement point the test samples should be allowed to stabilize for
a one-half hour minimum before measuring attenuation and reflectance. The final
measurement shall be made after the test samples have stabilized at 23°C for a
minimum or 2 hours. The requirements in Section 4.1.2 apply before during and
after the test.
Optical Measurements
For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined
by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or by measuring the
optical transmittance and calculating the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after
each test. The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by
measuring reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and
mechanical inspection should follow FOTP-13.
The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during
testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility
shown in TP-910 Figure 4-15, or another comparable system.
TP-910 Figure 4-14 Uncontrolled Environment Temperature Profile
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
0123456789
Time - Hours
Temperature °
C
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–19
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make
measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm,
accurate to ±0.05 dB for transmittance and ±1 dB for reflectance down to –60 dB.
While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of
meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in
which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads
should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in
additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss.
The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of
four laser sources emitting near λ1 = 1310 nm, λ2 = 1490 nm, λ3 = 1550 nm or
λ4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source
switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to
launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any
DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The
Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for
detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct
for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value
is −60 ±1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance
from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the
power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through
the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the
reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports
are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers
are computer controlled via GPIB interface.
Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the
DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for
their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements,
all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and
TP-910 Figure 4-15 Transmission Measurement Facility
Source
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–20
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
switches, should have a reflectance of ≤ −65 dB. The Coupler should have a
directivity of ≥ 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode
transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter,
provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there
are at least two 360° loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for
additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the
Transmission Measurement Facility.
4.1.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
4.1.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in
Section 4.1.2.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this
criteria.
However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-19, the change in attenuation of sample i.l.06
showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of
GR-910 CR4-22 [59] which states that for all AM video applications the maximum
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Multimeter
Frame
HP 8153A - n.a.
Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months -
Laser Source (dual
wl)
HP 81554SM 12 months -
90/10% Coupler - -
Reflectance
Standard
- -
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a.
Env.Chamber Espec PLA2AP 12 months -
Optical Tunable
Light Source
Agilent 8164A 12 months -
Sensor for tunable
multimeter
Agilent 81640A 12 months -
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–21
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental
or mechanical tests shall be ≤ 0.5 dB or ≤ 0.10A, whichever is less.
As shown in TP-910 Figure 4-21, the insertion loss of sample i.l.10 did not conform
to, while sample i.l.07 showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria
of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM
video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed ±0.10V. Sample i.l.10
showed a minimum insertion loss of 2.63 ±0.05 dB.
In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-24, conformance to
GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators
intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be ≤ –65 dB over the entire bandpass of
GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of –40°C to +75°C was not
met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the
significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on
demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the
optical criteria described in Section 4.2.
Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing.
Sample Size
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
The following graphs represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total
of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-16 through
TP-910 Figure 4-19 present change-in-attenuation measurements during the
Uncontrolled Operating Environment test for all of the eleven test samples at
1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, respectively. TP-910 Figure 4-20 through
TP-910 Figure 4-23 present insertion loss measurements (including connection
losses of about 0.5 dB) during the Uncontrolled Operating Environment test for all
of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, respectively.
TP-910 Figure 4-24 presents the reflectance measurements during the Uncontrolled
Operating Environment test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm,
1550 nm and 1625 nm.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–22
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-16 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm during Uncontrolled
Operating Environment test
TP-910 Figure 4-17 Change in Attenuation at 1490 nm during Uncontrolled
Operating Environment test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1310 nm.,
Uncontrolled Operating Temperature
-0.60
-0.40
-0.20
0.00
0.20
0.40
0.60
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168
Time (h)
Change in Attenuation (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vi de o
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1490 nm.,
Uncontrolled Operating Temperature
-0.60
-0.40
-0.20
0.00
0.20
0.40
0.60
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168
Time (h)
Change in Attenuation (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vi de o
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–23
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-18 Change in Attenuation at 1550 nm during Uncontrolled
Operating Environment test
TP-910 Figure 4-19 Change in Attenuation at 1625 nm during Uncontrolled
Operating Environment test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1550 nm.,
Uncontrolled Operating Temperature
-0.60
-0.40
-0.20
0.00
0.20
0.40
0.60
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168
Time (h)
Change in Attenuation (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vi de o
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1625 nm.,
Uncontrolled Operating Temperature
-0.60
-0.40
-0.20
0.00
0.20
0.40
0.60
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168
Time (h)
Change in Attenuation (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vi de o
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–24
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-20 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm during Uncontrolled Operating
Environment test
TP-910 Figure 4-21 Insertion Loss at 1490 nm during Uncontrolled Operating
Environment test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1310 nm.,
Uncontrolled Operating Temperature
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168
Time (h)
I nserti on Loss (dB
)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vi d eo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1490 nm.,
Uncontrolled Operating Temperature
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168
Time (h)
I nserti on Loss (dB
)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vi d eo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–25
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-22 Insertion Loss at 1550 nm during Uncontrolled Operating
Environment test
TP-910 Figure 4-23 Insertion Loss at 1625 nm during Uncontrolled Operating
Environment test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1550 nm.,
Uncontrolled Operating Temperature
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168
Time (h)
I nserti on Loss (dB
)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vi d eo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1625 nm.,
Uncontrolled Operating Temperature
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168
Time (h)
I nserti on Loss (dB
)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vi d eo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–26
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.3 Non-Operating Environment
During transportation or in storage, the product may be exposed to extremes in
ambient temperature and humidity. Attenuators are not expected to deteriorate in
functional performance after being exposed to periodic high and low temperature
extremes and high humidity during transportation and storage.
4.1.3.1 Criteria - Non-Operating Environment (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R4-4 [42] Attenuators shall meet the optical criteria and damage criteria described
in Section 4.2.
GR-910 R4-5 [43] All product shall meet the requirements for transportation and storage
under Transportation and Storage Environmental Criteria in Sections 4.1.1.1 to
4.1.1.3 of GR-63-CORE. These include requirement [69], low-temperature exposure
and thermal shock, [70], high-temperature exposure and thermal shock, and [71]
high relative humidity exposure.
NEBS requires product to remain functional (to operate as expected) after being
subjected to cyclic variations in temperature and thermal shocks within a
TP-910 Figure 4-24 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators,
Uncontrolled Operating Temperature, Reflectance
-70.0
-65.0
-60.0
-55.0
-50.0
-45.0
-40.0
-35.0
-30.0
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample
Reflectance (dB)
1310 nm 1490 nm
1550 nm 1625 nm
Req (D) Req (A)
CR (A)
`
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–27
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
temperature range of –40°C to +70°C (–40 to +158°F) and a relative humidity of 0%
to 95%.
4.1.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
This section presents test methods for determining whether the attenuator can
withstand the temperature and humidity environments encountered during
transportation and storage as specified in Section 4.1.3.1. The attenuator does not
operate during these tests, but appropriate functionality measurements should be
made on the attenuator before and after each test. The packaged attenuator should
be used in these tests. If, for some reason, this is not possible (e.g., the packaging is
not available), these tests may be conducted on the unpackaged attenuator.
Note — If the likelihood of nonconformance at a given environment is small, several
tests may be performed before the operational test of the attenuator is performed.
However, if nonconformance occurs, the tests will have to be repeated to determine
which environments caused the nonconformance.
4.1.3.2.1 Low-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock
1. Make initial attenuator functionality test at ambient temperature and humidity
level. (Do not operate the attenuator during the test.)
2. Repackage the attenuator, if applicable, and place it into the test chamber
3. Monitor the chamber temperature continuously during the test
4. Decrease the chamber temperature, at a rate of about 30°C/ hr (54°F/hr) to
–40°C (–40°F)
5. Maintain a temperature of –40°C (–40°F) for 72 hrs
6. Administer the thermal shock by increasing the chamber temperature (or
removing the attenuator from the chamber) from –40°C (–40°F) to ambient in
less than 5 minutes. (Use insulated gloves when handling the packaged
attenuator.)
7. Perform post-test attenuator’s functionality test after the attenuator has
stabilized at ambient temperature
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–28
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.3.2.2 High-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock
1. Make initial attenuator functionality test at ambient temperature and humidity
level. (Do not operate the attenuator during the test.)
2. Repackage the attenuator, if applicable, and place it into the test chamber
3. Monitor the chamber temperature continuously during the test
4. Increase the chamber temperature, at a rate of 30°C/hr (54°F/hr) to 70°C
(158°F)
5. Maintain a temperature of 70°C (158°F) for 72 hrs
6. Administer the thermal shock by decreasing the chamber temperature (or
removing the attenuator from the chamber) from 70°C (158°F) to ambient in
less than 5 minutes. (Use insulated gloves when handling the packaged
attenuator.)
7. Perform post-test attenuator’s functionality test after the attenuator has been
stabilized at ambient temperature
TP-910 Figure 4-25 Low-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock
Transition, <5° Min.
Transition, 30°C/Hr
–40°C, Any RH, 72 Hours
74
2
Time - Hours
30
20
10
0
–10
–20
–30
–40
T
emperature
°C
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–29
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.3.2.3 High Relative Humidity Exposure
1. Make initial attenuator functionality test at ambient temperature and humidity
level. (Do not operate the attenuator during the test.)
2. Repackage the attenuator, if applicable, and place it into the test chamber
3. Monitor the chamber temperature and RH continuously during the test
4. Increase the chamber temperature, at a rate of 30°C/ hr (54°F/hr) to 40°C
(104°F)
5. While holding the chamber at 40°C (104°F), transition the chamber's RH to 95%.
This RH shall be achieved in < 4 hrs
6. Maintain a temperature of 40°C (104°F) and a RH of 90% to 95% for 96 hrs
7. Transition the chamber to ambient temperature at a rate of 30°C/hr (54°F/hr)
8. Perform post-test attenuator’s functionality test after the attenuator has
stabilized at ambient temperature and humidity
TP-910 Figure 4-26 High-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock
Transition, <5° Min.
Transition, 30°C/Hr
70°C, Any RH, 72 Hours
Time - Hours
27274
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Temperature °C
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–30
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-27 High Relative Humidity Exposure
Transition, 30°C/Hr
Time - Hours
979621
40°C, 90% - 95% RH, 96 Hours
50
40
30
20
10
0
Temperature °C
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–31
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 4-28 Test Flowchart - Non-Operating En viro nmen t Test (not from
GR-910)
Were the
components
undamaged and the
optical measurements
within specs?
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Yes
No
Clean connection points
and perform initial optical
measurements
Prepare/warm-up test
equipment per
manufacturers’
instructions
Verify test equipment
calibration
Verify lab ambient
conditions of 23 ±5°C
and 30 to 70% RH
Verify product under test
is configured per
supplier’s instructions
Inspect physical
condition of product
under test
Stabilize product under
test at room temperature
with less than 50% RH
for 2 hours
Place all components in
environmental chamber
Perform final optical
measurements and
inspect for any physical
damage
Stabilize components at
room temperature for
2 hours
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Run chamber control
program and execute
(and record results of)
daily optical
measurements at
specified temperatures
Program environmental
chamber to perform low
temp, high temp and high
humidity tests in series
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–32
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
4.1.3.4.1 Low-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock
TP-910 Figure 4-29 Low-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock
Transition, <5° Min.
Transition, 30°C/Hr
–40°C, Any RH, 72 Hours
74
2
Time - Hours
30
20
10
0
–10
–20
–30
–40
Temperature °C
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–33
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.3.4.2 High-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock
TP-910 Figure 4-30 High-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock
Transition, <5° Min.
Transition, 30°C/Hr
70°C, Any RH, 72 Hours
Time - Hours
27274
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Temperature °C
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–34
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.3.4.3 High Relative Humidity Exposure
Optical Measurements
For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined
by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical
transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test.
The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring
reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical
inspection should follow FOTP-13.
The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during
testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility
shown in TP-910 Figure 4-32, or another comparable system.
TP-910 Figure 4-31 High Relative Humidity Exposure
Transition, 30°C/Hr
Time - Hours
979621
40°C, 90% - 95% RH, 96 Hours
50
40
30
20
10
0
Temperature °C
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–35
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make
measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm,
accurate to ±0.05 dB for transmittance and ±1 dB for reflectance down to –60 dB.
While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of
meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in
which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads
should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in
additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss.
The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of
four laser sources emitting near λ1 = 1310 nm, λ2 = 1490 nm, λ3 = 1550 nm or
λ4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source
switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to
launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any
DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The
Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for
detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct
for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value
is −60 ±1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance
from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the
power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through
the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the
reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports
are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers
are computer controlled via GPIB interface.
Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the
DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for
their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements,
all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and
TP-910 Figure 4-32 Transmission Measurement Facility
Source
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–36
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
switches, should have a reflectance of ≤ −65 dB. The Coupler should have a
directivity of ≥ 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode
transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter,
provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there
are at least two 360° loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for
additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the
Transmission Measurement Facility.
4.1.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
4.1.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in
Section 4.1.3.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this
criteria.
However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-34, the insertion loss of samples i.l.06, i.l.07
and i.l.10 showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of
GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM
video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed ±0.10V.
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Multimeter
Frame
HP 8153A - n.a.
Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months -
Laser Source (dual
wl)
HP 81554SM 12 months -
90/10% Coupler - -
Reflectance
Standard
- -
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a.
Env.Chamber Espec PLA2AP 12 months -
Optical Tunable
Light Source
Agilent 8164A 12 months -
Sensor for tunable
multimeter
Agilent 81640A 12 months -
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–37
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-35, sample i.l.03 at the 1625 nm wavelength
showed borderline performance to GR-910 CR4-31 [68] which states that the
maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems shall be
≤ –55 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating
temperature range of –40°C to +75°C.
Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-35, conformance to
GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators
intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be ≤ –65 dB over the entire bandpass of
GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of –40°C to +75°C was not
met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the
significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on
demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the
optical criteria described in Section 4.2.
Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing.
Sample Size
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
The following charts represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total
of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-33 presents
change-in-attenuation measurements for each wavelength after the Low
Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test for all of the eleven test samples at
1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-34 presents insertion loss
measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) for each wavelength
after the Low Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test for all of the eleven
test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-35
presents the reflectance measurements after the Low Temperature Exposure test
for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–38
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-33 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after Low Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test
TP-910 Figure 4-34 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm a nd 1625 nm
after Low Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Non-Operating Environment,
Low Temperature Exposure Test
i.l.02i.l.01 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
-0.6
-0.4
-0.2
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample #
Change in Attenuation (dB)
1310 nm
1490 nm
1550 nm
1625 nm
AM Vid e o
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Non-Operating Environment,
Low Temperature Exposure Test
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample #
Insertion Loss (dB)
1310 nm
1490 nm
1550 nm
1625 nm
AM Vi deo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–39
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Conformance/Nonconformance
All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in
Section 4.1.3.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this
criteria.
However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-37, the insertion loss of samples i.l.07 and
i.l.10 at the 1490 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more
stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators
intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not
exceed ±0.10V.
Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-38, conformance to
GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators
intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be ≤ –65 dB over the entire bandpass of
GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of –40°C to +75°C was not
met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the
significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on
demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the
optical criteria described in Section 4.2.
Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing.
Sample Size
TP-910 Figure 4-35 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
after Low Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Non-Operating Environment,
Low Temperature Exposure Test, Reflectance
-70.0
-65.0
-60.0
-55.0
-50.0
-45.0
-40.0
-35.0
-30.0
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample
Reflectance (dB)
1310 nm 1490 nm
1550 nm 1625 nm
Req (D) Req (A)
CR (A)
`
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–40
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
The following charts represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total
of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-36 presents
change-in-attenuation measurements for each wavelength after the High
Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test for all of the eleven test samples at
1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-37 presents insertion loss
measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) for each wavelength
after the High Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test for all of the eleven
test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-38
presents the reflectance measurements after the High Temperature Exposure test
for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm.
TP-910 Figure 4-36 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after High Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Non-Operating Environment,
High Temperature Exposure Test
i.l.11i.l.10i.l.09i.l.08i.l.07i.l.06i.l.05i.l.04i.l.03i.l.02i.l.01
-0.60
-0.40
-0.20
0.00
0.20
0.40
0.60
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample #
Change in Attenuation (dB)
1310 nm
1490 nm
1550 nm
1625 nm
AM Video
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–41
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-37 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm a nd 1625 nm
after High Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test
TP-910 Figure 4-38 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
after High Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Non-Operating Environment,
High Temperature Exposure Test
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample #
Insertion Loss (dB)
1310 nm
1490 nm
1550 nm
1625 nm
AM Vi deo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Non-Operating Environment,
High Temperature Exposure Test, Reflectance
-70.0
-65.0
-60.0
-55.0
-50.0
-45.0
-40.0
-35.0
-30.0
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample
Reflectance (dB)
1310 nm 1490 nm
1550 nm 1625 nm
Req (D) Req (A)
CR (A)
`
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–42
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Conformance/Nonconformance
All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in
Section 4.1.3.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this
criteria.
However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-40, the insertion loss of sample i.l.07 at the
1490 nm wavelength did not conform to, while i.l.06 at the 1490 nm wavelength and
i.l.10 at the 1490 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more
stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators
intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not
exceed ±0.10V. Sample i.l.07 showed a minimum insertion loss of 2.59 ±0.05 dB at
the 1490 nm wavelength.
In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-41, sample i.l.03 at the 1625 nm wavelength
showed borderline performance to GR-910 CR4-31 [68] which states that the
maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems shall be
≤ –55 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating
temperature range of –40°C to +75°C.
Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-41, conformance to
GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators
intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be ≤ –65 dB over the entire bandpass of
GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of –40°C to +75°C was not
met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the
significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on
demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the
optical criteria described in Section 4.2.
Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing.
Sample Size
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
The following charts represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total
of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-39 presents
change-in-attenuation measurements for each wavelength after the High Relative
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–43
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Humidity test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-40 presents insertion loss measurements (including
connection losses of about 0.5 dB) for each wavelength after the High Relative
Humidity test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-41 presents the reflectance measurements after the High
Relative Humidity Exposure test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm,
1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm.
TP-910 Figure 4-39 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after High Relative Humidity Exposure test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Non-Operating Environment,
High Relative Humidity Exposure Test
i.l.11i.l.10i.l.09i.l.08i.l.07i.l.06i.l.05i.l.04i.l.03i.l.02i.l.01
-0.60
-0.40
-0.20
0.00
0.20
0.40
0.60
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample #
Change in Attenuation (dB)
1310 nm
1490 nm
1550 nm
1625 nm
AM Vi de o
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–44
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-40 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm a nd 1625 nm
after High Relative Humidity Exposure test
TP-910 Figure 4-41 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
after High Relative Humidity Exposure test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Non-Operating Environment,
High Relative Humidity Exposure Test
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample #
Insertion Loss (dB)
1310 nm
1490 nm
1550 nm
1625 nm
AM Vi deo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Non-Operating Environment,
High Relative Humidity Exposure Test, Reflectance
-70.0
-65.0
-60.0
-55.0
-50.0
-45.0
-40.0
-35.0
-30.0
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample
Reflectance (dB)
1310 nm 1490 nm
1550 nm 1625 nm
Req (D) Req (A)
CR (A)
`
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–45
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.4 Humidity/Condensation Cycling Test
4.1.4.1 Criteria - Humidity/Condensation Cycling (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R4-6 [78] Attenuators shall meet the optical criteria and damage criteria described
in Section 4.2.
Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the Humidity/Condensation Cycling
Test according to FOTP-3, per the modified temperature profile shown in
Section 5.1.4. The maximum and minimum temperatures are –10°C to +65°C at 90%
to 100% relative humidity at the temperatures indicated for 168 hours, (7 days).
4.1.4.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Verify that the lab ambient conditions are in the range of 23 ±5°C, and 30 to 70%
relative humidity
2. Warm up/prepare and stabilize test equipment per manufacturers instructions,
up to 1 hour
3. Verify that the test equipment to be used meets calibration requirements
4. Review manufacturer instructions/procedures for product under test, to assure
product usage/configuration is appropriate
5. Allow product under test to stabilize at room temperature with relative humidity
less than 50%, for two hours prior to initial optical power reading
6. Program thermal chamber to test cycle per FOTP-3
7. Perform initial optical power reading and record data
8. Subject product under test to temperature cycling per FOTP-3 with maximum
temperature of 65°C and minimum temperature of –10°C with temperature rate
of change of approximately 1°C per minute. 14 cycles must be performed and
the chamber shall be programmed to assure minimum 30 minute dwells at the
extremes of each cycle to assure thermal equilibrium.
9. At conclusion of ten cycles, allow product under test to stabilize at room
conditions for at least 2 hours
10. Perform final optical power readings and record data
11. Inspect product under test for any physical damage and record observations
12. Record conformance status. If non-conforming, notify supplier.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–46
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.4.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 4-42 Test Flowchart - Humidity/Condensation Cycling Test (not
from GR-910)
Verify lab ambients of
23C +/-5 and 30-
70%RH
Prepare/Warm-up test
equipment per
manufacturers
instructions
Verify test equipment
calibration
Verify product under
test configured per
manufacturer
instructions
Stabilize product under
test at room temp with
less than 50% RH for 2
hours
Place all components
in chamber and
execute test with 10
cycles of +70C to -40 C
at 1C/min change
Verify chamber
settings
No Mechanical
Damage and optical
readings in spec?
Record
findings and
follow non-
conforming
process
Record
findings and
complete
report section
Test Complete
Yes
No
Stabilize components
at room temp for 2
hours
Inspect product under
test physical condition
Clean connection
points and perform
initial optical
measurements
Perform final optical
measurements and
inspect for any physical
damage
Place components in
chamber and execute
test with 14 cycles of
+65°C to -10°C at
1°C/min change
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–47
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.4.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Attenuators are subjected to a temperature cycle as described in FOTP-3 with a
maximum temperature of 65 ±2°C (149 ±4°F) and a minimum temperature of
–10 ±2°C (14 ±4°F). The rate of temperature change is approximately 1°C per
minute and dwell times at the extremes should be ≥ 30 minutes. Thermal
equilibrium must be reached at the extreme temperatures. Test samples shall be
subjected to 14 cycles of testing. The temperature cycle is to initiate at an ambient
temperature of 23 ±5°C with a relative humidity of 30 to 70%. Within the first
interval, the temperature is to decrease to –10 ±2°C and then be held for two
intervals. During the fourth interval, the temperature is to increase to a maximum
level of 65 ±2°C with a relative humidity ≥ 90% and be held constant for two
intervals. During the seventh interval, the temperature is to decrease to a minimum
level of –10 ±2°C and then be held for two intervals. During the tenth interval, the
temperature is to increase back to the initial ambient temperature of 23 ±5°C with
a relative humidity ≥ 90% and be held for two intervals.
Optical Measurements
For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined
by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical
transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test.
The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring
reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical
inspection should follow FOTP-13.
The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during
testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility
shown in TP-910 Figure 4-43, or another comparable system.
TP-910 Figure 4-43 Transmission Measurement Facility
Source
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–48
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make
measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm,
accurate to ±0.05 dB for transmittance and ±1 dB for reflectance down to –60 dB.
While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of
meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in
which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads
should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in
additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss.
The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of
four laser sources emitting near λ1 = 1310 nm, λ2 = 1490 nm, λ3 = 1550 nm or
λ4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source
switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to
launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any
DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The
Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for
detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct
for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value
is −60 ±1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance
from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the
power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through
the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the
reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports
are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers
are computer controlled via GPIB interface.
Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the
DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for
their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements,
all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and
switches, should have a reflectance of ≤ −65 dB. The Coupler should have a
directivity of ≥ 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode
transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter,
provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there
are at least two 360° loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for
additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the
Transmission Measurement Facility.
4.1.4.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Multimeter
Frame
HP 8153A - n.a.
Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months -
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–49
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.4.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in
Section 4.1.4.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this
criteria.
However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-49, the insertion loss of samples i.l.04 and
i.l.07 did not conform to, while samples i.l.03, i.l.06 and i.l.10 showed borderline
performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states
that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation
tolerance shall not exceed ±0.10V. Sample i.l.04 showed a minimum insertion loss
of 2.64 ±0.05 dB. Sample i.l.07 showed a minimum insertion loss of 2.57 ±0.05 dB.
As shown in TP-910 Figure 4-51, the insertion loss of samples i.l.08 and i.l.10 showed
borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61]
which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the
attenuation tolerance shall not exceed ±0.10V.
In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-52, sample i.l.03 at the 1625 nm wavelength
showed borderline performance to GR-910 CR4-31 [68] which states that the
maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems shall be
≤ –55 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating
temperature range of –40°C to +75°C.
Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-52, conformance to
GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators
intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be ≤ –65 dB over the entire bandpass of
Laser Source (dual
wl)
HP 81554SM 12 months -
90/10% Coupler - -
Reflectance
Standard
- -
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a.
Env.Chamber Espec PLA2AP 12 months -
Optical Tunable
Light Source
Agilent 8164A 12 months -
Sensor for tunable
multimeter
Agilent 81640A 12 months -
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–50
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of –40°C to +75°C was not
met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the
significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on
demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the
optical criteria described in Section 4.2.
Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing.
Sample Size
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
hot spares for replacing sample(s)) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
The following graphs represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total
of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-44 through
TP-910 Figure 4-47 present change-in-attenuation measurements during the
Humidity/Condensation Cycling test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm,
1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, respectively. TP-910 Figure 4-48 through
TP-910 Figure 4-51 present insertion loss measurements (including connection
losses of about 0.5 dB) during the Humidity/Condensation Cycling test for all of the
eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, respectively.
TP-910 Figure 4-52 presents the reflectance measurements during the Humidity/
Condensation Cycling test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm,
1550 nm and 1625 nm. It must be noted that TP-910 Figure 4-47 and
TP-910 Figure 4-51 show a loss of data between 50.33 hours and 55.00 hours. This
loss of data was due to a malfunction of the 1625 nm wavelength laser source used
during the Humidity/Condensation Cycling test. The malfunction was discovered
and corrected within a five hour period as the test continued.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–51
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-44 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm during Humidity/
Condensation Cycling test
TP-910 Figure 4-45 Change in Attenuation at 1490 nm during Humidity/
Condensation Cycling test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1310 nm.,
Humidity/Condensation Cycling
-0.75
-0.55
-0.35
-0.15
0.05
0.25
0.45
0.65
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168
Time (h)
Change in Attenuation (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vi de o
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1490 nm.,
Humidity/Condensation Cycling
-0.75
-0.55
-0.35
-0.15
0.05
0.25
0.45
0.65
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168
Time (h)
Change in Attenuation (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vi de o
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–52
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-46 Change in Attenuation at 1550 nm during Humidity/
Condensation Cycling test
TP-910 Figure 4-47 Change in Attenuation at 1625 nm during Humidity/
Condensation Cycling test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1550 nm.,
Humidity/Condensation Cycling
-0.75
-0.55
-0.35
-0.15
0.05
0.25
0.45
0.65
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168
Time (h)
Change in Attenuation (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vi de o
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1625 nm.,
Humidity/Condensation Cycling
-0.75
-0.55
-0.35
-0.15
0.05
0.25
0.45
0.65
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168
Time (h)
Change in Attenuation (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vi de o
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–53
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-48 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm during Humidity/Condensation
Cycling test
TP-910 Figure 4-49 Insertion Loss at 1490 nm during Humidity/Condensation
Cycling test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1310 nm.,
Humidity/Condensation Cycling
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
0 24487296120144168
Time (h)
Insertion Loss (dB
)
i.l .01
i.l .02
i.l .03
i.l .04
i.l .05
i.l .06
i.l .07
i.l .08
i.l .09
i.l .10
i.l .11
AM Vi de o
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1490 nm.,
Humidity/Condensation Cycling
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
0 24487296120144168
Time (h)
Insertion Loss (dB
)
i.l .01
i.l .02
i.l .03
i.l .04
i.l .05
i.l .06
i.l .07
i.l .08
i.l .09
i.l .10
i.l .11
AM Vi de o
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–54
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-50 Insertion Loss at 1550 nm during Humidity/Condensation
Cycling test
TP-910 Figure 4-51 Insertion Loss at 1625 nm during Humidity/Condensation
Cycling test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1550 nm.,
Humidity/Condensation Cycling
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
0 24487296120144168
Time (h)
Insertion Loss (dB
)
i.l .01
i.l .02
i.l .03
i.l .04
i.l .05
i.l .06
i.l .07
i.l .08
i.l .09
i.l .10
i.l .11
AM Vi de o
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1625 nm.,
Humidity/Condensation Cycling
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
0 24487296120144168
Time (h)
Insertion Loss (dB
)
i.l .01
i.l .02
i.l .03
i.l .04
i.l .05
i.l .06
i.l .07
i.l .08
i.l .09
i.l .10
i.l .11
AM Vi de o
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–55
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.5 Water Immersion
Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the Water Immersion Test,
Section 6.2.10, of GR-1221-CORE. Test samples are to be immersed in a water
(pH 5.5 ±0.5) bath at a temperature of 43° ±2°C (109 ±4°F), for 168 hours (7 days).
4.1.5.1 Criteria - Water Immersion (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R4-7 [44] Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in
Section 4.2.
The requirement and objective apply before, during and after the test.
Water found in the OSP typically has a pH between 5 and 6. The above test method
is based on FOTP-12A, which may be used as an alternative to the method described
in GR-1221-CORE.
TP-910 Figure 4-52 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
during Humidity/Condensation Cycling test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators,
Humidity-Condensation Cycling Test, Reflectance
-70.0
-65.0
-60.0
-55.0
-50.0
-45.0
-40.0
-35.0
-30.0
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample
Reflectance (dB)
1310 nm 1490 nm
1550 nm 1625 nm
Req (D) Req (A)
CR (A)
`
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–56
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.5.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Verify that the lab ambient conditions are in the range of 23 ±5°C, and 30 to 70%
relative humidity
2. Prepare/warm up and stabilize test equipment per manufacturers instructions,
up to 1 hour
3. Verify that the test equipment to be used meets calibration requirements
4. Review manufacturer instructions/procedures for product under test, to assure
product usage/configuration is appropriate
5. Allow product under test to stabilize at room temperature with relative humidity
less than 50%, for two hours prior to initial optical power reading
6. Prepare water bath per FOTP-12 maintaining water temperature of 43 ± 2°C
(109 ± 4°F), and adjust pH of water to be 5.5 ±0.5
7. Perform initial optical power reading and record data
8. Maintain product under test immersed in water bath for seven days
9. Optical power measurements shall be made once every day throughout the
duration of the test
10. At conclusion of the seven days, allow product under test to stabilize at room
conditions
11. Perform final optical power readings within 24 hours of test conclusion and
record data
12. Inspect product under test for any physical damage and record observations
13. Record conformance status. If non-conforming, notify supplier.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–57
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.5.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 4-53 Test Flowchart - Water Immersion Test (not from GR-910)
Were the
components
undamaged and the
optical measurements
within specs?
No
Clean connection points
and perform initial optical
measurements
Prepare/warm-up test
equipment per
manufacturers’
instructions
Verify test equipment
calibration
Verify lab ambient
conditions of 23 ±5°C
and 30 to 70% RH
Verify product under test
is configured per
supplier’s instructions
Inspect physical
condition of product
under test
Stabilize product under
test at room temperature
with less than 50% RH
for 2 hours
Prepare water bath per
FOTP-12 (43°C, pH=5.5)
Perform final optical
measurements and
inspect for any physical
damage
Stabilize components at
room temperature for
24 hours
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Yes
Immerse product under
test in bath for 7 days,
and make (and record
results of) optical
measurements once per
day
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–58
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.5.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
This test is to be performed according to GR-1221-CORE, Section 6.2.10, Water
Immersion Test, which is based on FOTP-12. Attenuator test samples are to be
subjected to immersion in water (pH 5.5 ±0.5) at 43 ±2°C (109 ±4°F) for 7 days. The
pH level can be set by mixing a standard buffer solution containing sodium
hydroxide and acetic acid. The pH level should be checked periodically throughout
the test and compensated if it drifts. Optical transmittance and reflectance are to be
monitored once/day for 7 consecutive days and 24 hours after the test samples are
removed from the bath. The samples are washed and allowed to drain for 24 hours
at room temperature following removal from the water bath. The final optical
transmittance and reflectance is to be measured at 23°C, 24 hours following
removal from the water bath. The change in attenuation and reflectance at any
measurement point during or at the end of the test is to be compared against the
requirements and objectives specified in GR-910 Table 4-1.
Optical Measurements
For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined
by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical
transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test.
The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring
reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical
inspection should follow FOTP-13.
The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during
testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility
shown in TP-910 Figure 4-54, or another comparable system.
In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make
measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm,
TP-910 Figure 4-54 Transmission Measurement Facility
Source
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–59
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
accurate to ±0.05 dB for transmittance and ±1 dB for reflectance down to –60 dB.
While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of
meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in
which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads
should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in
additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss.
The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of
four laser sources emitting near λ1 = 1310 nm, λ2 = 1490 nm, λ3 = 1550 nm or
λ4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source
switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to
launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any
DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The
Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for
detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct
for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value
is −60 ±1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance
from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the
power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through
the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the
reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports
are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers
are computer controlled via GPIB interface.
Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the
DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for
their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements,
all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and
switches, should have a reflectance of ≤ −65 dB. The Coupler should have a
directivity of ≥ 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode
transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter,
provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there
are at least two 360° loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for
additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the
Transmission Measurement Facility.
4.1.5.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Multimeter
Frame
HP 8153A - n.a.
Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months -
Laser Source (dual
wl)
HP 81554SM 12 months -
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–60
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.5.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in
Section 4.1.5.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this
criteria.
However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-60, the insertion loss of sample i.l.07 did not
conform to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for
attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance
shall not exceed ±0.10V. Sample i.l.07 showed a minimum insertion loss of
2.58 ±0.05 dB.
Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-63, conformance to
GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators
intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be ≤ –65 dB over the entire bandpass of
GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of –40°C to +75°C was not
met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the
significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on
demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the
optical criteria described in Section 4.2.
Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing.
Sample Size
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
90/10% Coupler - -
Reflectance
Standard
- -
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a.
Water Tub with
Temperature Sensor
In-house 12 months -
Optical Tunable
Light Source
Agilent 8164A 12 months -
Sensor for tunable
multimeter
Agilent 81640A 12 months -
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–61
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
The following graphs represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total
of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-55 through
TP-910 Figure 4-58 present change-in-attenuation measurements during the Water
Immersion test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm, respectively. TP-910 Figure 4-59 through TP-910 Figure 4-62 present
insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) during
the Water Immersion test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm,
1550 nm and 1625 nm, respectively. TP-910 Figure 4-63 presents the reflectance
measurements during the water immersion test for all of the eleven test samples at
1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm.
TP-910 Figure 4-55 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm during Water Immersion
test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1310 nm.,
Water Immersion
-0.75
-0.55
-0.35
-0.15
0.05
0.25
0.45
0.65
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216
Time (h)
Change in Attenuation (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vi d eo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–62
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-56 Change in Attenuation at 1490 nm during Water Immersion
test
TP-910 Figure 4-57 Change in Attenuation at 1550 nm during Water Immersion
test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1490 nm.,
Water Immersion
-0.75
-0.55
-0.35
-0.15
0.05
0.25
0.45
0.65
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216
Time (h)
Change in Atteunation (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vid eo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1550 nm.,
Water Immersion
-0.75
-0.55
-0.35
-0.15
0.05
0.25
0.45
0.65
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216
Time (h)
Change in Attenuation (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vid eo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–63
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-58 Change in Attenuation at 1625 nm during Water Immersion
test
TP-910 Figure 4-59 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm during Water Immersion test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1625 nm.,
Water Immersion
-0.75
-0.55
-0.35
-0.15
0.05
0.25
0.45
0.65
0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216
Time (h)
Change in Attenuation (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vi d eo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1310 nm.,
Water Immersion
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
0 24487296120144168192216
Ti me (h)
Insertion Loss (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vid eo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–64
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-60 Insertion Loss at 1490 nm during Water Immersion test
TP-910 Figure 4-61 Insertion Loss at 1550 nm during Water Immersion test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1490 nm.,
Water Immersion
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
0 24487296120144168192216
Ti me (h)
Insertion Loss (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vid eo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1550 nm.,
Water Immersion
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
0 24487296120144168192216
Ti me (h)
Insertion Loss (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vid eo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–65
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-62 Insertion Loss at 1625 nm during Water Immersion test
TP-910 Figure 4-63 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
during Water Immersion test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1625 nm.,
Water Immersion
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
0 24 48 72 96 120 14 4 168 1 92 216
Time (h)
Insertion Loss (dB
)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Vi deo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Water Immersion Test, Reflectance
-70.0
-65.0
-60.0
-55.0
-50.0
-45.0
-40.0
-35.0
-30.0
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample
Reflectance (dB)
1310 nm 1490 nm
1550 nm 1625 nm
Req (D) Req (A)
CR (A)
`
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–66
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.6 Vibration
Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the Variable Frequency Vibration
Test, Section 6.2.2, of GR-1221-CORE, except that test samples are to withstand
vibrations from 10 Hz to 55 Hz.
4.1.6.1 Criteria - Vibration (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R4-8 [45] Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in
Section 4.2.
The requirements and objectives apply before and after, but not during, the test.
The above test method is based on FOTP-11, which may be used as an alternative
to the method described in GR-1221-CORE. During vibration testing, time variations
in attenuation may be observed with an oscilloscope.
4.1.6.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Verify that the lab ambient conditions are in the range of 23 ±5°C, and 30 to 70%
relative humidity
2. Warm up/prepare and stabilize test equipment per manufacturers instructions,
up to 1 hour
3. Verify that the test equipment to be used meets calibration requirements
4. Review manufacturer instructions/procedures for product under test, to assure
product usage/configuration is appropriate
5. Perform initial optical power reading and record data
6. Program vibration table for modified FOTP-11, Condition 1 test (modification
limits sweep range between 10 Hz to 55 Hz
7. Mount test samples to vibration table for X-axis test
8. Subject product to five sweeps of 10 Hz to 55 Hz and back to 10 Hz (each sweep
should take approximately four minutes and the total test time should be 20
minutes
9. Perform final optical power readings and record data
10. Inspect product under test for any physical damage and record observations
11. Record conformance status. If non-conforming, notify supplier.
12. Repeat Step 5 to Step 11 for Y-Axis
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–67
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
13. Repeat Step 5 to Step 11 for Z-Axis
4.1.6.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 4-64 Test Flowchart - Vibration Test (not from GR-910)
Verify lab ambients of
23C +/-5 and 30-
70%RH
Prepare/Warm-up test
equipment per
manufacturers
instructions
Verify test equipment
calibration
Verify product under
test configured per
manufacturer
instructions
Mount test samples to
vibration table for X-
axis test orientation
Program vibration table
for modified FOTP-11
test from 10 Hz to55 hz
No Mechanical
Damage and optical
readings in spec?
Record
findings and
follow non-
conforming
process
Record
findings and
complete
report section
Test Complete
Yes
No
Execute test - 5
sweeps of 10 Hz to 55
Hz to 10 Hz
Inspect product under
test physical condition
Clean connection
points and perform
initial optical
measurements
Perform final optical
measurements and
inspect for any physical
damage
Repeat tests for Y-Axis
and Z-Axis
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–68
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.6.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
This test is to be performed according to GR-1221-CORE, Section 6.2.2, Variable
Frequency Vibration Test, which is based on FOTP-11, Condition I, except that test
samples are to withstand vibrations from 10 Hz to 55 Hz. This test subjects the
samples to a simple harmonic motion having an amplitude of 1.52 mm (0.060")
maximum total excursion. The frequency is to vary uniformly between 10 Hz and
55 Hz and return to 10 Hz in approximately 4 minutes. The attenuators are to be
tested for 2 hours in each of three mutually perpendicular planes. Optical
transmittance and reflectance are to be measured before and after the test. The
change in attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements taken
before and after the test and is to be compared against the requirements and
objectives specified in GR-910 Table 4-1.
Optical Measurements
For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined
by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical
transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test.
The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring
reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical
inspection should follow FOTP-13.
The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during
testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility
shown in TP-910 Figure 4-65, or another comparable system.
In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make
measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm,
accurate to ±0.05 dB for transmittance and ±1 dB for reflectance down to –60 dB.
While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of
TP-910 Figure 4-65 Transmission Measurement Facility
Source
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–69
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in
which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads
should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in
additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss.
The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of
four laser sources emitting near λ1 = 1310 nm, λ2 = 1490 nm, λ3 = 1550 nm or
λ4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source
switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to
launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any
DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The
Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for
detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct
for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value
is −60 ±1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance
from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the
power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through
the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the
reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports
are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers
are computer controlled via GPIB interface.
Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the
DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for
their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements,
all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and
switches, should have a reflectance of ≤ −65 dB. The Coupler should have a
directivity of ≥ 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode
transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter,
provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there
are at least two 360° loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for
additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the
Transmission Measurement Facility.
4.1.6.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Multimeter
Frame
HP 8153A - n.a.
Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months -
Laser Source (dual
wl)
HP 81554SM 12 months -
90/10% Coupler - -
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–70
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.6.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in
Section 4.1.6.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this
criteria.
However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-67, the insertion loss of samples i.l.01 at the
1310 nm wavelength, i.l.05 at the 1490 nm wavelength, i.l.06 at the 1310 nm and i.l.07
at the 1490 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent
criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use
in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed ±0.10V.
In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-68, samples i.l.03 and i.l.04 at the 1490 nm
wavelength showed borderline performance to GR-910 CR4-31 [68] which states
that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems
shall be ≤ –55 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating
temperature range of –40°C to +75°C.
Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-68, conformance to
GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators
intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be ≤ –65 dB over the entire bandpass of
GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of –40°C to +75°C was not
met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the
significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on
demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the
optical criteria described in Section 4.2.
Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing.
Sample Size
Reflectance
Standard
- -
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a.
Vibration Controller TTI 2050A 12 months -
Optical Tunable
Light Source
Agilent 8164A 12 months -
Sensor for tunable
multimeter
Agilent 81640A 12 months -
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–71
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
The following charts represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total
of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-66 presents
change-in-attenuation measurements after the Vibration test for all of the eleven
test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-67
presents insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB)
after the Vibration test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm,
1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-68 presents the reflectance measurements
after the Vibration test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm,
1550 nm and 1625 nm.
TP-910 Figure 4-66 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after Vibration test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Vibration Test
i.l.11i.l.10i.l.09i.l.08i.l.07i.l.06i.l.05i.l.04i.l.03i.l.02i.l.01
-0.75
-0.55
-0.35
-0.15
0.05
0.25
0.45
0.65
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample #
Change in Attenuation (dB)
1310 nm
1490 nm
1550 nm
1625 nm
AM Vid eo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–72
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-67 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm a nd 1625 nm
after Vibration test
TP-910 Figure 4-68 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
after Vibration test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Vibration Test
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample #
Insertion Loss (dB)
1310 nm
1490 nm
1550 nm
1625 nm
AM Vi deo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Vibration Test, Reflectance
-70.0
-65.0
-60.0
-55.0
-50.0
-45.0
-40.0
-35.0
-30.0
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample
Reflectance (dB)
1310 nm 1490 nm
1550 nm 1625 nm
Req (D) Req (A)
CR (A)
`
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–73
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.7 Flex Test
Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to 100 cable flex cycles with the load
specified in GR-910 Table 4-2, per FOTP-1.
4.1.7.1 Criteria - Flex (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R4-9 [46] Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in
Section 4.2.
The Flex test applies only to attenuators with optical fiber leads. The requirements
and objectives apply before and after, but not during, the test.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–74
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.7.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Verify that the lab ambient conditions are in the range of 23 ±5°C, and 30 to 70%
relative humidity
2. Prepare/warm up and stabilize test equipment per manufacturers instructions,
up to 1 hour
3. Verify that the test equipment to be used meets calibration requirements
4. Review manufacturer instructions/procedures for product under test, to assure
product usage/configuration is appropriate
5. Perform initial optical power reading and record data
F. Prepare flex test apparatus per FOTP-1 with load based on attenuator type
(Table 4-2). Rotate the angle of the test fixture arm through the following
cycle: 0°, 90°, 0°, –90°, 0°, and repeat for 100 cycles.
G. Remove load
8. Perform final optical power readings and record data for each fiber after each
set of 100 cycles
9. Inspect product under test for any physical damage and record observations
10. Record conformance status. If non-conforming, notify supplier.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–75
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.7.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 4-69 Test Flowchart - Fiber Flex Test (not from GR-910)
Clean connection points
and perform initial optical
measurements
Prepare/warm-up test
equipment per
manufacturers’
instructions
Verify test equipment
calibration
Verify lab ambient
conditions of 23 ±5°C
and 30 to 70% RH
Verify product under test
is configured per
supplier’s instructions
Inspect physical
condition of product
under test Perform final optical
measurements and
inspect for any physical
damage
Prepare flex test machine
for FOTP-1 with load
based on attenuator type,
100 cycles through
180 degrees)
Were the
components
undamaged and the
optical measurements
within specs?
Yes
No Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Have all
fibers that are connected
to ports been
tested?
No
Yes
Mount the product under
test in the flex test
machine such that an
untested fiber will be
flexed
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Execute test
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–76
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.7.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to a modified flex test per
Section 4.4.3.1 of GR-326-CORE. The flex test may be performed according to
FOTP-1. The optical fiber lead(s) of the test sample shall be flexed through 180° for
100 cycles with the required load specified in GR-910 Table 4-2. The maximum
change in attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements taken
before and after the test and is to be compared against the requirements and
objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5.
This test applies only to attenuators with optical fiber leads.
A. Measure attenuation and reflectance
B. Apply load:
Media Type I, 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)
Media Type II, 0.23 kg (0.5 lb.)
Media Type III, 0.23 kg (0.5 lb.)
C. Rotate the angle of the test fixture arm (see TP-910 Figure 4-70) through the
following cycle: 0°, 90°, 0°, –90°, 0°, and repeat for 100 cycles
D. Remove load
E. Measure attenuation and reflectance
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–77
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-70 Mechanical Test Facility for Flex, Twist, Side Pull and Cable
Retention Tests
WEIGHTS
GUIDES
CAPSTAN
7.5 Cm DIA.
ATTENUATOR
TEST ARM
22-28 Cm
CABLE
OR
FIBER
90
+90
_
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–78
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Optical Measurements
For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined
by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical
transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test.
The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring
reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical
inspection should follow FOTP-13.
The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during
testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility
shown in TP-910 Figure 4-71, or another comparable system.
In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make
measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm,
accurate to ±0.05 dB for transmittance and ±1 dB for reflectance down to –60 dB.
While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of
meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in
which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads
should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in
additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss.
The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of
four laser sources emitting near λ1 = 1310 nm, λ1 = 1490 nm, λ1 = 1550 nm or
λ2 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source
switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to
launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any
DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The
Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for
detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct
for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value
TP-910 Figure 4-71 Transmission Measurement Facility
Source
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–79
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
is −60 ±1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance
from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the
power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through
the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the
reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports
are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers
are computer controlled via GPIB interface.
Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the
DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for
their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements,
all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and
switches, should have a reflectance of ≤ −65 dB. The Coupler should have a
directivity of ≥ 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode
transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter,
provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there
are at least two 360° loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for
additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the
Transmission Measurement Facility.
4.1.7.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Multimeter
Frame
HP 8153A - n.a.
Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months -
Laser Source (dual
wl)
HP 81554SM 12 months -
90/10% Coupler - -
Reflectance
Standard
- -
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a.
Jumper Test
Apparatus
In-house 12 months -
Optical Tunable
Light Source
Agilent 8164A 12 months -
Sensor for tunable
multimeter
Agilent 81640A 12 months -
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–80
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.7.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Sample Size
Not applicable.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable
4.1.8 Twist Test
Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to 10 twisting cycles (in a non-operating
mode) under the load specified in GR-910 Table 4-2, per FOTP-36.
4.1.8.1 Criteria - Twist (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R4-10 [47] Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in
Section 4.2.
The Twist test applies only to attenuators with optical fiber leads. The requirements
and objectives apply before and after, but not during, the test.
4.1.8.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Verify that the lab ambient conditions are in the range of 23 ±5°C, and 30 to 70%
relative humidity
2. Prepare/warm up and stabilize test equipment per manufacturers instructions,
up to 1 hour
3. Verify that the test equipment to be used meets calibration requirements
4. Review manufacturer instructions/procedures for product under test, to assure
product usage/configuration is appropriate
5. Perform initial optical power reading and record data
6. Prepare twist test apparatus per FOTP-36 and parameters: 0.45 kg, 10 cycles
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–81
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7. Apply load based on Media Type
Media Type I, 1.35 kgf (3.0 lbf.)
Media Type II, 0.75 kgf (1.65 lbf.)
Media Type III, 0.5 kgf (1.1 lbf.)
8. Rotate the capstan (see figure below) X revolutions about the axis of the fiber,
where X=2.5 for Media Type 1 and X=1.5 for Media Types II and III
9. Reverse direction and rotate Y revolutions, where Y=5 for Media Type 1 and Y=3
for Media Types II and III. Reverse direction again, and rotate Y revolutions.
10. Perform final optical power readings and record data for each fiber after each
set of 10 cycles
11. Inspect product under test for any physical damage and record observations
12. Record conformance status. If non-conforming, notify supplier.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–82
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.8.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 4-72 Test Flowchart - Fiber Twist Test (not from GR-910)
Clean connection points
and perform initial optical
measurements
Prepare/warm-up test
equipment per
manufacturers’
instructions
Verify test equipment
calibration
Verify lab ambient
conditions of 23 ±5°C
and 30 to 70% RH
Verify product under test
is configured per
supplier’s instructions
Inspect physical
condition of product
under test Perform final optical
measurements and
inspect for any physical
damage
Prepare twist test
apparatus for FOTP-36
with load based on
attenuator type;10 cycles
Were the
components
undamaged and the
optical measurements
within specs?
Yes
No Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Have all
fibers that are connected
to ports been
tested?
No
Yes
Mount the product under
test in the twist test
apparatus such that an
untested fiber will be
twisted
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Execute test
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–83
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.8.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to a modified twist test per
Section 4.4.2.3 of GR-326-CORE. The twist test may be performed according to
FOTP-36. The optical fiber lead(s) of the test sample shall be twisted for 10 cycles
with the required load specified in GR-910 Table 4-2. The maximum change in
attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements taken before and
after the test and is to be compared against the requirements and objectives
specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5.
A. Mount the test sample in the test facility; see TP-910 Figure 4-73
B. Measure attenuation and reflectance
C. Apply load:
Media Type I, 1.35 kg (3.0 lb.)
Media Type II, 0.75 kg (1.65 lb.)
Media Type III, 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
D. Rotate the capstan (see TP-910 Figure 4-73) X revolutions about the axis of the
fiber. (See the following table.)
E. Reverse direction and rotate Y revolutions. Reverse direction again, and rotate
Y revolutions. See TP-910 Table 4-1.
F. Repeat step “E.” nine times
G. Remove load, and measure attenuation and reflectance.
The test may be conducted with a fixture as illustrated in TP-910 Figure 4-73.
TP-910 Table 4-1 Number of Turns for Twist Test
Media Types X Y
Type I 2.5 5
Types II & III 1.5 3
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–84
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-73 Mechanica l Test Facility for Flex, T wist, Side Pull and Cable
Retention Tests
WEIGHTS
GUIDES
CAPSTAN
7.5 Cm DIA.
ATTENUATOR
TEST ARM
22-28 Cm
CABLE
OR
FIBER
90
+90
_
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–85
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Optical Measurements
For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined
by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical
transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test.
The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring
reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical
inspection should follow FOTP-13.
The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during
testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility
shown in TP-910 Figure 4-74, or another comparable system.
In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make
measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm,
accurate to ±0.05 dB for transmittance and ±1 dB for reflectance down to –60 dB.
While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of
meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in
which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads
should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in
additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss.
The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of
four laser sources emitting near λ1 = 1310 nm, λ2 = 1490 nm, λ3 = 1550 nm or
λ4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source
switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to
launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any
DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The
Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for
detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct
for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value
TP-910 Figure 4-74 Transmission Measurement Facility
Source
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–86
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
is −60 ±1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance
from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the
power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through
the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the
reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports
are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers
are computer controlled via GPIB interface.
Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the
DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for
their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements,
all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and
switches, should have a reflectance of ≤ −65 dB. The Coupler should have a
directivity of ≥ 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode
transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter,
provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there
are at least two 360° loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for
additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the
Transmission Measurement Facility.
4.1.8.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Multimeter
Frame
HP 8153A - n.a.
Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months -
Laser Source (dual
wl)
HP 81554SM 12 months -
90/10% Coupler - -
Reflectance
Standard
- -
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a.
Jumper Test
Apparatus
In-house 12 months -
Optical Tunable
Light Source
Agilent 8164A 12 months -
Sensor for tunable
multimeter
Agilent 81640A 12 months -
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–87
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.8.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Sample Size
Not applicable.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable
4.1.9 Side Pull Load
Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the tensile load specified in GR-
910 Table 4-2, with the load applied at a angle of 90°. The Side Pull test applies to all
attenuators. Refer to GR-326-CORE for more details on this test.
4.1.9.1 Criteria - Side Pull Load (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R4-11 [48] Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in
Section 4.2.
The requirements and objectives apply before, during and after the test.
4.1.9.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Verify that the lab ambient conditions are in the range of 23 ±5°C, and 30 to 70%
relative humidity
2. Prepare/warm up and stabilize test equipment per manufacturers instructions,
up to 1 hour
3. Verify that the test equipment to be used meets calibration requirements
4. Review manufacturer instructions/procedures for product under test, to assure
product usage/configuration is appropriate
5. Perform initial optical power reading and record data
6. Mount the test sample in the test facility as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-76
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–88
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7. Apply 1.25 kgf (2.75 lbf) at 90° for at least 5 seconds
8. Remove the load, and after at least 20 seconds, measure loss and reflectance
9. Inspect product under test for any physical damage and record observations
10. Record conformance status. If non-conforming, notify supplier.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–89
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.9.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 4-75 Test Flowchart - Fiber Side Pull Test (not from GR-910)
Clean connection points
and perform initial optical
measurements
Execute tests side pulls
of 2.75 lbf
Verify test equipment
calibration
Verify lab ambient
conditions of 23 ±5°C
and 30 to 70% RH
Verify product under test
is configured per
supplier’s instructions
Inspect physical
condition of product
under test
Perform final optical
measurements and
inspect for any physical
damage
Prepare tensile load test
apparatus in accordance
with the specified
parameters
Were the
components
undamaged and the
optical measurements
within specs?
Yes
No Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Have all
fibers that are connected
to ports been
tested?
No
Yes
Mount the product under
test in the tensile load test
apparatus such that an
untested fiber will be
stressed
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Prepare/warm-up test
equipment per
manufacturers’
instructions
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–90
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.9.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (Not from GR-910)
Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the required tensile side load in an
operating mode. The optical fiber lead(s) of the test sample shall be tested with the
required load, specified in TP-910 Table 4-2, applied at an angle of 90°. The
maximum change in attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements
taken before, during and after the test and is to be compared against the
requirements and objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5.
The Side Pull test is based on the Equilibrium Tensile Loading Test in Section 4.4.3.5
of GR-326-CORE.
Mount the test sample in the test facility of TP-910 Figure 4-76.
The test is conducted as follows:
A. Measure both loss and reflectance
B. Apply the load listed in TP-910 Table 4-2 at an angle of 90°
C. Measure both loss and reflectance after 5 seconds
D. Remove the load and measure attenuation and reflectance after 10 seconds
The test may be conducted with a fixture as illustrated in TP-910 Figure 4-76 below.
TP-910 Table 4-2 Side Pull Tensile Loading
Media Type Load
Media I 1.25 kg (2.75 lb)
Media II 0.25 kg (0.55 lb)
Media III 0.25 kg (0.55 lb)
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–91
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-76 Mechanica l Test Facility for Flex, T wist, Side Pull and Cable
Retention Tests
WEIGHTS
GUIDES
CAPSTAN
7.5 Cm DIA.
ATTENUATOR
TEST ARM
22-28 Cm
CABLE
OR
FIBER
90
+90
_
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–92
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Optical Measurements
For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined
by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical
transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test.
The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring
reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical
inspection should follow FOTP-13.
The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during
testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility
shown in TP-910 Figure 4-77, or another comparable system.
In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make
measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm,
accurate to ±0.05 dB for transmittance and ±1 dB for reflectance down to –60 dB.
While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of
meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in
which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads
should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in
additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss.
The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of
four laser sources emitting near λ1 = 1310 nm, λ2 = 1490 nm, λ3 = 1550 nm or
λ4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source
switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to
launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any
DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The
Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for
detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct
for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value
TP-910 Figure 4-77 Transmission Measurement Facility
Source
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–93
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
is −60 ±1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance
from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the
power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through
the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the
reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports
are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers
are computer controlled via GPIB interface.
Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the
DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for
their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements,
all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and
switches, should have a reflectance of ≤ −65 dB. The Coupler should have a
directivity of ≥ 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode
transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter,
provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there
are at least two 360° loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for
additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the
Transmission Measurement Facility.
4.1.9.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Multimeter
Frame
HP 8153A - n.a.
Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months -
Laser Source (dual
wl)
HP 81554SM 12 months -
90/10% Coupler - -
Reflectance
Standard
- -
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a.
Jumper Test
Apparatus
In-house 12 months -
Optical Tunable
Light Source
Agilent 8164A 12 months -
Sensor for tunable
multimeter
Agilent 81640A 12 months -
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–94
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.9.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Eight of the eleven samples conformed to the criteria in Section 4.1.9.1 of this
document for during the side pull test. Refer to the Executive Summary for details
on this criteria.
As shown in TP-910 Figure 4-78, the change in attenuation for samples i.l.04 at the
1625 nm wavelength, i.l.06 at the 1625 nm wavelength and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm,
1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths did not conform to the less stringent
criteria of GR-910 CR4-21 [58] which states that for all digital applications, the
maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all
environmental or mechanical tests shall be ≤ 0.5 dB, and the less stringent criteria
of GR-910 CR4-22 [59] which states that for all AM video applications, the
maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all
environmental or mechanical tests shall be ≤ 0.5 dB. Sample i.l.04 showed a change
in attenuation of 0.56 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.06 showed a
change in attenuation of 0.66 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.10
showed a change in attenuation of 1.29 ±0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength,
1.82 ±0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 2.04 ±0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength
and 1.53 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength.
Also shown in TP-910 Figure 4-78, the change in attenuation of samples i.l.04 at the
1625 nm wavelength, i.l.06 at the 1625 nm wavelength and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm,
1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths did not conform to, while samples i.l.06
at the 1550 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent
criteria of GR-910 CR4-21 [58] which states that for all digital applications the
maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all
environmental or mechanical tests shall be ≤ 0.5 dB or ≤ 0.15A, whichever is less.
Sample i.l.04 showed a change in attenuation of 0.56 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm
wavelength. Sample i.l.06 showed a change in attenuation of 0.66 ±0.05 dB at the
1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.10 showed a change in attenuation of 1.29 ±0.05 dB
at the 1310 nm wavelength, 1.82 ±0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 2.04 ±0.05 dB
at the 1550 nm wavelength and 1.53 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength.
In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-78, the change in attenuation of samples
i.l.04 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths, i.l.06 at the
1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm wavelengths did not conform to, while samples i.l.02 at the 1310 nm
wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of
GR-910 CR4-22 [59] which states that for all AM video applications the maximum
or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental
or mechanical tests shall be ≤ 0.5 dB or ≤ 0.10A, whichever is less. Sample i.l.04
showed a change in attenuation of 0.44 ±0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength,
0.43 ±0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 0.37 ±0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength
and 0.56 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.06 showed a change in
attenuation of 0.45 ±0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 0.66 ±0.05 dB at the
1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.10 showed a change in attenuation of 1.29 ±0.05 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–95
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
at the 1310 nm wavelength, 1.82 ±0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 2.04 ±0.05 dB
at the 1550 nm wavelength and 1.53 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength.
Shown in TP-910 Figure 4-79, the insertion loss of samples i.l.06 at the 1625 nm
wavelength and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to
the less stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-23 [60] which states that for attenuators
intended for use in digital applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed
±0.15V, modified to ±0.5 dB, and to the less stringent criteria of
GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM
video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed ±0.10V, modified to
±0.5 dB.
Also shown in TP-910 Figure 4-79, the insertion loss of samples i.l.06 at the 1550 nm
and 1625 nm wavelengths and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm wavelength showed borderline
performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-23 [60] which states
that for attenuators intended for use in digital applications, the attenuation
tolerance shall not exceed ±0.15V.
Also shown in TP-910 Figure 4-79, the insertion loss of samples i.l.02 at the 1310 nm,
wavelength, i.l.05 at the 1490 nm wavelength, i.l.06 at the 1550 nm and 1625 nm
wavelengths and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm and 1550 nm wavelengths did not
conform to, while samples i.l.01 at the 1310 nm wavelength, i.l.06 at the 1310 nm
wavelength, i.l.07 at the 1625 nm wavelength and i.l.10 at the 1625 nm wavelength
showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24
[61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the
attenuation tolerance shall not exceed ±0.10V. Sample i.l.02 showed a maximum
insertion loss of 3.43 ±0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.05 showed a
maximum insertion loss of 3.36 ±0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.06
showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.45 ±0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and
3.48 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.10 showed a maximum
insertion loss of 3.48 ±0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength, 3.42 ±0.05 dB at the
1490 nm wavelength and 3.40 ±0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength.
In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-80, sample i.l.06 at the 1625 nm wavelength
showed borderline performance to GR-910 CR4-31 [68] which states that the
maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems shall be
≤ –55 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating
temperature range of –40°C to +75°C.
Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-80, conformance to
GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators
intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be ≤ –65 dB over the entire bandpass of
GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of –40°C to +75°C was not
met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the
significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on
demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the
optical criteria described in Section 4.2.
Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CR4-21 [58], GR-910 CR4-22 [59] and
GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–96
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Sample Size
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
The following charts represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total
of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-78 presents
change-in-attenuation measurements during the Side Pull Load test for all of the
eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-79
presents insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB)
during the Side Pull Load test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm,
1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-80 presents the reflectance measurements
during the Side Pull Load test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm,
1550 nm and 1625 nm.
TP-910 Figure 4-78 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm during Side Pull test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Side Pull Test, During
i.l.11i.l.10i.l.09i.l.08i.l.07i.l.06i.l.05i.l.04i.l.03i.l.02i.l.01
-2.50
-2.00
-1.50
-1.00
-0.50
0.00
0.50
1.00
1.50
2.00
2.50
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample #
Change in Attenuation (dB)
1310 nm
1490 nm
1550 nm
1625 nm
AM Video
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–97
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-79 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm a nd 1625 nm
during Side Pull test
TP-910 Figure 4-80 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
during Side Pull test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Side Pull Test, During
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample #
Insertion Loss (dB)
1310 nm
1490 nm
1550 nm
1625 nm
AM Video
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, During Side Pull, Reflectance
-70.0
-65.0
-60.0
-55.0
-50.0
-45.0
-40.0
-35.0
-30.0
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample
Reflectance (dB)
1310 nm 1490 nm
1550 nm 1625 nm
Req (D) Req (A)
CR (A)
`
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–98
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Conformance/Nonconformance
Nine of the eleven samples conformed to the criteria in Section 4.1.9.1 of this
document for after the side pull test. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on
this criteria.
As shown in TP-910 Figure 4-81, the change in attenuation for samples i.l.06 at the
1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm wavelengths did not conform to, while sample i.l.04 at the 1625 nm
wavelength showed borderline performance to the less stringent criteria of
GR-910 CR4-21 [58] which states that for all digital applications, the maximum or
minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or
mechanical tests shall be ≤ 0.5 dB, and the less stringent criteria of
GR-910 CR4-22 [59] which states that for all AM video applications, the maximum
or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental
or mechanical tests shall be ≤ 0.5 dB. Sample i.l.06 showed a change in attenuation
of 0.64 ±0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 0.84 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm
wavelength. Sample i.l.10 showed a change in attenuation of 1.23 ±0.05 dB at the
1310 nm wavelength, 1.82 ±0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 2.04 ±0.05 dB at the
1550 nm wavelength and 1.54 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength.
Also shown in TP-910 Figure 4-81, the change in attenuation of samples i.l.06 at the
1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm wavelengths did not conform to, while samples i.l.04 at the 1625 nm
wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of
GR-910 CR4-21 [58] which states that for all digital applications the maximum or
minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or
mechanical tests shall be ≤ 0.5 dB or ≤ 0.15A, whichever is less. Sample i.l.06
showed a change in attenuation of 0.64 ±0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and
0.84 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.10 showed a change in
attenuation of 1.23 ±0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength, 1.82 ±0.05 dB at the
1490 nm wavelength, 2.04 ±0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 1.54 ±0.05 dB at
the 1625 nm wavelength.
In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-81, the change in attenuation of samples
i.l.04 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths, i.l.06 at the
1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm,
1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths did not conform to the more stringent criteria of
GR-910 CR4-22 [59] which states that for all AM video applications the maximum
or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental
or mechanical tests shall be ≤ 0.5 dB or ≤ 0.10A, whichever is less. Sample i.l.04
showed a change in attenuation of 0.40 ±0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength,
0.38 ±0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 0.38 ±0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength
and 0.49 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.06 showed a change in
attenuation of 0.43 ±0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 0.64 ±0.05 dB at the
1550 nm wavelength and 0.84 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.10
showed a change in attenuation of 1.23 ±0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength,
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–99
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
1.82 ±0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 2.04 ±0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength
and 1.54 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength.
Shown in TP-910 Figure 4-82, the insertion loss of sample i.l.06 at the 1550 nm and
1625 nm wavelengths did not conform to, while i.l.04 at the 1625 nm wavelength,
i.l.05 at the 1490 nm wavelength and i.l.06 at the 1310 nm and 1490 nm wavelengths
showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of
GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM
video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed ±0.10V. Sample i.l.06
showed a change in attenuation of 3.39 ±0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and
3.36 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength.
In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-83, sample i.l.06 at the 1625 nm wavelength
showed borderline performance to GR-910 CR4-31 [68] which states that the
maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems shall be
≤ –55 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating
temperature range of –40°C to +75°C.
Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-83, conformance to
GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators
intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be ≤ –65 dB over the entire bandpass of
GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of –40°C to +75°C was not
met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the
significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on
demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the
optical criteria described in Section 4.2.
Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CR4-21 [58], GR-910 CR4-22 [59] and
GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing.
Sample Size
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
The following charts represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total
of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-81 presents
change-in-attenuation measurements after the Side Pull Load test for all of the
eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-82
presents insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB)
after the Side Pull Load test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm,
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–100
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
1550 nm and 1625 nm.TP-910 Figure 4-83 presents the reflectance measurements
after the Side Pull Load test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm,
1550 nm and 1625 nm.
TP-910 Figure 4-81 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after Side Pull test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Side Pull Test, After
i.l.11i.l.10i.l.09i.l.08i.l.07i.l.06i.l.05i.l.04i.l.03i.l.02i.l.01
-2.50
-2.00
-1.50
-1.00
-0.50
0.00
0.50
1.00
1.50
2.00
2.50
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample #
Change in Atteunation (dB)
1310 nm
1490 nm
1550 nm
1625 nm
AM Video
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–101
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-82 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm a nd 1625 nm
after Side Pull test
TP-910 Figure 4-83 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
after Side Pull test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Side Pull Test, After
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample #
Insertion Loss (dB)
1310 nm
1490 nm
1550 nm
1625 nm
AM Video
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, After Side Pull, Reflectance
-70.0
-65.0
-60.0
-55.0
-50.0
-45.0
-40.0
-35.0
-30.0
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample
Reflectance (dB)
1310 nm 1490 nm
1550 nm 1625 nm
Req (D) Req (A)
CR (A)
`
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–102
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.10 Cable Retention
Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the tensile load specified in GR-
910 Table 4-2, per FOTP-6. The Cable Retention test applies to all attenuators.
4.1.10.1 Criteria - Cable Retention (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R4-12 [49] Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in
Section 4.2.
The requirements and objectives apply after, but not during, the test.
4.1.10.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Verify that the lab ambient conditions are in the range of 23 ±5°C, and 30 to 70%
relative humidity
2. Prepare/warm up and stabilize test equipment per manufacturers instructions,
up to 1 hour
3. Verify that the test equipment to be used meets calibration requirements
4. Review manufacturer instructions/procedures for product under test, to assure
product usage/configuration is appropriate
5. Perform initial optical power reading and record data
6. Mount the test sample in the test facility as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-85
7. Apply 2.3 kgf (5.0 lbf) at 90° for at least 5 seconds.
8. Remove the load, and after at least 20 seconds, measure loss and reflectance
9. Apply 3.4 kgf (7.5 lbf) at 90° for 5 seconds
10. Remove the load, and after at least 20 seconds measure loss and reflectance
11. Inspect product under test for any physical damage and record observations
12. Record conformance status. If non-conforming, notify supplier.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–103
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.10.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 4-84 Test Flowchart - Cable Retention Test (not from GR-910)
Clean connection points
and perform initial optical
measurements
Execute tensile test pulls
of 5 lbf and 7.5 lbf
Verify test equipment
calibration
Verify lab ambient
conditions of 23 ±5°C
and 30 to 70% RH
Verify product under test
is configured per
supplier’s instructions
Inspect physical
condition of product
under test
Perform final optical
measurements and
inspect for any physical
damage
Prepare tensile load test
apparatus in accordance
with the specified
parameters
Were the
components
undamaged and the
optical measurements
within specs?
Yes
No Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Have all
fibers that are connected
to ports been
tested?
No
Yes
Mount the product under
test in the tensile load test
apparatus such that an
untested fiber will be
stressed
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Prepare/warm-up test
equipment per
manufacturers’
instructions
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–104
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.10.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the required tensile load in
GR-910 Table 4-2. The load is to be applied to the secured cable at a minimum
distance of 10 cm (4 inches) from the end of the fiber. Apply the load at a rate of
400 micrometers (0.016 in.) per second until attaining the maximum load, which is
to be maintained for 1 minute. The maximum change in attenuation and reflectance
is the difference in measurements taken before and after the test and is to be
compared against the requirements and objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and
Section 4.2.5.
The Cable Retention test is based on the Transmission with Applied Tensile Load
Test in Section 4.4.3.4 of GR-326-CORE.
Mount the test sample in the test facility shown in TP-910 Figure 4-85.
The test is conducted as follows:
A. Measure both loss and reflectance
B. Apply the load specified in GR-910 Table 4-2 at a rate of 400 micrometers
(0.016 in) per second
C. Remove the load after 1 minute
D. Measure both loss and reflectance
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–105
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-85 Mechanica l Test Facility for Flex, T wist, Side Pull and Cable
Retention Tests
WEIGHTS
GUIDES
CAPSTAN
7.5 Cm DIA.
ATTENUATOR
TEST ARM
22-28 Cm
CABLE
OR
FIBER
90
+90
_
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–106
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Optical Measurements
For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined
by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical
transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test.
The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring
reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical
inspection should follow FOTP-13.
The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during
testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility
shown in TP-910 Figure 4-86, or another comparable system.
In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make
measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm,
accurate to ±0.05 dB for transmittance and ±1 dB for reflectance down to –60 dB.
While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of
meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in
which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads
should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in
additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss.
The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of
four laser sources emitting near λ1 = 1310 nm, λ2 = 1490 nm, λ3 = 1550 nm or
λ4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source
switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to
launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any
DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The
Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for
detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct
for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value
TP-910 Figure 4-86 Transmission Measurement Facility
Source
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–107
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
is −60 ±1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance
from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the
power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through
the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the
reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports
are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers
are computer controlled via GPIB interface.
Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the
DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for
their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements,
all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and
switches, should have a reflectance of ≤ −65 dB. The Coupler should have a
directivity of ≥ 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode
transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter,
provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there
are at least two 360° loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for
additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the
Transmission Measurement Facility.
4.1.10.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Multimeter
Frame
HP 8153A - n.a.
Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months -
Laser Source (dual
wl)
HP 81554SM 12 months -
90/10% Coupler - -
Reflectance
Standard
- -
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a.
Jumper Test
Apparatus
In-house 12 months -
Optical Tunable
Light Source
Agilent 8164A 12 months -
Sensor for tunable
multimeter
Agilent 81640A 12 months -
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–108
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.10.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Ten of the eleven samples conformed to the criteria in Section 4.1.10.1 of this
document for the cable retention test. Refer to the Executive Summary for details
on this criteria.
As shown in TP-910 Figure 4-87, the change in attenuation for sample i.l.09 at the
1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths did not conform to the less
stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-21 [58] which states that for all digital
applications, the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or
after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be ≤ 0.5 dB, and the less
stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-22 [59] which states that for all AM video
applications, the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or
after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be ≤ 0.5 dB. Sample i.l.09
showed a change in attenuation of 1.73 ±0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength,
2.17 ±0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 2.19 ±0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength
and 2.19 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength.
Also shown in TP-910 Figure 4-87, the change in attenuation of samples i.l.02 at the
1550 nm wavelength, i.l.06 at the 1490 nm wavelength and i.l.09 at the 1310 nm,
1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths did not conform to the more stringent
criteria of GR-910 CR4-21 [58] which states that for all digital applications the
maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all
environmental or mechanical tests shall be ≤ 0.5 dB or ≤ 0.15A, whichever is less.
Sample i.l.02 showed a change in attenuation of 0.52 ±0.05 dB at the 1550 nm
wavelength. Sample i.l.06 showed a change in attenuation of 0.52 ±0.05 dB at the
1490 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.09 showed a change in attenuation of 1.73 ±0.05 dB
at the 1310 nm wavelength, 2.17 ±0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 2.19 ±0.05 dB
at the 1550 nm wavelength and 2.13 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength.
In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-87, the change in attenuation of samples
i.l.02 at the 1310 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths, i.l.06 at the 1490 nm and
1625 nm wavelengths and i.l.09 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
wavelengths did not conform to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-22 [59]
which states that for all AM video applications the maximum or minimum change
in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests
shall be ≤ 0.5 dB or ≤ 0.10A, whichever is less. Sample i.l.02 showed a change in
attenuation of 0.36 ±0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength, 0.52 ±0.05 dB at the
1550 nm wavelength, and 0.39 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.06
showed a change in attenuation of 0.52 ±0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength and
0.37 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.09 showed a change in
attenuation of 1.73 ±0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength, 2.17 ±0.05 dB at the
1490 nm wavelength, 2.19 ±0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 2.13 ±0.05 dB at
the 1625 nm wavelength.
Shown in TP-910 Figure 4-88, the insertion loss of sample i.l.06 at the 1625 nm
wavelength did not conform to, while i.l.03 at the 1550 nm wavelength, i.l.04 at the
1310 nm wavelength, i.l.06 at the 1490 nm and 1550 nm wavelengths and i.l.08 at the
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–109
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
1310 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria
of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM
video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed ±0.10V. Sample i.l.06
showed a change in attenuation of 3.38 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength.
In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-89, sample i.l.06 at the 1625 nm wavelength
showed borderline performance to GR-910 CR4-31 [68] which states that the
maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems shall be
≤ –55 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating
temperature range of –40°C to +75°C.
Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-89, conformance to
GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators
intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be ≤ –65 dB over the entire bandpass of
GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of –40°C to +75°C was not
met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the
significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on
demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the
optical criteria described in Section 4.2.
Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CR4-21 [58], GR-910 CR4-22 [59] and
GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing.
Sample Size
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
The following charts represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total
of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-87 presents
change-in-attenuation measurements after the Cable Retention test for all of the
eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-88
presents insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB)
after the Cable Retention test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm,
1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-89 presents the reflectance measurements
after the Cable Retention test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm,
1550 nm and 1625 nm.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–110
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-87 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after Cable Retention test
TP-910 Figure 4-88 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm a nd 1625 nm
after Cable Retention test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Cable Retention Test
i.l.11i.l.10i.l.09i.l.08i.l.07i.l.06i.l.05i.l.04i.l.03i.l.02i.l.01
-2.50
-2.00
-1.50
-1.00
-0.50
0.00
0.50
1.00
1.50
2.00
2.50
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample #
Change in Attenuation (dB)
1310 nm
1490 nm
1550 nm
1625 nm
AM Video
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Cable Retention Test
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample #
Insertion Loss (dB)
1310 nm
1490 nm
1550 nm
1625 nm
AM Video
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–111
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.11 Durability
Attenuators with connector receptacles, connector interfaces, or connectorized
pigtails are to be subjected to 200 connector mating cycles, as specified in
Section 4.4.3.86. of GR-326-CORE.
4.1.11.1 Criteria - Durability (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R4-13 [50] Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in
Section 4.2.
Variable attenuators are to have their attenuation setting changed from the
minimum dB setting to their maximum setting and back for a minimum of 200
excursions.
The requirements and objectives apply before, during and after the test.
TP-910 Figure 4-89 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
after Cable Retention test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Cable Retention, Reflectance
-70.0
-65.0
-60.0
-55.0
-50.0
-45.0
-40.0
-35.0
-30.0
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample
Reflectance (dB)
1310 nm 1490 nm
1550 nm 1625 nm
Req (D) Req (A)
CR (A)
`
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–112
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
GR-910 CR4-14 [51] The value of attenuation, as the attenuator setting is varied in either
direction (including backlash) over the entire attenuation range, shall be within the
attenuation tolerance, with no physical damage.
GR-910 CR4-15 [52] Adjusting the setting past its endpoint by any amount shall not result
in damage to the attenuator. Alternatively, there shall be a “stop” preventing
adjustment past the endpoint.
4.1.11.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
NOTE: This test is applicable only for attenuator products with connector
receptacles, connector interfaces, or connectorized pigtails.
Test procedure reference: FOTP-21. An initial cleaning is performed and baseline
optical measurements taken. Re-cleaning is permitted if necessary to bring a
connector into conformance. Each of the connector assemblies is reconnected a
total of 200 insertions during the course of this test. The operator must stand on the
floor for all cleaning and reconnections. The following sequence is used in making
successive insertions:
A. Disconnect and reconnect 1 connector assembly at the 6 ft. height
B. Disconnect and reconnect 1 connector assembly at the 4.5 ft. height
C. Disconnect and reconnect 1 connector assembly at the 3 ft. height
D. Disconnect and reconnect 1 connector assembly at the 3 ft. height
E. Disconnect and reconnect 1 connector assembly at the 4.5 ft. height
F. Disconnect and reconnect 1 connector assembly at the 6 ft. height
G. Repeat Steps A through F until all 15 connector assemblies have been
disconnected and reconnected
H. This sequence counts as a single insertion
The following scheme is used during the course of the 200 insertions.
A. Measurements are taken at insertions 24, 49, 74, 99, 124, 149, 174, and 199,
without cleaning
B. Readings are taken at insertions 25, 75, 125 and 175 after one-sided cleaning. No
re-cleaning is performed at this point.
NOTE: The cleaning method used is Cleaning Method A (GR-326,
Section 4.3.1) or Cleaning Method B (GR-326, Section 4.3.2), at the
supplier’s option. Also, cleaning may be omitted at the request of the
supplier, if the product purports to be one which does not require
cleaning.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–113
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
C. Readings are taken at insertions 50, 100, 150 and 200 after two-sided cleaning.
No re-cleaning is performed at this point (except for insertion 200, if required).
The Note above applies to this step also.
D. If at the end of 200 insertions some connectors do not meet the optical criteria,
and after cleaning they still do not meet optical criteria, then up to two
re-cleanings are performed
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–114
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.11.3 Test Flowchart (Not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 4-90 Test Flowchart - Durability Test (not from GR-910)
Document results and
go to next criteria
section
Test Product is
selected
Perform insertions and
measure attenuation
value and reflectance per the
test method
Document
nonconformance and
address corrective
actions with supplier
No
Yes
Note
nonconformance
No
Does
the product meet
GR-910 R4-13 [50]?
Yes
Does
the product meet
GR-910 CR4-14 [51] and
GR-910 CR4-15 [52]?
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–115
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.11.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
This test shall apply to connector receptacles, optical pad type attenuators, and
patchcord type attenuators with connectorized pigtails. Attenuator test samples are
to be subjected to the durability test procedure per Section 4.4.3.7 of GR-326-CORE.
Both connector interfaces of a connector receptacle or optical pad type attenuator
are reconnected for 200 cycles. The attenuator shall be cleaned according to the
supplier’s instructions. Connectors are to be cleaned in accordance with the
procedure in Section 4.4.3.7 of GR-326-CORE.
Variable attenuators are to have their attenuation setting changed from the zero dB
setting to their maximum setting and back, for a minimum of 200 times.
For fixed attenuators the attenuation value and reflectance are to be measured for
each reconnection. The criteria in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5 are applied only to
measurements made immediately after the cleaning operation. The results of all
measurements will be reported.
For variable attenuators the attenuation value and reflectance are measured and
reported after each excursion at their minimum and maximum attenuation setting.
The criteria in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5 apply to each measurement.
Optical Measurements
For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined
by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical
transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test.
The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring
reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical
inspection should follow FOTP-13.
The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during
testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility
shown in TP-910 Figure 4-91, or another comparable system.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–116
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make
measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm,
accurate to ±0.05 dB for transmittance and ±1 dB for reflectance down to –60 dB.
While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of
meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in
which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads
should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in
additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss.
The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of
four laser sources emitting near λ1 = 1310 nm, λ2 = 1490 nm, λ3 = 1550 nm or
λ4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source
switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to
launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any
DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The
Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for
detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct
for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value
is −60 ±1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance
from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the
power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through
the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the
reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports
are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers
are computer controlled via GPIB interface.
Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the
DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for
their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements,
all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and
TP-910 Figure 4-91 Transmission Measurement Facility
Source
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–117
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
switches, should have a reflectance of ≤ −65 dB. The Coupler should have a
directivity of ≥ 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode
transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter,
provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there
are at least two 360° loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for
additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the
Transmission Measurement Facility.
4.1.11.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
4.1.11.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in
Section 4.1.11.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on
this criteria.
However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-92, the change in attenuation of samples
i.l.06 at the 1310 nm wavelength and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm wavelength showed
borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-22 [59]
which states that for all AM video applications the maximum or minimum change
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Multimeter
Frame
HP 8153A - n.a.
Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months -
Laser Source (dual
wl)
HP 81554SM 12 months -
90/10% Coupler - -
Reflectance
Standard
- -
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a.
Connector Panel ADC NA 12 months -
Optical Tunable
Light Source
Agilent 8164A 12 months -
Sensor for tunable
multimeter
Agilent 81640A 12 months -
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–118
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests
shall be ≤ 0.5 dB or ≤ 0.10A, whichever is less.
As shown in TP-910 Figure 4-93, the insertion loss of samples i.l.03 at the 1550 nm
wavelength, i.l.04 at the 1625 nm wavelength, i.l.08 at the 1310 nm, i.l.09 at the
1490 nm and 1550 nm wavelengths, i.l.10 at the 1310 nm wavelength and i.l.11 at the
1310 nm wavelength did not conform to, while samples i.l.01 at the 1310 nm
wavelength, i.l.02 at the 1550 nm wavelength, i.l.04 at the 1310 nm wavelength, i.l.06
at the 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths and i.l.11 at the 1550 nm wavelength
showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of
GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM
video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed ±0.10V. Sample i.l.03
showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.36 ±0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength.
Sample i.l.04 showed a minimum insertion loss of 2.61 ±0.05 dB at the 1625 nm
wavelength. Sample i.l.08 showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.42 ±0.05 dB at the
1310 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.09 showed a maximum insertion loss of
3.36 ±0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength and 3.38 ±0.05 dB at the 1550 nm
wavelength. Sample i.l.10 showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.38 ±0.05 dB at the
1310 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.11 showed a maximum insertion loss of
3.37 ±0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength.
In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-94, conformance to
GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators
intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be ≤ –65 dB over the entire bandpass of
GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of –40°C to +75°C was not
met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the
significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on
demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the
optical criteria described in Section 4.2.
Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing.
Sample Size
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
The following charts represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total
of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-92 presents
change-in-attenuation measurements after the Durability test for all of the eleven
test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-93
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–119
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
presents insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB)
after the Durability test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm,
1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-94 presents the reflectance measurements
after the Durability test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm,
1550 nm and 1625 nm.
TP-910 Figure 4-92 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after Durability test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, After Durability Test
i.l.11i.l.10i.l.09i.l.08i.l.07i.l.06i.l.05i.l.04i.l.03i.l.02i.l.01
-0.75
-0.55
-0.35
-0.15
0.05
0.25
0.45
0.65
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample #
Change in Attenuation (dB)
1310 nm
1490 nm
1550 nm
1625 nm
AM Video
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–120
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-93 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm a nd 1625 nm
after Durability test
TP-910 Figure 4-94 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
after Durability test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, After Durability Test
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample #
Insertion Loss (dB)
1310 nm
1490 nm
1550 nm
1625 nm
AM Vi deo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Durability, Reflectance
-70.0
-65.0
-60.0
-55.0
-50.0
-45.0
-40.0
-35.0
-30.0
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample
Reflectance (dB)
1310 nm 1490 nm
1550 nm 1625 nm
Req (D) Req (A)
CR (A)
`
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–121
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.12 Impact Test
Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the Impact Test, Section 6.2.1,
GR-1221-CORE. Attenuators are to withstand 8 impact cycles, in each of 3 axes,
when dropped from a height of 1.8 meters (6 feet) onto a concrete floor. Samples
are mounted rigidly so that the shock is transmitted to the internal components and
not absorbed or cushioned by leads or connector interfaces. Test samples are to be
dropped in an unmated condition without dust caps.
The requirements and objectives apply after, but not during, the test.
4.1.12.1 Criteria - Impact (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R4-16 [53] Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in
Section 4.2.
The above test method is based on FOTP-2, which may be used as an alternative to
the method described in GR-1221-CORE. This test may also be performed using an
impact test machine with the force of impact set to 1000 G’s (8 impacts in each of
3 axes), per MIL 202F, Method 213B- 1/2 sine Shock. Duration is 0.5 ms by
definition.
4.1.12.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Verify that the lab ambient conditions are in the range of 23 ±5°C, and 30 to 70%
relative humidity
2. Warm up/prepare and stabilize test equipment per manufacturers instructions,
up to 1 hour
3. Verify that the test equipment to be used meets calibration requirements
4. Review manufacturer instructions/procedures for product under test, to assure
product usage/configuration is appropriate
5. Inspect physical condition of product under test
6. Clean connection points and perform initial optical measurements
7. Prepare test setup as defined in EIA/TIA-455-2A for light service applications
with drop height of six feet
8. Verify that the product under test is rigidly mounted for the X-axis orientation
9. Execute five (5) sets of eight (8) drops for the X-axis orientation
10. Perform final optical power readings and record data
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–122
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
11. Repeat five sets of eight drops each in Y-axis, and then the Z-axis
12. Perform final optical measurements after completion of each axis tests
13. Inspect product under test for any physical damage and record observations
14. Record conformance status. If non-conforming, notify supplier.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–123
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.12.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 4-95 Test Flowchart - Impact Test (not from GR-910)
Verify lab ambients of
23C +/-5 and 30-
70%RH
Prepare/Warm-up test
equipment per
manufacturers
instructions
Verify test equipment
calibration
Verify product under
test configured per
manufacturer
instructions
Verify that samples are
rigidly mounted for X-
axis impacts
Prepare test setup per
EIA/TIA-455-2A using
a drop height of six feet
No Mechanical
Damage and optical
readings in spec?
Record
findings and
follow non-
conforming
process
Record
findings and
complete
report section
Test Complete
Yes
No
Execute test - 8 drops
for the X-axis per
cycle, 5 cycles total
Inspect product under
test physical condition
Clean connection
points and perform
initial optical
measurements
Perform final optical
measurements and
inspect for any physical
damage
Repeat tests for Y-Axis
and Z-Axis
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–124
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.12.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
This test is to be performed according to GR-1221-CORE, Section 6.2.1, Impact Test,
which is based on FOTP-2 for “Light Service Application.” Attenuators are to
withstand 8 impact cycles, from each of three mutually perpendicular axes, when
dropped from a height of 1.8 meters (6 feet) onto a concrete floor.
The attenuators shall be dropped in an unmated condition without protective caps.
Samples are mounted rigidly so that the shock is transmitted to the internal
components and not absorbed or cushioned by the leads. A suggested method for
performing this test is to place the test sample inside a container filled with a rigid
packing material (such as sand or small glass beads) so that the sample does not
shift or bounce around when the container is dropped. In this way, the impact shock
is not absorbed by an elastic packing material, but is fully transmitted to the internal
components. Samples with leads may be protected from breakage if they are coiled
and tied. The connector plug/ferrule may be protected with a cap that does not
impede the impact force.
This test may also be performed using an impact test machine with the force of
impact set to 1000 G's.
After testing, each attenuator is to be carefully examined for evidence of physical
damage as described in Section 4.2.8. The maximum change in attenuation and
reflectance is the difference in measurements taken before and after the test and is
to be compared against the requirements and objectives specified in Section 4.2.2
and Section 4.2.5.
4.1.12.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Multimeter
Frame
HP 8153A - n.a.
Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months -
Laser Source (dual
wl)
HP 81554SM 12 months -
90/10% Coupler - -
Reflectance
Standard
- -
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SC95B5-
00NC
n.a.
Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–125
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.1.12.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in
Section 4.1.12.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on
this criteria.
However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-96, the change in attenuation of samples
i.l.05 at the 1310 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more
stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-22 [59] which states that for all AM video
applications the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or
after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be ≤ 0.5 dB or ≤ 0.10A,
whichever is less.
As shown in TP-910 Figure 4-97, the insertion loss of sample i.l.05 at the 1310 nm
wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of
GR-910 CR4-23 [60] which states that for attenuators intended for use in digital
applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed ±0.15V.
Also shown in TP-910 Figure 4-97, the insertion loss of samples i.l.01 at the 1550 nm
wavelength, i.l.03 at the 1550 nm wavelength, i.l.04 at the 1310 nm wavelength, i.l.05
at the 1310 nm wavelength, i.l.06 at the 1310 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths and i.l.08
at the 1310 nm wavelength did not conform to, while samples i.l.02 at the 1550 nm
and 1625 nm wavelengths, i.l.04 at the 1490 nm wavelength, i.l.06 at the 1490 nm and
1550 nm wavelengths, i.l.09 at the 1550 nm wavelength and i.l.11 at the 1310 nm and
1550 nm wavelengths showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria
of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM
video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed ±0.10V. Sample i.l.01
showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.38 ±0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength.
Sample i.l.03 showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.38 ±0.05 dB at the 1550 nm
wavelength. Sample i.l.04 showed a minimum insertion loss of 2.64 ±0.05 dB at the
1310 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.05 showed a minimum insertion loss of
2.56 ±0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.06 showed a maximum
insertion loss of 3.41 ±0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength and 3.40 ±0.05 dB at the
1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.08 showed a maximum insertion loss of
3.37 ±0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength.
In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-98, conformance to GR-910 CO4-32 [69]
which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in
Impact Tester In-house NA 12 months -
Optical Tunable
Light Source
Agilent 8164A 12 months -
Sensor for tunable
multimeter
Agilent 81640A 12 months -
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–126
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
AM-VSB systems should be ≤ –65 dB over the entire bandpass of
GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of –40°C to +75°C was not
met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the
significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on
demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the
optical criteria described in Section 4.2.
Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing.
Sample Size
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
The following charts represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total
of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-96 presents
change-in-attenuation measurements after the Impact test for all of the eleven test
samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-97 presents
insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) after the
Impact test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-98 presents the reflectance measurements after the
Impact test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–127
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
TP-910 Figure 4-96 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm after Impact test
TP-910 Figure 4-97 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm a nd 1625 nm
after Impact test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, After Impact Test
i.l.11i.l.10i.l.09i.l.08i.l.07i.l.06i.l.05i.l.04i.l.03i.l.02i.l.01
-0.70
-0.50
-0.30
-0.10
0.10
0.30
0.50
0.70
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample #
Change in Attenuation (dB)
1310 nm
1490 nm
1550 nm
1625 nm
AM Vid eo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, After Impact Test
2.30
2.50
2.70
2.90
3.10
3.30
3.50
3.70
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample #
Insertion Loss (dB)
1310 nm
1490 nm
1550 nm
1625 nm
AM Vi deo
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–128
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2 Optical Criteria
The Optical Criteria addresses the required optical performance characteristics of
attenuators. The wavelength ranges over which the attenuator must operate
independently are addressed by the optical bandpass requirement. The attenuation
tolerance requirement addresses the accuracy of attenuators marked in units of
“dB”. The attenuation change requirement addresses the change in attenuation due
to environmental or mechanical stress. The attenuation increments and range
requirements specify the minimum incremental change of attenuation and the
minimum range of fixed and variable attenuators. The optical power reflected back
from an attenuator is addressed by the reflectance requirement. Finally, the
variation of attenuation with changing incident light polarization orientation is
addressed by the polarization-dependent loss criteria. All optical requirements shall
be applied for both directions of light propagation (only one direction for single-
mode to multimode attenuators that are non-reversible). The attenuation, A, is the
ratio of optical power input to the attenuator, Pi, to the optical power output from
the attenuator, Po, measured in units of dB.
The criteria is intended for attenuators used for digital transmission at bit-rates up
to 10 Gb/s and for analog AM/Digital video transmission. Some of these optical
criteria are separated into application specific conditional requirements (CRs) for
digital transmission at bit-rates up to 10 Gb/s, and application specific CRs for
TP-910 Figure 4-98 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
after Impact test
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Impact, Reflectance
-70.0
-65.0
-60.0
-55.0
-50.0
-45.0
-40.0
-35.0
-30.0
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample
Reflectance (dB)
1310 nm 1490 nm
1550 nm 1625 nm
Req (D) Req (A)
CR (A)
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–129
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
analog AM/Digital video transmission. It is the responsibility of the user to select
the appropriate CR to invoke, based on the type of service to be supported.
A = 10 log (Pi / Po)(4-3)
4.2.1 Optical Bandpass
The optical bandpass is the wavelength range over which the applicable set of
optical requirements are satisfied. An optical bandpass for an attenuator is bounded
by two wavelength end points at which its transmission spectrum intercepts the
required criteria.
4.2.1.1 Criteria - Optical Bandpass (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 CR4-17 [54] For 1310/1550nm attenuators to be used for all digital applications
except long-reach SONET, all optical requirements shall be met over the bandpass
for both the 1310nm and the 1550nm regions specified in GR-910 Table 4-3,
Column 2.
GR-910 CO4-18 [55] For 1310/1550nm attenuators to be used for all digital applications, all
optical objectives should be met over the bandpass for both the 1310 nm and the
1550nm regions specified in GR-910 Table 4-3, Column 3.
GR-910 CR4-19 [56] For 1310/1550nm attenuators to be used for long-reach SONET only,
all optical requirements shall be met over the bandpass specified in
GR-910 Table 4-3, Column 4.
GR-910 CR4-20 [57] For all attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB video transmission, all
optical requirements shall be met over the bandpass specified in GR-910 Table 4-3,
Column 5.
GR-910 Table 4-3 Optical Bandpass Criteria
Wavelength Digital Long Reach
SONET AM Video
1
Region
(nm)
2
(GR-910 CR4-
17 [54])
(nm)
3
(GR-910 CO4-
18 [55])
(nm)
4
(GR-910 CR4-19
[56])
(nm)
5
(GR-910 CR4-
20 [57])
(nm)
1310 1260 –>1360 1260 –>1360 1280 –>1335 1290 –>1330
1550 1480 –>1580 1430 –>1580 1525 –>1575 1530 –>1570
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–130
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
The bandpasses shown in Columns 2 and 3 apply to attenuators used in all
applications, including FITL and SONET short-reach (SR; having interconnect
distances of ~ 2 km or more), intermediate-reach (IR; ~ 15 km or more), and long-
reach (LR; ~ 40 km or more) systems. For attenuators, (GR-910 CR4-19 [56]) (in
Column 4) applies to SONET LR and interoffice systems. For these applications,
the source wavelength must be selected to match this narrower bandpass.
(GR-910 CR4-19 [56]) may not work for SONET SR and IR systems, nor for FITL
systems, since these systems may operate outside this narrow bandpass.
(GR-910 CR4-20 [57]) (in Column 5) applies to all attenuators intended for use in
AM-video applications. For video, the specific optical criteria in the 1310nm and
1550nm windows differ. Should more than one service need to be supported, then
several bandpass criteria may apply. The user should select the widest applicable
bandpass in either window.
Rationale: All attenuators must be of the wideband type, i.e., capable of
operation in both regions simultaneously, to accommodate future
upgrades. The bandpasses are derived from the attenuation characteristics
of single-mode fiber and the variations in transmitter central wavelength.
The bandpass values in GR-910 Table 4-3 are intended to make attenuators
reasonably transparent in the telecommunications network. The bandpass
requirement is consistent with optical interface requirements for FITL
(TA-NWT-000909) and SONET (GR-253-CORE). The video bandpass
criteria is derived from the standard emission wavelength range of video
laser transmitters and receivers.
4.2.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Is the attenuator intended for use in multiple application environments? If so,
determine from the product documentation the wavelength bands over which it
is specified to operate. If not, go to the next test area.
2. Does the attenuator have connectorized pigtails for all fiber terminations? If it
does not, fusion splice connectorized fiber pigtails to all DUT fiber leads. When
possible, use fiber fanouts.
3. Clean all optical connectors prior to use following cleaning procedure A or B
described in GR-326-CORE, Section 4.3.
The following cleaning procedure (Procedure A) shall be followed, unless
the manufacturer of the DUT provides an alternative procedure
(Procedure B).
a. If both plugs have been removed from the adapter, blow compressed gas
through the adapter. If both plugs are not to be removed, blow
compressed gas into the open end of the adapter.
b. Wipe completely around the ferrule of the plug twice with a lint-free
wiping material that has been moistened with alcohol. Then wipe
across the end of the ferrule.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–131
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
c. Repeat Step (b) with a dry wipe
d. Blow compressed gas across the end of the ferrule. This is the final step
before inserting the plug. Do not wipe the ferrule or allow it to touch
anything after completion of this step and before the ferrule is inserted
into the sleeve.
e. Insert the plug in the adapter
f. If both plugs have been removed, repeat Steps (b) through (e) with the
second plug
4. Determine the output power spectrum launched by the light source being used
with the equipment shown in TP-910 Figure 4-100 in Section 4.2.1.4 to perform
baseline reference measurements: received power versus wavelength. Sweep
the light source or spectrum analyzer through the full range of operational
wavelengths that comprise the DUT’s specified bandwidth.
5. Record (e.g., on hard disk) the baseline measurements with their respective
wavelengths, λi, as the reference power, Reference Poweri, for each output
fiber
6. Insert the DUT into the test setup as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-101 in
Section 4.2.1.4. The same test setup format should be used as for the reference
measurements
7. Record the transmitted power, DUT Poweri, versus wavelength, λi, for each
output fiber. Sweep the light source or spectrum analyzer through the full range
of operational wavelengths that comprise the DUT’s specified bandwidth.
8. For each output fiber, compute the insertion loss of the device versus
wavelength by subtracting the reference power level for each wavelength from
the power level with the DUT in place for the same wavelength
ILi = Reference Poweri – DUT Poweri
9. Plot the IL versus wavelength curve for each output fiber of the DUT
10. Determine the maximum allowable bandpass IL, n dB, for the DUT from
GR-910 Table 4-3
11. Compute the bandpass, Bn, for each fiber of the device using the IL versus
wavelength curve and the bandpass IL, n dB
12. Does the bandpass of each output fiber meet the requirements of GR-910?
13. Yes – record the results and go on to the next test
14. No – investigate the nature of the failure using the Telcordia Nonconforming
Product Process
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–132
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
Setup Equipment as is shown in TP-1209,
Figure 4-2.
Insert device under test (DUT) into
test setup, see TP-1209, Figure 4-3.
Plot IL
i
versus
i
.
Compute insertion loss (IL) through DUT :
IL
i
= Ref Pwr
i
- DUT Pwr
i
Does DUT have
connectorized fiber ends
?
Prepare fiber ends with
connectors
Yes
No
Perform baseline power
measurements:
Ref Pwr
i
versus
i
, save.
Perform DUT power
measurements:
DUT Pwr
i
versus
i
, save.
Clean all optical connectors, see
GR-326-CORE, Section 4.3,
Method A or B.
Continue
Wipe each plug twice with lint-free cloth
moistened with alcohol. Wipe across end
of ferrule.
Blow compressed air through the
connector adapter.
Wipe each plug twice with lint-free cloth.
Wipe across end of ferrule.
Blow compressed air through the
connector adapter.
Insert mating connector plugs in adapter.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–133
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
The optical bandpass definition and criteria are given in Section 4.2.1 and can be
calculated by using the procedures given below. The attenuator is to be tested in
both directions of light propagation, at room temperature, and at the minimum and
maximum operating temperatures. The suggested measurement method is outlined
below.
1. Measure optical transmission spectrum
A. Light Source: Use a single-mode fiber-coupled, high-powered optical source
having central wavelengths covering the required bandpass. Couple the
optical source to the attenuator under test with a wavelength-independent
coupler or jumper. Alternatively, use a fiber-coupled white light source.
Refer to FOTP-20 for stripping higher-order mode and cladding light.
B. Reference Power Spectrum: Connect the source to an optical spectrum
analyzer as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-100. Measure and store this signal as
the reference spectrum. Best results are typically obtained using 1 nm
resolution, 10 nm/division span, and start and stop wavelengths just
TP-910 Figure 4-99 Test Flowchart - General Optical Bandpass Test (not from
GR-910)
continue
Determine the bandpass IL, n dB,
for the DUT using GR-1209,
Table 4-1.
Determine the bandpass, B
n
dB,
for the DUT using GR-1209
Figure 4-1.
Bandpass meets GR-
1209, CR4-2 [35] ?
Document results, go
on to next test.
Investigate nature of failure using
Telcordia Non-Conforming
Product Process.
No
Yes
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–134
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
enclosing the required bandpass. The resolution of the optical spectrum
analyzer should be better than the linewidth of the test source.
C. Attenuator Power Spectrum: If the attenuator under test is connectorized,
connect it to the test configuration replacing the jumper; otherwise, cut the
jumper in half, and fusion splice in the attenuator. Connect the attenuator
under test between the source and the optical spectrum analyzer as shown
in TP-910 Figure 4-101.
TP-910 Figure 4-100 Reference Test Configurations for Genera l Optical
Bandpass (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 4-101 Through-DUT Test Configurations for General Optical
Bandpass (not from GR-910)
Optical
spectrum
analyzer
or
Optical
power
meter
Tunable
laser
Broadband
stabilized
light source
or
Optical
power
meter
Tunable
laser
Broadband
stabilized
light source
D
U
T
Optical
spectrum
analyzer
D
U
T
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–135
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
(The remaining steps are most easily completed by using the marker features on
most optical spectrum analyzers.)
2. Find the wavelength intercepts;
Find the two wavelength intercepts for each required bandpass region. Set the
level marker at the value designated on the attenuator. The other optical
requirements must also be met across the bandpass defined by these
wavelengths. See TP-910 Figure 4-102 for an example of an attenuator optical
spectrum.
3. Compare bandpass against criteria.
The pairs of wavelengths found in Step 2 represent the measured optical
bandpass of the attenuator under test. Compare the bandpass against the
bandpass requirements and objectives in Section 4.2.1. TP-910 Figure 4-102
shows an ideal spectra for a 3 dB attenuator.
4. The solid and dashed boxes represent the bandpass and attenuation tolerance
requirement and objective
TP-910 Figure 4-102 3 dB Attenuator Optical Bandpass Spectra
4.00
4.20
4.40
4.60
4.80
5.00
5.20
5.40
5.60
5.80
6.00
1200
1220
1240
1260
1280
1300
1320
1340
1360
1380
1400
1420
1440
1460
1480
1500
1520
1540
1560
1580
1600
Wavel engt h (nm )
Insertion Loss (dB)
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–136
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
4.2.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
All of the eleven test samples conformed to the criteria in Section 4.2.1.1 of this
document. Conformance is based on demonstration of meeting all of the optical
requirements over the bandpass specified in GR-910 Table 4-3. No nonconforming
deviations were noted in testing.
Sample Size
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
The following graph represents the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total
of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-103 presents
the spectral attenuation measurements (including connection losses of about
0.5 dB) taken as a baseline for the Optical Bandpass requirements for all of the
eleven test samples from 1250 nm through 1650 nm.
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months –
Sensor for Tunable Multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months –
Broadband Stabilized Light
Source
Anritsu MG 922 A 12 months –
Optical Spectrum Analyzer Anritsu MS 9710 B 12 months –
Fiber cleaning supplies:
alcohol, compressed air, lint-
free wipes, and lint-free tipped
probes
- - - -
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–137
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.2 Change in Attenuation
This requirement addresses the change in attenuation (insertion loss) before,
during and after environmental and mechanical stress. This requirement applies to
the environmental and mechanical criteria in Section 4.1.
4.2.2.1 Criteria - Change in Attenuation (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 CR4-21 [58] For all digital applications the maximum or minimum change in
attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests
shall be ≤ 0.5 dB or ≤ 0.15A, whichever is less.
GR-910 CR4-22 [59] For all AM video applications the maximum or minimum change in
attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests
shall be ≤ 0.5 dB or ≤ 0.10A, whichever is less.
Rationale: If attenuators are used in AM video systems or Digital systems they
must be accurate so as not to exceed the system’s power budget. It is not practical
TP-910 Figure 4-103 Spectral Attenuation Measurements from 1250 nm to
1650 nm
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Spectral Attenuation
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0
3.2
3.4
3.6
3.8
4.0
1250 1300 1350 1400 1450 1500 1550 1600
Wavelength (nm)
Insertion Loss (dB)
i.l.01
i.l.02
i.l.03
i.l.04
i.l.05
i.l.06
i.l.07
i.l.08
i.l.09
i.l.10
i.l.11
AM Video
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–138
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
to allow for a greater increase in attenuation, during the service life of the
attenuator, due to mechanical and environmental stress.
4.2.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
4.2.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
4.2.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
This section discusses a method of measuring the attenuation change of a
attenuator. It applies to all tests which specify an attenuation change requirement.
Variable attenuators are to be assigned settings in increments of not less than
3 or 5 dB, depending on their application, ranging from their minimum to maximum
setting. Variable attenuators must not have their attenuation setting adjusted during
these tests, except at the end of each test, to check the adjustment mechanism for
damage, or when otherwise specified.
Light sources must be within the required optical bandpass from GR-910 Table 4-3,
and insertion loss from splices and connectors is excluded. Connector loss can be
excluded by cutting them off, or if a non-destructive test is desired, by substituting
the DUT with a jumper cable with equivalent connectors. In the latter case, the
connector repeatability determines the measurement uncertainty. FOTP-57 gives
the procedure for fiber end face preparation. FOTP-127 gives the procedure for
measuring the source central wavelength. FOTP-20 gives the procedure for
measuring optical transmittance. TP-910 Figure 4-104 diagrams the procedure for
measuring the change in attenuation, which consists of the following steps.
1. Fiber End Face Preparation
TP-910 Figure 4-104 Attenuation Loss Measurement
Source Power
Meter
Source Power
Meter
DUT
MF MF
2. Measure the Insertion Loss of the Attenuator
1. Measure the Reference Power
Fusion Splice Pi
Po
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–139
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
For attenuators with a bare fiber pigtail, the fiber end face should be clean and
cleaved well or polished well if it is to be directly attached to a detector using a
bare fiber adapter. Otherwise, the fiber may be connectorized or fusion spliced
to a connectorized optical pigtail to facilitate light monitoring.
All connectors, connector interfaces, and connector receptacles are to be
cleaned in accordance with Section 4.3 of GR-326-CORE. Make sure the
source power is off, for eye safety, and then inspect the connector end face
using a microscope.
Mate attenuators with an integral connector receptacle, or connector interfaces
to a connectorized fiber jumper and do not disturb the fibers launch condition.
2. Measure the Incident Optical Power, Pi
Use a stable optical power source having a central wavelength which is within
the wavelength range of the attenuator under test. Connect the source to an
optical power meter using a launch jumper with the same connectors as the
attenuator under test. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient
mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of
GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360° loops in the 2-meter length. The
optical power meter should now display the incident (input) optical power, Pi.
For power meters having a REFERENCE feature, press the REF key to enter Pi
as the reference. The connection to the source must not be disturbed, and the
coupling efficiency of the connection to the detector in Step 3 must be
equivalent to the coupling efficiency obtained in Step 2.
3. Determine the Attenuation
If the attenuator under test is connectorized, mate the connector to the detector
end of the launch jumper, otherwise, cut the launch jumper in half and fusion
splice (with ≤ 0.02 dB loss per splice) the attenuator to both halves. The optical
power meter should now display the output optical power, Po. Then the
attenuation is:
A = 10 log10 (Pi / Po )(4-4)
If the optical power meter reference feature has been used, the attenuation, A
should be displayed automatically.
4. Determine the Final Attenuation
Repeat Step 3 to determine the final attenuation. Measure the attenuation in
both directions of light propagation.
5. Compare Results Against Requirements
Compare the attenuation values against the requirement and objective from
Section 4.2.2.
The transmission measurement facility in TP-910 Figure 4-105 or loss spectra (from
TP-910 Figure 4-102) can also be used to determine insertion loss within a (typical)
measurement uncertainty of ±0.5 dB.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–140
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make
measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm,
accurate to ±0.05 dB for transmittance and ±1 dB for reflectance down to –60 dB.
While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of
meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in
which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads
should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in
additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss.
The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of
four laser sources emitting near λ1 = 1310 nm, λ2 = 1490 nm, λ3 = 1550 nm or
λ4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source
switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to
launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any
DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The
Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for
detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct
for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value
is −60 ±1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance
from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the
power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through
the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the
reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports
are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers
are computer controlled via GPIB interface.
Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the
DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for
their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements,
TP-910 Figure 4-105 Transmission Measurement Facility
Source
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–141
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and
switches, should have a reflectance of ≤ −65 dB. The Coupler should have a
directivity of ≥ 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode
transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter,
provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there
are at least two 360° loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for
additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the
Transmission Measurement Facility.
4.2.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
4.2.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance is based on demonstration of meeting the allocated change in
attenuation before, during and after environmental and mechanical stress as
applied to in Section 4.1. The status of each environmental and mechanical stress
influence as well as the performance of each individual sample is described in the
pertinent subsections of section of Section 4.1. Nonconformances to the less
stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-21 [58] and GR-910 CR4-22 [59] were observed
in Section 4.1.9, “Side Pull Load,” both during and after, and Section 4.1.10, “Cable
Retention.” Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this criteria.
Sample Size
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months –
Sensor for Tunable Multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months –
Broadband Stabilized Light
Source
Anritsu MG 922 A 12 months –
Optical Spectrum Analyzer Anritsu MS 9710 B 12 months –
Fiber cleaning supplies:
alcohol, compressed air, lint-
free wipes, and lint-free tipped
probes
- - - -
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–142
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
The following chart represents the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total
of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-106 presents
the insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB)
taken as a baseline for the Change in Attenuation requirements for all of the eleven
test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. Refer to the results
presented in Section 4.1 for the during and after test measurements of which these
values are compared to.
4.2.3 Attenuation Tolerance
Attenuation tolerance is the difference between the attenuation value V marked on
a fixed attenuator or set on a variable attenuator and the measured attenuation of
the attenuator. The following tolerance criteria will apply to all attenuators.
TP-910 Figure 4-106 Baseline Insertion Loss Measurements at 1310 nm,
1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Insertion Loss
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample
Insertion Loss (dB)
1310 nm 1490 nm
1550 nm 1625 nm
AM Video
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–143
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.3.1 Criteria - Attenuation Tolerance (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 CR4-23 [60] For attenuators intended for use in digital applications the
attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.15V.
GR-910 CR4-24 [61] For attenuators intended for use in AM video applications the
attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V.
Rationale: The attenuation tolerance requirement serves to limit the loss
uncertainty when changes in attenuation are made. For example, an attenuator with
a marked attenuation of “5 dB” must have an actual attenuation
between 4.25 and 5.75 dB. “0 dB attenuators” are considered to be connector
sleeves for which requirements are given in GR-326-CORE.
4.2.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
4.2.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
4.2.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Light sources must be within the required optical bandpass from GR-910 Table 4-3,
and insertion loss from splices and connectors is excluded. Connector loss can be
excluded by cutting them off, or if a non-destructive test is desired, by substituting
the DUT with a jumper cable with equivalent connectors. In the latter case, the
connector repeatability determines the measurement uncertainty. FOTP-57 gives
the procedure for fiber end face preparation. FOTP-127 gives the procedure for
measuring the source central wavelength. FOTP-20 gives the procedure for
measuring optical transmittance. TP-910 Figure 4-107 diagrams the procedure for
measuring the change in attenuation, which consists of the following steps.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–144
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
1. Fiber End Face Preparation
For attenuators with a bare fiber pigtail, the fiber end face should be clean and
cleaved well or polished well if it is to be directly attached to a detector using a
bare fiber adapter. Otherwise, the fiber may be connectorized or fusion spliced
to a connectorized optical pigtail to facilitate light monitoring.
All connectors, connector interfaces, and connector receptacles are to be
cleaned in accordance with Section 4.3 of GR-326-CORE. Make sure the
source power is off, for eye safety, and then inspect the connector end face
using a microscope.
Mate attenuators with an integral connector receptacle, or connector interfaces
to a connectorized fiber jumper and do not disturb the fibers launch condition.
2. Measure the Incident Optical Power, Pi
Use a stable optical power source having a central wavelength which is within
the wavelength range of the attenuator under test. Connect the source to an
optical power meter using a launch jumper with the same connectors as the
attenuator under test. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient
mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of
GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360° loops in the 2-meter length. The
optical power meter should now display the incident (input) optical power, Pi.
For power meters having a REFERENCE feature, press the REF key to enter Pi
as the reference. The connection to the source must not be disturbed, and the
coupling efficiency of the connection to the detector in Step 3 must be
equivalent to the coupling efficiency obtained in Step 2.
3. Determine the Attenuation
If the attenuator under test is connectorized, mate the connector to the detector
end of the launch jumper, otherwise, cut the launch jumper in half and fusion
splice (with ≤ 0.02 dB loss per splice) the attenuator to both halves. The optical
TP-910 Figure 4-107 Attenuation Loss Measurement
Source Power
Meter
Source Power
Meter
DUT
MF MF
2. Measure the Insertion Loss of the Attenuator
1. Measure the Reference Power
Fusion Splice Pi
Po
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–145
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
power meter should now display the output optical power, Po. Then the
attenuation is:
A = 10 log10 (Pi / Po )(4-5)
If the optical power meter reference feature has been used, the attenuation, A
should be displayed automatically.
4. Determine the Final Attenuation
Repeat Step 3 to determine the final attenuation. Measure the attenuation in
both directions of light propagation.
5. Compare Results Against Requirements
Compare the attenuation values against the requirement and objective from
Section 4.2.2.
The transmission measurement facility in TP-910 Figure 4-108 or loss spectra (from
TP-910 Figure 4-102) can also be used to determine insertion loss within a (typical)
measurement uncertainty of ±0.5 dB.
In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make
measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm,
accurate to ±0.05 dB for transmittance and ±1 dB for reflectance down to –60 dB.
While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of
meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in
which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads
should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in
additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss.
The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of
TP-910 Figure 4-108 Transmission Measurement Facility
Source
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–146
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
four laser sources emitting near λ1 = 1310 nm, λ2 = 1490 nm, λ3 = 1550 nm or
λ4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source
switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to
launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any
DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The
Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for
detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct
for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value
is −60 ±1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance
from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the
power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through
the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the
reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports
are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers
are computer controlled via GPIB interface.
Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the
DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for
their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements,
all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and
switches, should have a reflectance of ≤ −65 dB. The Coupler should have a
directivity of ≥ 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode
transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter,
provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there
are at least two 360° loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for
additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the
Transmission Measurement Facility.
4.2.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months –
Sensor for Tunable Multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months –
Broadband Stabilized Light
Source
Anritsu MG 922 A 12 months –
Optical Spectrum Analyzer Anritsu MS 9710 B 12 months –
Fiber cleaning supplies:
alcohol, compressed air, lint-
free wipes, and lint-free tipped
probes
- - - -
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–147
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
All of the eleven test samples conformed to the criteria in Section 4.2.3.1 of this
document. Conformance is based on demonstration of not exceeding the
attenuation tolerance of the marked attenuation value labeled on the sample under
test. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this criteria.
However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-109, the insertion loss of samples i.l.06 at the
1625 nm wavelength, i.l.07 at the 1625 nm wavelength and i.l.10 at the 1625 nm
wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of
GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM
video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed ±0.10V.
Sample Size
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
The following graph represents the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total
of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-109 presents
the attenuation measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) during
the Attenuation Tolerance test for all of the eleven test samples from 1250 nm
through 1650 nm. Tolerance values are indicated by the deviance from the nominal
3 dB value per wavelength.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–148
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.4 Attenuation Increments and Range
The attenuation increment is the minimum attenuation step size in dB. The
attenuation range is the minimum and maximum values of attenuation to which a
variable attenuator can be set. This criteria is intended to ensure that attenuators
are capable of the value and range necessary to cover the dynamic range of most
fiber optic transmission systems.
The minimum attenuation of an attenuator is its insertion loss. A low insertion loss
is necessary since attenuation may be required in a transmission system when the
system is put into operation, but changes over the life of the system may require that
the loss of the attenuator be reduced.
4.2.4.1 Criteria - Attenuation Increments and Range (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R4-25 [62] The attenuation range for attenuators shall be at least ≤ 5 to 20 dB.
TP-910 Figure 4-109 Baseline Insertion Loss Measurements at 1310 nm,
1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Insertion Loss
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample
Insertion Loss (dB)
1310 nm 1490 nm
1550 nm 1625 nm
AM Video
Digital
+/- 0.5 dB
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–149
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
GR-910 CR4-26 [63] For digital applications the attenuation increments for fixed and
discretely variable attenuators shall be ≤ 5 dB. This means that fixed and variable
attenuators can change in increments of no greater than 5 dB.
GR-910 CR4-27 [64] For AM video applications the attenuation increments for fixed and
discretely variable attenuators shall be ≤ 3 dB.
GR-910 CO4-28 [65] For AM video applications the attenuation increments for fixed and
discretely variable attenuators shall be ≤ 1 dB.
GR-910 O4-29 [66] The attenuation range for attenuators should be at least ≤ 1 to 25 dB.
4.2.4.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
4.2.4.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
4.2.4.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Light sources must be within the required optical bandpass as described in
GR-910 Table 4-3, with insertion loss from splices and connectors excluded.
Connector loss can be excluded by cutting them off, or if a non-destructive test is
desired, by substituting the DUT with a jumper cable with equivalent connectors. In
the latter case, the connector repeatability determines the measurement
uncertainty. FOTP-57 gives the procedure for fiber end face preparation. FOTP-127
gives the procedure for measuring the source central wavelength. FOTP-20 gives
the procedure for measuring optical transmittance. TP-910 Figure 4-110 diagrams
the procedure for measuring the change in attenuation, which consists of the
following steps.
TP-910 Figure 4-110 Attenuation Loss Measurement
Source Power
Meter
Source Power
Meter
DUT
MF MF
2. Measure the Insertion Loss of the Attenuator
1. Measure the Reference Power
Fusion Splice Pi
Po
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–150
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
1. Fiber End Face Preparation
For attenuators with a bare fiber pigtail, the fiber end face should be clean and
cleaved well or polished well if it is to be directly attached to a detector using a
bare fiber adapter. Otherwise, the fiber may be connectorized or fusion spliced
to a connectorized optical pigtail to facilitate light monitoring.
All connectors, connector interfaces, and connector receptacles are to be
cleaned in accordance with Section 4.3 of GR-326-CORE. Make sure the
source power is off, for eye safety, and then inspect the connector end face
using a microscope.
Mate attenuators with an integral connector receptacle, or connector interfaces
to a connectorized fiber jumper and do not disturb the fibers launch condition.
2. Measure the Incident Optical Power, Pi
Use a stable optical power source having a central wavelength which is within
the wavelength range of the attenuator under test. Connect the source to an
optical power meter using a launch jumper with the same connectors as the
attenuator under test. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient
mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of
GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360° loops in the 2-meter length. The
optical power meter should now display the incident (input) optical power, Pi.
For power meters having a REFERENCE feature, press the REF key to enter Pi
as the reference. The connection to the source must not be disturbed, and the
coupling efficiency of the connection to the detector in Step 3 must be
equivalent to the coupling efficiency obtained in Step 2.
3. Determine the Attenuation
If the attenuator under test is connectorized, mate the connector to the detector
end of the launch jumper, otherwise, cut the launch jumper in half and fusion
splice (with ≤ 0.02 dB loss per splice) the attenuator to both halves. The optical
power meter should now display the output optical power, Po. Then the
attenuation is:
A = 10 log10 (Pi / Po )(4-6)
If the optical power meter reference feature has been used, the attenuation, A
should be displayed automatically.
4. Determine the Final Attenuation
Repeat Step 3 to determine the final attenuation. Measure the attenuation in
both directions of light propagation.
5. Compare Results Against Requirements
Compare the attenuation values against the requirement and objective from
Section 4.2.2.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–151
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
The transmission measurement facility in TP-910 Figure 4-111 or loss spectra (from
TP-910 Figure 4-102) can also be used to determine insertion loss within a (typical)
measurement uncertainty of ±0.5 dB.
In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make
measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm,
accurate to ±0.05 dB for transmittance and ±1 dB for reflectance down to –60 dB.
While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of
meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in
which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads
should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in
additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss.
The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of
four laser sources emitting near λ1 = 1310 nm, λ2 = 1490 nm, λ3 = 1550 nm or
λ4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source
switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to
launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any
DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The
Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for
detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct
for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value
is −60 ±1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance
from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the
power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through
the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the
reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports
are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers
are computer controlled via GPIB interface.
TP-910 Figure 4-111 Transmission Measurement Facility
Source
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–152
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the
DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for
their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements,
all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and
switches, should have a reflectance of ≤ −65 dB. The Coupler should have a
directivity of ≥ 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode
transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter,
provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there
are at least two 360° loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for
additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the
Transmission Measurement Facility.
4.2.4.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
4.2.4.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months –
Sensor for Tunable Multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months –
Broadband Stabilized Light
Source
Anritsu MG 922 A 12 months –
Optical Spectrum Analyzer Anritsu MS 9710 B 12 months –
Fiber cleaning supplies:
alcohol, compressed air, lint-
free wipes, and lint-free tipped
probes
- - - -
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–153
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.5 Reflectance
The discrete reflectance, R, is the ratio of reflected power, Pr, to the incident
power, Pi, in units of negative dB.
R (dB) = 10 log (Pr / Pi) (4-7)
In an attenuator, optical power may propagate in both directions. The measurement
does not include reflectance from connectors unless connectors are an integral part
of the attenuator.
Reflectance must be the worst-case value at a nominal wavelength for each
wavelength region. Ideally, the criteria would be met for the entire bandpass.
4.2.5.1 Criteria - Reflectance (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R4-30 [67] The maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in Digital
systems as bit rates up to 10 Gb/s shall be ≤ −40 dB over the entire bandpass of
GR-910 CR4-17 [54] and GR-910 CO4-18 [55] and operating temperature range
of −40°C to 75°C (−40°F to 167°F).
GR-910 CR4-31 [68] The maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB
systems shall be ≤ −55 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and
operating temperature range of−40°C to +75°C.
GR-910 CO4-32 [69] The maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-
VSB systems should be ≤ −65 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57]
and operating temperature range of−40°C to +75°C.
Rationale: Low reflectance and optical return loss minimizes noise associated
with reflections back to the laser source and noise caused by multiple reflection
paths, both of which result in a system power penalty. The conditional requirement
and objective are intended to support AM-VSB video transmission, which have been
observed to incur multiple-reflection induced distortion in the presence of
reflections below –60 dB. Reflectance ≤ –40 dB is most likely sufficient to support
digital transmission at bit-rates up to at least 10 Gb/s. However, in future issues of
Telcordia documents a single reflectance requirement and objective will be
specified for all applications to limit product segregation.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–154
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.5.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
4.2.5.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
4.2.5.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Reflectance is measured by Optical Continuous Wave Reflectometry (OCWR) per
FOTP-107, which uses a coupler to provide a path for the reflected light. The light
sources must be within the required optical bandpass from GR-910 Table 4-3.
Connector reflectance is covered in GR-326-CORE for optical pad type and
connector receptacle attenuators. Connector reflectance for patchcord (pigtail)
type attenuators is excluded when measuring reflectance. Measure reflectance in
both the directions of light propagation. Reflectance can be measured with the
transmission measurement test facility shown in TP-910 Figure 4-112. See
Section 5.2.1.2 of GR-326-CORE, for details.
In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make
measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm,
accurate to ±0.05 dB for transmittance and ±1 dB for reflectance down to –60 dB.
While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of
meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in
which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads
should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in
additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss.
The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of
four laser sources emitting near λ1 = 1310 nm, λ2 = 1490 nm, λ3 = 1550 nm or
TP-910 Figure 4-112 Transmission Measurement Facility
Source
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–155
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
λ4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source
switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to
launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any
DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The
Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for
detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct
for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value
is −60 ±1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance
from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the
power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through
the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the
reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports
are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers
are computer controlled via GPIB interface.
Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the
DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for
their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements,
all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and
switches, should have a reflectance of ≤ −65 dB. The Coupler should have a
directivity of ≥ 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode
transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter,
provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there
are at least two 360° loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for
additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the
Transmission Measurement Facility.
4.2.5.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months –
Sensor for Tunable Multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months –
Broadband Stabilized Light
Source
Anritsu MG 922 A 12 months –
Optical Spectrum Analyzer Anritsu MS 9710 B 12 months –
Fiber cleaning supplies:
alcohol, compressed air, lint-
free wipes, and lint-free tipped
probes
- - - -
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–156
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.5.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
The baseline reflectance measurements presented in TP-910 Figure 4-113 shows
conformance to GR-910 R4-30 [67] and GR-910 CR4-31 [68], but shows
nonconformance to GR-910 CO4-32 [69]. this is a conditional objective and it is
up to the end user the significance of this nonconforming issue. Conformance is
based on demonstration that the maximum reflectance for attenuators is not
exceeded for both digital systems as well as analog systems before, during and after
environmental and mechanical stress as applied to in Section 4.1. The status of each
requirement is described in each pertinent section of Section 4.1.
Sample Size
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
The following chart represents the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total
of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-113 presents
the reflectance measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) taken
as a baseline for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and
1625 nm, respectively. Refer to the results presented in Section 4.1 for the during
and after test measurements of which these values are compared to.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–157
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.6 Polarization-Dependent Loss (PDL)
PDL is the variation in insertion loss as the state of polarization (SOP) of the
incident signal is varied over all orientations.
4.2.6.1 Criteria - Polarization-Dependent Loss (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R4-33 [70] All optical requirements shall be met for all incident SOPs.
GR-910 CR4-34 [71] For digital applications the maximum change in attenuation shall
be ≤ 0.5 dB or ≤ 0.15A, whichever is less.
GR-910 CR4-35 [72] For AM video applications the maximum change in attenuation shall
be ≤ 0.5 dB or ≤ 0.10A, whichever is less.
Rationale: The SOP of light propagating through fiber optic transmission systems,
using conventional Class IVa single-mode fiber, is indeterminate. Therefore,
attenuators used in these systems must be insensitive to the SOP.
TP-910 Figure 4-113 Baseline Reflectance Measurements at 1310 nm, 1490 nm,
1550 nm and 1625 nm
TYCO Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Reflectance
-70.0
-65.0
-60.0
-55.0
-50.0
-45.0
-40.0
-35.0
-30.0
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample
Reflectance (dB)
1310 nm 1490 nm
1550 nm 1625 nm
Req (D) Req (A)
CR (A)
`
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–158
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.6.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Clean all optical connectors prior to use following cleaning procedure A or B
described in GR-326-CORE, Section 4.3.
The following cleaning procedure (Procedure A) shall be followed, unless
the manufacturer of the DUT provides an alternative procedure
(Procedure B).
a. If both plugs have been removed from the adapter, blow compressed gas
through the adapter. If both plugs are not to be removed, blow
compressed gas into the open end of the adapter.
b. Wipe completely around the ferrule of the plug twice with a lint-free
wiping material that has been moistened with alcohol. Then wipe
across the end of the ferrule.
c. Repeat Step (b.) with a dry wipe.
d. Blow compressed gas across the end of the ferrule. This is the final step
before inserting the plug. Do not wipe the ferrule or allow it to touch
anything after completion of this step and before the ferrule is inserted
into the sleeve.
e. Insert the plug in the adapter.
f. If both plugs have been removed, repeat Steps (b.) through (e.) with the
second plug.
2. Determine the output power spectrum launched by the light source being used
with equipment shown in TP-910 Figure 4-115 to perform baseline reference
measurements: received power versus wavelength. Sweep the light source or
spectrum analyzer through the full range of operational wavelengths that
comprise the DUT’s anticipated bandwidth.
3. Save baseline measurements with their respective wavelength λi, as the
reference power, Reference Poweri, for each output fiber on hard disk.
4. Insert the device under test and a polarization controller into the test setup
shown in TP-910 Figure 4-116.
5. Record polarization dependent power for each DUT output fiber, DUT
Polarization Poweri, versus wavelength, λk, on hard disk. Sweep the light
source through the full range of operational wavelengths that comprise the
DUT’s anticipated bandwidth. During this measurement the polarization
controller will be required to rotate the light through all states of polarization.
The variations between the maximum and minimum DUT polarization poweri
will define the variation in PDL of each DUT output fiber.
6. Compute the polarization dependent loss versus wavelength for each output
fiber of the DUT by subtracting the reference power level for each wavelength
from the power level with the DUT in place for the same wavelength.
Max PDLi = Reference Poweri – Max DUT Polarization Poweri
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–159
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Min PDLi = Reference Poweri – Min DUT Polarization Poweri
7. Compute the range of polarization dependent loss, ∆LI, versus wavelength for
each output fiber of the DUT by calculating the difference between the
maximum and minimum DUT Polarization Poweri for each.
∆LI = Max DUT Polarization Poweri - Min DUT Polarization Poweri
8. Does Max and Min PDLi meet all optical requirements of GR-910 for all SOP as
per GR-910?
9. No – investigate the nature of the failure using the Telcordia Nonconforming
Product Process.
10. Yes – does ∆LI meet the requirements of GR-910?
11. No – investigate the nature of the failure using the Telcordia Nonconforming
Product Process.
12. Go on to the next product test.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–160
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.6.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
Setup Equipment as is shown in TP-1209
Figure 4-48.
Insert device under test (DUT) and
polarization controller into
test setup, as per TP-1209 Figure 4-49.
Compute polarization dependent loss vs
for each DUT
output fiber by subtracting the reference power leveli for each
wavelength from the power level with the DUT in place for the
same wavelength.
Max PDL
i
= Reference Power
i
- Max DUT Polarization Power
i
Min PDL
i
= Reference Power
i
- Min DUT Polarization Power
i
Perform baseline measurements:
Reference Pwr
i
versus
i
, save.
Perform DUT measurements:
DUT Polarization Pwr
i
versus
i
, save.
Clean all optical connectors, see GR-326-
CORE, Section 4.3, Method A or B.
Continue
Compute range of polarization dependent loss,
L
I
, versus
for each
DUT output fiber by calculating difference between the maximum and
minimum DUT Polarization Power
i
for each.
L
I
= Max DUT Polarization Power
i
- Min DUT Polarization Power
i
Wipe each plug twice with lint-free
cloth moistened with alcohol. Wipe
across end of ferrule.
Blow compressed air through the
connector adapter.
Wipe each plug twice with lint-free
cloth. Wipe across end of ferrule.
Blow compressed air through the
connector adapter.
Insert mating connector plugs in
adapter.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–161
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
continue
Investigate the nature of the
failure using the Telcordia Non-
Conforming Product Process.
Does Max and Min
PDL
i
meet all optical criteiria
of GR-1209
for all SOP as per
GR-1209R4-52 [85]?
Yes
No
Investigate the nature of the
failure using the Telcordia Non-
Conforming Product Process.
Does
L
I
meet requirements of GR-
1209 R4-53 [86]?
No
Yes
Tes t DUT as a fi lt er
Is DUT and Isolator
or a circulator?
No
Yes
Continue
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–162
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
continue
Investigate the nature of the failure using
the Telcordia Non-Conforming Product
Process.
Does isolator or circulator
Max and Min PDL
i
meet all optical
requirements of GR-1209 for all SOP as
per GR-1209 R4-54 [87]?
Yes
No
Investigate the nature of the
failure using the Telcordia Non-
Conforming Product Process.
Does
L
I
meet requirements
of GR-1209 R4-55 [88] for isolators
and GR-1209 R4-56 [89] for
circulators?
No
Yes
Is D UT a fi lter?
No
Yes
Cont inue
Go on to next
product test
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–163
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.6.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
The intent of this test is to determine compliance with the optical criteria given in
Section 4.2.2 through Section 4.2.6, given incident light which is linearly polarized
at any angle. Methods to more accurately determine PDL and the polarization
sensitivity of passive components require further development, and such
development is ongoing. Some test instruments now measure PDL.
TP-910 Figure 4-117 shows a configuration for measuring PDL using a fiber coupled
Polarization Controller (PC). The PC is a device that adjusts to select any SOP,
such as an all-fiber PC, or a combination of a linear polarizer (P), quarter-wave plate
(Q), and a half-wave plate (H), which are compatible with the wavelength of the
source. The important characteristics of the measurement apparatus are:
•PDL must be demonstrated for at least at one nominal wavelength within each
of the 1310 nm and 1550 nm regions.
•The Optical Source launches temporally stable light, with ≤ 10 nm spectral
width, and an extinction ratio of ≥ 20 dB, into single-mode fiber.
•Bends in conventional Class IVa or IVb single-mode fiber will modify the state
of polarization. For this reason, the device launch pigtail must be deployed in a
straight configuration, and must not be moved during the polarization
measurement.
TP-910 Figure 4-114 Test Flowchart - PDL Test (not from GR-910)
continue
Investigate the nature of the failure using
the Telcordia Non-Conforming Product
Process.
No
Yes
Does filter
L
I
meet the
requirements
of GR-1209 R4-58 [91]?
Go on to next
product test
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–164
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
•The DUT should be spliced into the optical path to avoid varying the SOP,
otherwise connect the attenuator between the PC and the detector power
meter. Attenuators with connectors incur a greater PDL.
•The test procedures in Section 5.2.1 through Section 5.2.4 are to be followed, to
measure the particular optical characteristic of interest.
•Adjust the polarization controller to measure the worst-case value for the
characteristic of interest. The plane of polarization should be rotated through an
angle of ≥ 180°.
If using a PQH Controller:
•Rotate P until the maximum power is obtained.
•Alternatively, rotate Q and H to obtain the worst-case value for the
characteristic of interest.
•To determine ∆L, alternatively, rotate Q and H to obtain the highest power
level, and subtract from the lowest power level (from the previous step)
TP-910 Figure 4-115 Reference Configuration for PDL Tests (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 4-116 Through-DUT Configuration for PDL Tests (not from GR-
910)
TP-910 Figure 4-117 Configuration for Measuring Polarization Dependent Loss
Optical
power
meter
Tunable
laser
Optical
power
meter
Tunable
laser DUT
Polarization
controller
Optical
Source DUT Power
Meter
Polarization
Controller
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–165
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.6.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
4.2.6.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
All of the eleven samples conformed to the criteria in Section 4.2.6.1 of this
document. Conformance is based on demonstration that all optical requirements
are met for all incident states of polarization and that the maximum change in
attenuation is within the required criteria.
Sample Size
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
The following chart represents the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total
of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-118 presents
Polarization-Dependent Loss (PDL) measurements for all of the eleven test samples
at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, respectively.
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months –
Sensor for Tunable Multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months –
Polarization Controller HP 11896A 12 months –
Fiber cleaning supplies:
alcohol, compressed air, lint-
free wipes, and lint-free tipped
probes
- - - -
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–166
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.7 Polarization-Mode Dispersion (PMD)
PMD is the dispersion, or difference between arrival times, of pulses which travel
through optical fiber as ordinary and extraordinary rays. In optical fiber cable, PMD
is statistical, varying with time and changes in wavelength, temperature, vibration,
etc. Although, PMD in optical components is more stable and the ratio of standard
deviation to the mean is much smaller, optical components contribute to the overall
PMD of an optical transmission system. All optical components including
attenuators must be compatible with optical fiber transmission systems and not
contribute significantly to the total PMD in the optical path.
4.2.7.1 Criteria - Polarization Mode Dispersion (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R4-36 [79] The maximum value of dispersion (in ps) shall not exceed 0.2 ps for all
operating wavelengths.
TP-910 Figure 4-118 Polarization-Dependent Loss (PDL) at 1310 nm, 1490 nm,
1550 nm and 1625 nm
TYCO Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, PDL
0.00
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.45
0.50
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample #
PDL (dB)
1310 nm 1490 nm
1550 nm 1625 nm
Req (D) Req (A)
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–167
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.7.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Clean all optical connectors prior to use following cleaning procedure A or B
described in GR-326-CORE, Section 4.3.
The following cleaning procedure (Procedure A) shall be followed, unless
the manufacturer of the DUT provides an alternative procedure
(Procedure B).
a. If both plugs have been removed from the adapter, blow compressed gas
through the adapter. If both plugs are not to be removed, blow
compressed gas into the open end of the adapter.
b. Wipe completely around the ferrule of the plug twice with a lint-free
wiping material that has been moistened with alcohol. Then wipe
across the end of the ferrule.
c. Repeat Step (b.) with a dry wipe.
d. Blow compressed gas across the end of the ferrule. This is the final step
before inserting the plug. Do not wipe the ferrule or allow it to touch
anything after completion of this step and before the ferrule is inserted
into the sleeve.
e. Insert the plug in the adapter.
f. If both plugs have been removed, repeat Steps (b.) through (e.) with the
second plug.
2. Determine the output power spectrum launched by the light source being used
with equipment shown in TP-910 Figure 4-120 to perform baseline reference
measurements: received power versus wavelength. Sweep the light source or
spectrum analyzer through the full range of operational wavelengths that
comprise the DUT’s anticipated bandwidth.
3. Measure the PMD delay time for each DUT output fiber using the PMD test setup
shown in TP-910 Figure 4-121.
4. Does the PMD delay time for each DUT output fiber meet GR-910?
5. No – investigate the nature of the failure using the Telcordia Nonconforming
Product Process.
6. Go on to the next product test.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–168
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.7.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
Setup Equipment and DUT as is shown in
TP-1209 Figure 4-60. Note, equipment
includes a PMD transmitter and receiver.
Perform PMD delay time measurements:
DUT Polarization Pwr
i
versus
i
, save.
Clean all optical connectors, see GR-326-
CORE, Section 4.3, Method A or B.
Investigate the nature of the
failure using the Telcordia
Non-Conforming Product
Process.
Does PMD delay
timefor DUT output fiber
meet GR-1209
R4-60 [93]?
No
Yes
Is the DUT an
isolator or circulator? Skip to next product test,
No
Yes
Investigate the nature of
the failure using the
Telcordia Non-
Conforming Product
Process.
Does PMD delay
time for isolator/circulator
meet GR-1209
R4-61 [94]
No
Yes
Wipe each plug twice with lint-free
cloth moistened with alcohol. Wipe
across end of ferrule.
Blow compressed air through the
connector adapter.
Wipe each plug twice with lint-free
cloth. Wipe across end of ferrule.
Blow compressed air through the
connector adapter.
Insert mating connector plugs in
adapter.
continue
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–169
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.7.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
The measurement of PMD can be accomplished by the fixed analyzer method in
FOTP-113, the Jones matrix analysis in FOTP-122, or the interferometric method in
FOTP-124. There are commercially available measurement instruments capable of
measuring PDL and PMD.
TP-910 Figure 4-119 Test Flowchart - PMD (not from GR-910)
continue
Investigate the nature of
the failure using the
Telcordia Non-
Conforming Product
Process.
Does variation in f
c
for
polarization effect meet
GR-1209 R4-59 [92]?
No
Yes
Compute the central frequency,f
c
,
for both curves.
Go on to next product
test.
TP-910 Figure 4-120 Reference Configuration for PMD Tests (not from GR-910)
PMD
Light
Source
PMD
Receiver
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–170
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
4.2.7.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
4.2.7.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
All of the eleven samples conformed to the criteria in Section 4.2.7.1 of this
document. Conformance is based on demonstration that the maximum value of
dispersion is not exceeded for all operating wavelengths.
Sample Size
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
TP-910 Figure 4-121 Configuration for PMD Tests (not from GR-910)
PMD
Light
SOurce
DUT PMD
Receiver
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
PMD Light Source EXFO FLS210A-03B-70 12 months –
PMD Receiver EXFO 5500 12 months –
Fiber cleaning
supplies: alcohol,
compressed air, lint-
free wipes, and lint-free
tipped probes
- - - -
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–171
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Test Data
The following chart represents the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total
of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-122 presents
Polarization-Mode Dispersion (PMD) measurements for all of the eleven test
samples.
4.2.8 Damage Criteria
Damage criteria apply after each of the Environmental and Mechanical Tests, and
after all testing. The attenuators and associated parts (i.e., connectors, pigtails)
shall be inspected for damage that might impair the performance of the attenuator.
This inspection shall include inspections for
•Distortion
•Package Cracks
•Hardening or Softening of Materials
•Fiber Breakage
•Cable Pullout
•Cable Jacket Damage
•Cable Seal Damage
TP-910 Figure 4-122 Polarization-Mode Dispersion (PMD) measurements
Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, PMD
0.00
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.25
i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11
Sample#
PMD (ps)
PMD (ps
)
Req.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–172
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
•Damage to the Attenuation Element
•Damage to the Variable Attenuation Adjustment Mechanism.
4.2.8.1 Criteria - Damage (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R4-37 [73] At the completion of all tests there shall be no damage that would
impair the performance of the attenuator.
4.2.8.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Review for damage is provided as a step within the test procedures documented
in this section for each individual test.
2. Any damage observed and reported as a part of the other test procedures in this
section shall be summarized for overall damage criteria conformance per the
above requirement.
4.2.8.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
Not applicable
4.2.8.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Not applicable
4.2.8.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Not applicable
4.2.8.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
All of the eleven samples conformed to the criteria in Section 4.2.8.1 of this
document. Conformance is based on demonstration that upon completion of all
tests there is no damage sustained that would impair the performance of the
attenuator.
Sample Size
Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2,
were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Criteria
4–173
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test
program.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Criteria February 3, 200 5
4–174
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Verification/Test Procedures
5–1
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
5.0 Performance Verification/Test Procedures
This section describes the test procedures for the performance analysis of single-
mode fiber optic attenuators. These configurations and procedures are
recommended. However, other configurations and procedures capable of meeting
the relevant measurement requirements are not excluded.
The performance verification and test procedures presented in this section are
presented in parallel with the requirements given in Section 4, and they will be used
as a basis for analyzing attenuators. Performance tests are designed not only to
verify performance of attenuators, but also to determine the performance of
attenuators under severe environmental and mechanical conditions which may
degrade their performance.
The standard test procedures and conditions defined in EIA/TIA-455-A are to be
used for testing. The following conditions also apply to these test procedures:
•All tests are performed at a room temperature of 23° ± 5°C (73° ± 9°F) and a
relative humidity of 30% to 70% unless otherwise specified.
•The test instruments are allowed to stabilize for the minimum time specified by
the equipment manufacturer prior to any measurement or 1 hour, whichever is
greater.
•All test equipment is properly calibrated. Optical power meters have a relative
accuracy ≤ 0.05 dB for all power levels from 0 dBm to ≤ - 80 dBm, for all
wavelengths from 1260 nm to 1580 nm.
•Work procedures, such as the mating of connectors or the adjustments of
attenuator settings, that have a potential for altering the measurements are
performed strictly in accordance with the written instructions supplied with the
product.
•The manufacturer selects1 samples of the product to be used in the analysis at
random, from stock that represents the manufacturer's normal production. The
sample of the product for analysis shall be shipped by the manufacturer to the
testing agency with the complete packing and marking that product supplied to
a customer would normally have.
•The performance of an optical attenuator may depend on the cleanliness of the
attenuation element, connector receptacle and integral connectors, or
connector interfaces. It is the responsibility of the supplier to provide cleaning
instructions for attenuation elements that are accessible to the end user.
Attenuators with accessible attenuation elements shall be cleaned according to
the suppliers instructions. All optical connector receptacles, connectors, and
connector interfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with Section 4.3 of GR-326-
CORE.
1. Telcordia reserves the option to select product for analysis.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Verification/Test Procedures February 3, 2005
5–2
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
•A minimum of 11 attenuator samples per test allowing no failures is suggested
for testing per FOTP-3A. This corresponds to a Lot Tolerance Percentage
Defective (LTPD) of 20%. LTPD is described in Appendix B of Military
Specification MIL-M-38510J. Smaller sample sizes are not sufficient to establish
a statistically meaningful result.
•All samples undergo sequential testing in the order presented in this document.
5.1 Environmental and Mechanical Testing
These tests are intended to demonstrate the operation of attenuators under
environmental stress, but not reliability. For a complete set of reliability tests, refer
to GR-1221-CORE.
For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined
by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical
transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test.
The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring
reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical
inspection should follow FOTP-13.
The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during
testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility
shown in GR-910 Figure 5-1, or another comparable system.
This facility makes measurements in both the 1310 nm and 1550 nm wavelength
regions, accurate to ± 0.05 dB for transmittance and ± 1 dB for reflectance down to
- 60 dB. While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations
capable of meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For
attenuators in which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors
GR-910 Figure 5-1 Transmission Measurement Facility
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Verification/Test Procedures
5–3
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
and leads should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may
result in additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector
loss. The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one
of two laser sources emitting near λ1 = 1310 nm or λ2 = 1550 nm. The Device Under
Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source switch (Switch 1) and the detector
switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to launch light into any of the devices
under test. The detector switch connects any DUT to the power meter, measuring
transmitted power and reflected power. The Coupler directs the optical power
reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for detection. A reference fiber, located
at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct for variations in source power over
time. A reflectance reference (suggested value is − 60 ± 1 dB) is located at port (r)
of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance from the measured optical power.
Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the power transmitted through the
reference fiber from the power transmitted through the DUT. Reflectance is
calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the reflectance reference from the
power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports are dedicated to DUTs. The
Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers are computer controlled via
GPIB interface.
Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the
DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for
their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements,
all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and
switches, should have a reflectance ≤ − 65 dB. The Coupler should have a
directivity of ≥ 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode
transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter,
provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there
are at least two 360° loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for
additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the
Transmission Measurement Facility.
5.1.1 Controlled Operating Environment
The product shall be tested according to the performance requirements in Section 4
while being exposed to the temperatures and humidity specified in Section 5.1.2,
Operating Temperature and Relative Humidity, in GR-63-CORE. The controlled
operating environment temperature profile is shown in GR-910 Figure 5-2.
Measurements should be taken at each temperature plateau. Upon reaching a
temperature measurement point the test samples should be allowed to stabilize for
a one-half hour minimum before measuring attenuation and reflectance. The final
measurement shall be made after the test samples have stabilized at 23°C for a
minimum or 2 hours. The requirements in Section 4.1.1 apply before during and
after the test.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Verification/Test Procedures February 3, 2005
5–4
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
5.1.2 Uncontrolled Operating Environment
Attenuators intended for use in an uncontrolled environment (outside plant) shall
be subjected to the temperature cycling profile in GR-910 Figure 5-3 per FOTP 3A,
for 21 cycles, 168 hours. The relative humidity is uncontrolled. Measurements
should be taken at each temperature plateau once per day. Upon reaching a
temperature measurement point the test samples should be allowed to stabilize for
a one-half hour minimum before measuring attenuation and reflectance. The final
measurement shall be made after the test samples have stabilized at 23°C for a
minimum or 2 hours. The requirements in Section 4.1.2 apply before during and
after the test.
GR-910 Figure 5-2 Controlled Operating Environment Temperature Profile
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
0 48 96 144 192
Time - Hour s
Temperature °
C
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Verification/Test Procedures
5–5
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
5.1.3 Non-Operating Environment
The product shall be tested according to the performance requirements in Section 4
while being exposed to the temperatures and humidity specified in Sections 5.1.1.1,
5.1.1.2, and 5.1.1.1.3 per GR-63-CORE for low-temperature exposure and thermal
shock, high-temperature exposure and thermal shock, and high relative humidity
exposure respectively. The requirements in Section 4.1.3 apply before and after
each test.
5.1.4 Humidity/Condensation Cycling Test
The product shall be tested according to the performance requirements in Section 4
while being exposed to the modified temperatures and humidity profile shown in
GR-910 Figure 5-4 per FOTP 3A, for 14 cycles, 168 hours. The relative humidity shall
be ≥ 90% at interval four, 65°C, and at interval eight, 23°C. Measurements should be
taken at each temperature plateau. Upon reaching a temperature measurement
point the test samples should be allowed to stabilize for a one-half hour minimum
before measuring attenuation and reflectance. The final measurement shall be
made after the test samples have stabilized at 23°C for a minimum or 2 hours. The
requirements in Section 4.1.4 apply before during and after the test.
GR-910 Figure 5-3 Uncontrolled Environment Temperature Profile
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
0123456789
Time - Hours
Temperature °
C
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Verification/Test Procedures February 3, 2005
5–6
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
5.1.5 Water Immersion
This test is to be performed according to GR-1221-CORE, Section 6.2.10, Water
Immersion Test, which is based on FOTP-12. Attenuator test samples are to be
subjected to immersion in water (pH 5.5 ± 0.5) at 43° ± 2°C (109 ± 4°F) for 7 days.
The pH level can be set by mixing a standard buffer solution containing sodium
hydroxide and acetic acid. The pH level should be checked periodically throughout
the test and compensated if it drifts. Optical transmittance and reflectance are to be
monitored once/day for 7 consecutive days and 24 hours after the test samples are
removed from the bath. The samples are washed and allowed to drain for 24 hours
at room temperature following removal from the water bath. The final optical
transmittance and reflectance is to be measured at 23°C, 24 hours following
removal from the water bath. The change in attenuation and reflectance at any
measurement point during or at the end of the test is to be compared against the
requirements and objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5.
5.1.6 Vibration Test
This test is to be performed according to GR-1221-CORE, Section 6.2.2, Variable
Frequency Vibration Test, which is based on FOTP-11, Condition I, except that test
samples are to withstand vibrations from 10 Hz to 55 Hz. This test subjects the
samples to a simple harmonic motion having an amplitude of 1.52 mm (0.060")
maximum total excursion. The frequency is to vary uniformly between 10 Hz and
55 Hz and return to 10 Hz in approximately 4 minutes. The attenuators are to be
tested for 2 hours in each of three mutually perpendicular planes. Optical
transmittance and reflectance are to be measured before and after the test. The
change in attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements taken
GR-910 Figure 5-4 Humidity/Condensation Temperature Profile
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
0123456789101112
Time - Hours
Temperature °
C
Humidity Control
Humidity Contr ol
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Verification/Test Procedures
5–7
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
before and after the test and is to be compared against the requirements and
objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5.
5.1.7 Flex Test
Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to a modified flex test per
Section 4.4.3.1 of GR-326-CORE. The flex test may be performed according to
FOTP-1. The optical fiber lead(s) of the test sample shall be flexed through 180° for
100 cycles with the required load specified in GR-910 Table 4-2. The maximum
change in attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements taken
before and after the test and is to be compared against the requirements and
objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5.
This test applies only to attenuators with optical fiber leads.
A. Measure attenuation and reflectance.
B. Apply load:
Media Type I, 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)
Media Type II, 0.23 kg (0.5 lb.)
Media Type III, 0.23 kg (0.5 lb.)
C. Rotate the angle of the test fixture arm (see GR-910 Figure 5-8) through the
following cycle: 0°, 90°, 0°, -90°, 0°, and repeat for 100 cycles.
D. Remove load.
E. Measure attenuation and reflectance.
5.1.8 Twist Test
Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to a modified twist test per
Section 4.4.2.3 of GR-326-CORE. The twist test may be performed according to
FOTP-36. The optical fiber lead(s) of the test sample shall be twisted for 10 cycles
with the required load specified in GR-910 Table 4-2. The maximum change in
attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements taken before and
after the test and is to be compared against the requirements and objectives
specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5.
A. Mount the test sample in the test facility; see GR-910 Figure 5-8.
B. Measure attenuation and reflectance.
C. Apply load:
Media Type I, 1.35 kg (3.0 lb.)
Media Type II, 0.75 kg (1.65 lb.)
Media Type III, 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
D. Rotate the capstan (see GR-910 Figure 5-8) X revolutions about the axis of the
fiber. (See the following table.)
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Verification/Test Procedures February 3, 2005
5–8
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
E. Reverse direction and rotate Y revolutions. Reverse direction again, and rotate
Y revolutions. See GR-910 Table 5-1.
F. Repeat step “e” nine times.
G. Remove load, and measure attenuation and reflectance.
5.1.9 Side Pull
Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the required tensile side load in an
operating mode. The optical fiber lead(s) of the test sample shall be tested with the
required load, specified in GR-910 Table 5-2, applied at an angle of 90°. The
maximum change in attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements
taken before, during and after the test and is to be compared against the
requirements and objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5.
The Side Pull test is based on the Equilibrium Tensile Loading Test in Section 4.4.3.5
of GR-326-CORE.
Mount the test sample in the test facility of GR-910 Figure 5-8.
The test is conducted as follows:
A. Measure both loss and reflectance.
B. Apply the load listed in GR-910 Table 5-2 at an angle of 90°.
C. Measure both loss and reflectance after 5 seconds.
D. Remove the load and measure attenuation and reflectance after 10 seconds.
5.1.10 Cable Retention
Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the required tensile load in GR-
910 Table 4-2. The load is to be applied to the secured cable at a minimum distance
GR-910 Table 5-1 Number of Turns for Twist Test
Media Types X Y
Type I 2.5 5
Types II & III 1.5 3
GR-910 Table 5-2 Side Pull Tensile Loading
Media Type Load
Media I 1.25 kg (2.75 lb)
Media II 0.25 kg (0.55 lb)
Media III 0.25 kg (0.55 lb)
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Verification/Test Procedures
5–9
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
of 10 cm (4 inches) from the end of the fiber. Apply the load at a rate of
400 micrometers (0.016 in.) per second until attaining the maximum load, which is
to be maintained for 1 minute. The maximum change in attenuation and reflectance
is the difference in measurements taken before and after the test and is to be
compared against the requirements and objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and
Section 4.2.5.
The Cable Retention test is based on the Transmission with Applied Tensile Load
Test in Section 4.4.3.4 of GR-326-CORE.
Mount the test sample in the test facility of GR-910 Figure 5-8.
The test is conducted as follows:
A. Measure both loss and reflectance.
B. Apply the load specified in GR-910 Table 4-2 at a rate of 400 micrometers (0.016
in) per second.
C. Remove the load after 1 minute.
D. Measure both loss and reflectance.
5.1.11 Durability
This test shall apply to connector receptacles, optical pad type attenuators, and
patchcord type attenuators with connectorized pigtails. Attenuator test samples are
to be subjected to the durability test procedure per Section 4.4.3.7 of GR-326-CORE.
Both connector interfaces of a connector receptacle or optical pad type attenuator
are reconnected for 200 cycles. The attenuator shall be cleaned according to the
supplier’s instructions. Connectors are to be cleaned in accordance with the
procedure in Section 4.4.3.7 of GR-326-CORE.
Variable attenuators are to have their attenuation setting changed from the zero dB
setting to their maximum setting and back, for a minimum of 200 times.
For fixed attenuators the attenuation value and reflectance are to be measured for
each reconnection. The criteria in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5 are applied only to
measurements made immediately after the cleaning operation. The results of all
measurements will be reported.
For variable attenuators the attenuation value and reflectance are measured and
reported after each excursion at their minimum and maximum attenuation setting.
The criteria in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5 apply to each measurement.
5.1.12 Impact Test
This test is to be performed according to GR-1221-CORE, Section 6.2.1, Impact Test,
which is based on FOTP-2 for “Light Service Application.” Attenuators are to
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Verification/Test Procedures February 3, 2005
5–10
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
withstand 8 impact cycles, from each of three mutually perpendicular axes, when
dropped from a height of 1.8 meters (6 feet) onto a concrete floor.
The attenuators shall be dropped in an unmated condition without protective caps.
Samples are mounted rigidly so that the shock is transmitted to the internal
components and not absorbed or cushioned by the leads. A suggested method for
performing this test is to place the test sample inside a container filled with a rigid
packing material (such as sand or small glass beads) so that the sample does not
shift or bounce around when the container is dropped. In this way, the impact shock
is not absorbed by an elastic packing material, but is fully transmitted to the internal
components. Samples with leads may be protected from breakage if they are coiled
and tied. The connector plug/ferrule may be protected with a cap that does not
impede the impact force.
This test may also be performed using an impact test machine with the force of
impact set to 1000 G's.
After testing, each attenuator is to be carefully examined for evidence of physical
damage Section 4.2.8. The maximum change in attenuation and reflectance is the
difference in measurements taken before and after the test and is to be compared
against the requirements and objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5.
5.2 Optical Testing
The optical bandpass and attenuation tolerance require measurements of the
attenuator optical transmission spectrum. The equipment needed to perform these
tests are light sources accommodating the bandpass of the attenuator, such as
infrared LEDs, an optical spectrum analyzer, and an optical power meter. In lieu of
a spectrum analyzer, spectral measurements can be made using a scanning
monochromator as described in FOTP-78, or with tunable lasers or tunable filters.
Non-polarization-compensating spectrum analyzers are a potential source of
measurement error. Conversely, analyzers that can measure SOP are useful for PDL
measurements.
5.2.1 Optical Bandpass
The optical bandpass definition and criteria are given in Section 4.2.1 and can be
calculated by using the procedures given below. The attenuator is to be tested in
both directions of light propagation, at room temperature, and at the minimum and
maximum operating temperatures. The suggested measurement method is outlined
below.
1. Measure optical transmission spectrum.
A. Light Source: Use a single-mode fiber-coupled, high-powered optical source
having central wavelengths covering the required bandpass. Couple the
optical source to the attenuator under test with a wavelength-independent
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Verification/Test Procedures
5–11
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
coupler or jumper. Alternatively, use a fiber-coupled white light source.
Refer to FOTP-20 for stripping higher-order mode and cladding light.
B. Reference Power Spectrum: Connect the source to an optical spectrum
analyzer. Measure and store this signal as the reference spectrum. Best
results are typically obtained using 1 nm resolution, 10 nm/division span,
and start and stop wavelengths just enclosing the required bandpass. The
resolution of the optical spectrum analyzer should be better than the
linewidth of the test source.
C. Attenuator Power Spectrum: If the attenuator under test is connectorized,
connect it to the test configuration replacing the jumper; otherwise, cut the
jumper in half, and fusion splice in the attenuator. Connect the attenuator
under test between the source and the optical spectrum analyzer.
(The remaining steps are most easily completed by using the marker features on
most optical spectrum analyzers.)
2. Find the wavelength intercepts;
Find the two wavelength intercepts for each required bandpass region. Set the
level marker at the value designated on the attenuator. The other optical
requirements must also be met across the bandpass defined by these
wavelengths. See GR-910 Figure 5-5 for an example of a attenuator optical
spectrum.
3. Compare bandpass against criteria.
The pairs of wavelengths found in Step 2 represent the measured optical
bandpass of the attenuator under test. Compare the bandpass against the
bandpass requirements and objectives in Section 4.2.1. GR-910 Figure 5-5
shows an ideal spectra for a 5 dB attenuator.
4. The solid and dashed boxes represent the bandpass and attenuation tolerance
requirement and objective.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Verification/Test Procedures February 3, 2005
5–12
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
5.2.2 Change in Attenuation
This section discusses a method of measuring the attenuation change of a
attenuator. It applies to all tests which specify an attenuation change requirement.
Variable attenuators are to be assigned settings in increments of not less than
3 or 5 dB, depending on their application, ranging from their minimum to maximum
setting. Variable attenuators must not have their attenuation setting adjusted during
these tests, except at the end of each test, to check the adjustment mechanism for
damage, or when otherwise specified.
Light sources must be within the required optical bandpass from GR-910 Table 4-3,
and insertion loss from splices and connectors is excluded. Connector loss can be
excluded by cutting them off, or if a non-destructive test is desired, by substituting
the DUT with a jumper cable with equivalent connectors. In the latter case, the
connector repeatability determines the measurement uncertainty. FOTP-57 gives
the procedure for fiber end face preparation. FOTP-127 gives the procedure for
measuring the source central wavelength. FOTP-20 gives the procedure for
measuring optical transmittance. GR-910 Figure 5-6 diagrams the procedure for
measuring the change in attenuation, which consists of the following steps.
GR-910 Figure 5-5 3 dB Attenuator Optical Bandpass Spectra
4.00
4.20
4.40
4.60
4.80
5.00
5.20
5.40
5.60
5.80
6.00
1200
1220
1240
1260
1280
1300
1320
1340
1360
1380
1400
1420
1440
1460
1480
1500
1520
1540
1560
1580
1600
Wavel engt h (nm )
Insertion Loss (dB)
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Verification/Test Procedures
5–13
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
1. Fiber End Face Preparation
For attenuators with a bare fiber pigtail, the fiber end face should be clean and
cleaved well or polished well if it is to be directly attached to a detector using a
bare fiber adapter. Otherwise, the fiber may be connectorized or fusion spliced
to a connectorized optical pigtail to facilitate light monitoring.
All connectors, connector interfaces, and connector receptacles are to be
cleaned in accordance with Section 4.3 of GR-326-CORE. Make sure the
source power is off, for eye safety, and then inspect the connector end face
using a microscope.
Mate attenuators with an integral connector receptacle, or connector interfaces
to a connectorized fiber jumper and do not disturb the fibers launch condition.
2. Measure the Incident Optical Power, Pi
Use a stable optical power source having a central wavelength which is within
the wavelength range of the attenuator under test. Connect the source to an
optical power meter using a launch jumper with the same connectors as the
attenuator under test. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient
mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-
CORE and there are at least two 360° loops in the 2-meter length. The optical
power meter should now display the incident (input) optical power, Pi. For
power meters having a REFERENCE feature, press the REF key to enter Pi as
the reference. The connection to the source must not be disturbed, and the
coupling efficiency of the connection to the detector in Step 3 must be
equivalent to the coupling efficiency obtained in Step 2.
3. Determine the Attenuation
If the attenuator under test is connectorized, mate the connector to the detector
end of the launch jumper, otherwise, cut the launch jumper in half and fusion
splice (with ≤ 0.02 dB loss per splice) the attenuator to both halves. The optical
GR-910 Figure 5-6 Attenuation Loss Measurement
Source Power
Meter
Source Power
Meter
DUT
MF MF
2. Measure the Insertion Loss of the Attenuator
1. Measure the Reference Power
Fusion Splice Pi
Po
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Verification/Test Procedures February 3, 2005
5–14
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
power meter should now display the output optical power, Po. Then the
attenuation is:
A = 10 log10 (Pi / Po )(TP-910 Eq. 5-1)
If the optical power meter reference feature has been used, the attenuation, A
should be displayed automatically.
4. Determine the Final Attenuation
Repeat Step 3 to determine the final attenuation. Measure the attenuation in
both directions of light propagation.
5. Compare Results Against Requirements
Compare the attenuation values against the requirement and objective from
Section 4.2.2.
The transmission measurement facility in GR-910 Figure 5-1 or loss spectra (from
GR-910 Figure 5-5) can also be used to determine insertion loss within a (typical)
measurement uncertainty of ± 0.5 dB.
5.2.3 Attenuation Tolerance
Use the procedure described in Section 5.2.2 to measure attenuation tolerance.
5.2.4 Attenuation Increments and Range
Use the procedure described in Section 5.2.2 to measure attenuation increments
and range.
5.2.5 Reflectance
Reflectance is measured by Optical Continuous Wave Reflectometry (OCWR) per
FOTP-107, which uses a coupler to provide a path for the reflected light. The light
sources must be within the required optical bandpass from GR-910 Table 4-3.
Connector reflectance is covered in GR-326-CORE for optical pad type and
connector receptacle attenuators. Connector reflectance for patchcord (pigtail)
type attenuators is excluded when measuring reflectance. Measure reflectance in
both the directions of light propagation. Reflectance can be measured with the
transmission measurement test facility in GR-910 Figure 5-1. See Section 5.2.1.2 of
GR-326-CORE, for details.
5.2.6 Polarization-Dependent Loss (PDL)
The intent of this test is to determine compliance with the optical criteria given in
Section 4.2.2 through Section 4.2.6, given incident light which is linearly polarized
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Performance Verification/Test Procedures
5–15
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
at any angle. Methods to more accurately determine PDL and the polarization
sensitivity of passive components require further development, and such
development is ongoing. Some test instruments now measure PDL.
GR-910 Figure 5-7 shows a configuration for measuring PDL using a fiber coupled
Polarization Controller (PC). The PC is a device that adjusts to select any SOP,
such as an all-fiber PC, or a combination of a linear polarizer (P), quarter-wave plate
(Q), and a half-wave plate (H), which are compatible with the wavelength of the
source. The important characteristics of the measurement apparatus are:
•PDL must be demonstrated for at least at one nominal wavelength within each
of the 1310nm and 1550nm regions.
•The Optical Source launches temporally stable light, with ≤ 10 nm spectral
width, and an extinction ratio of ≥ 20 dB, into single-mode fiber.
•Bends in conventional Class IVa or IVb single-mode fiber will modify the state
of polarization. For this reason, the device launch pigtail must be deployed in a
straight configuration, and must not be moved during the polarization
measurement.
•The DUT should be spliced into the optical path to avoid varying the SOP,
otherwise connect the attenuator between the PC and the detector power
meter. Attenuators with connectors incur a greater PDL.
•The test procedures in Section 5.2.1 through Section 5.2.4 are to be followed, to
measure the particular optical characteristic of interest.
•Adjust the polarization controller to measure the worst-case value for the
characteristic of interest. The plane of polarization should be rotated through an
angle of ≥ 180°.
If using a PQH Controller:
•Rotate P until the maximum power is obtained.
•Alternatively, rotate Q and H to obtain the worst-case value for the
characteristic of interest.
•To determine ∆L, alternatively, rotate Q and H to obtain the highest power
level, and subtract from the lowest power level (from the previous step)
GR-910 Figure 5-7 Configuration for Measuring Polarization Dependent Loss
Optical
Source DUT Power
Meter
Polarization
Controller
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Performance Verification/Test Procedures February 3, 2005
5–16
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
5.2.7 Polarization-Mode Dispersion (PMD)
The measurement of PMD can be accomplished by the fixed analyzer method in
FOTP-113, the Jones matrix analysis in FOTP-122, or the interferometric method in
FOTP-124. There are commercially available measurement instruments cable of
measuring PDL and PMD.
GR-910 Figure 5-8 Mechanical Test Facility for Flex, Twist, Side Pull and Cable
Retention Tests
WEIGHTS
GUIDES
CAPSTAN
7.5 Cm DIA.
ATTENUATOR
TEST ARM
22-28 Cm
CABLE
OR
FIBER
90
+90
_
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Passive Optical Component Code (POCC)
6–1
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
6.0 Passive Optical Component Code (POCC)
6.1 Structure and Format
The Passive Optical Component Code is the Telcordia proposed descriptive code
which offers1 a quick reference to mechanical, electrical, and optical definitions in
a minimum number of characters. To accommodate LEC and service provider
procurement system software, the code length must not exceed 15 characters.
GR-910 O6-1 [74] The Passive Optical Component Code (POCC) characters as outlined in
GR-910 Table 6-1 should be imprinted on the component housing.
The code has two fields,
M1M2 − S1S2S3 A S4S5S6 S7S8S9S10S11S12
The first field, M1M2, is a manufacturer code. The following table lists the cable
manufacturer codes assigned by Telcordia based upon lists of manufacturers
provided to Telcordia by regions, LECs, and other service providers. The list is not
necessarily complete. There may be other manufacturers of similar products who
are not listed. No recommendation for or against any manufacturer is intended or
should be inferred from its presence or absence from this list. The list includes only
attenuator manufacturers.2
1. The POCC was adopted from SR-NWT-002014, Suggested Optical Cable Code (SOCC).
2. The following codes should be avoided as they are assigned to fiber cable and/or other component
manufacturers; BC, BI, BR, BT, CW, DI, DN, EB, EC, FG, GC, GS, LC, MC, OC, PC, PK, SR, SP, TF, TN.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Passive Optical Component Code (POCC) February 3, 2005
6–2
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Any manufacturers not on this list but who would like to be placed on it should
contact the appropriate region, LEC, service provider, or Telcordia.
GR-910 Table 6-1 Passive Optical Component Manufacturer Code POCC
Code Manufacturer Code Manufacturer
3M 3M ME Methode Electronics Inc.
AD ADC Telecommunications MO Molex Fiber Optic Interconnect
Technology
AF Alcoa-Fujikura
AI ATI MP MP Fiber Optics Inc,
AM Amphenol NE NEC Electronics
AO AOFR NS NSG America
AP AMP NT Northern Telecom
AR Aster OS Optotec Spa
AT AT&T OZ Oz Optics
CO Corning PD PD-LD Inc.
EB E x B Technology Inc, PO Physical Optics
ER Ericsson Components PS Porta Systems
ET E-TEK Dynamics RL Radiall
FE Furukawa Electric Co. Ltd. RC Radiant Communications Corp,
FN Fiber Network Solutions RS Rifocs
FS Fibersense & Signals SA Santec Corp.
FU Fujikura Ltd. SD Storm Products
FX Foxconn International Inc, SE Sumitomo Electric
GD Gould SM Sifam Ltd. (Selco)
IP Ipitek SO Seiko
JF JDS-Fitel (Furukawa) SR Siecor
LS Light Control Systems SS Siemens Stromburg-Carlson
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Passive Optical Component Code (POCC)
6–3
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
The second field, S1S2S3 S4S5S6 S7S8S9S10,S11 S12S13 is a structural description where
each alphanumeric character carries information about the component structure,
according to GR-910 Table 6-2.
The individual characters are described in the following tables. In all of the tables,
several valid alphanumeric characters are not used. These unused characters are
reserved for future use to permit the code to grow as component designs change.
One exception to this rule for unused characters is the treatment of the character X.
In any of the ten positions, this character means that the component is nonstandard
and the tables for that position do not apply. These tables only apply to components
which conform to the requirements for fiber optic attenuators as specified in this
document.
6.2 Component Type Character
Character S1 defines the type of component (see GR-910 Table 6-3).
GR-910 Table 6-2 POCC Character Description
Code Description
S1Component Type
S2Fiber type
S3Cable Type
S4Application
S5Application
S6Application
S7Configuration
S8Configuration
S9Configuration
S10 Configuration
S11 Configuration
S12 Configuration
S13 Configuration
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Passive Optical Component Code (POCC) February 3, 2005
6–4
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
6.3 Fiber Type and Operating Wavelength Region Character
S2 defines the fiber type (e.g., single-mode) and the usable wavelengths (i.e., the
wavelengths at which the component may operate). For components with no fiber
pigtails, S2 only indicates the component's usable wavelength region. See GR-910
Table 6-4.
The 1480-1580 and 980-1550 columns apply to components for use with optical fiber
amplifiers.
6.4 Cable Type Character
Character S3, describes the cable or fiber jacket type (GR-910 Table 6-5).
GR-910 Table 6-3 POCC Character S1
Code Component
AAttenuator
BConnector
CCoupler
FFilter
IIsolator
PPolarizer
SSwitch
TTerminator
WWDM
GR-910 Table 6-4 POCC Character S2
Fiber Type Usable Wavelength Regions (nm) and Codes
850 1300 850
-1300 1310 1550 1310
-1550 1480
-1580 980
-1550
Single-Mode Class IVa - - 0 1 2 3 4 5
Dispersion-Shifted Class IVb - - - - 6 7 8 9
Hybrid Class IVa-50/125 A B C D E F G H
50/125 Multimode K L M - - - - -
62.5/125 Multimode P Q R - - - - -
85/125 Multimode T W Y - - - - -
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Passive Optical Component Code (POCC)
6–5
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
6.5 Attenuation Value Characters
These characters are keyed to the Component Type S1 character, so that the
meaning of S4S5S6S7 may change for different components. For attenuators (S1 = A),
S4S5S6 S7 is a 3-digit integer from 1 to 100 defining the attenuation value for a fixed
attenuator or the minimum and maximum values for a variable attenuator in dB.
6.6 Application Character
S8 defines applications for which the component is designed (GR-910 Table 6-6).
Refer to GR-253-CORE for definitions of long-reach systems.
6.7 Configuration Characters
Characters S9-12 are keyed to the Component Type S1 character, so that their
meaning may change for different components. For attenuators (S1 = A), S 9-
10 indicate the reflectance value of the attenuator ranging from 1 to 99.
S11 S12 describe the optical connector type.
GR-910 Table 6-5 POCC Character S3
Code Cable Type
BFiber Bundle
LLoose Buffer
MFlat Matrix
RRibbon
SStandard Coated Fiber
(250 µm nominal)
TTight Buffer
3Ruggedized- 3 mm dia.
GR-910 Table 6-6 POCC Character S8
Code Application
AAM-VSB Analog Systems Only
DDigital Systems Only
HHybrid - for both Analog & Digital Systems
LLong-Reach Digital Systems Only
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Passive Optical Component Code (POCC) February 3, 2005
6–6
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
For example, for an attenuator with 40 dB reflectance and FC connectors
S9S10S11S12 = 40FF.
6.8 Example
The POCC WD-A3S 520140FF is interpreted as shown in GR-910 Table 6-7.
GR-910 Table 6-7 POCC Interpretation
Character Value Interpretation
M1M2WD Manufacturer is Widget Inc.
S1AComponent is a an Attenuator
S23Fiber is 1310-1550 nm single-mode
S3SFiber is 250 µm coated
S4S5S6S75201 Attenuation is variable 5-20 ± 1 dB
S8DAttenuator is for digital system applications
S9-12 40FF R=40 dB FC connectors
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program
7–1
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.0 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program
This section treats reliability and quality (R&Q) for optical attenuators from the
same perspective as other fiber optic passive components. Thus, it deals with the
overall assembled unit, manufacturing reliability, and other topics. Major points in
a minimum R&Q program are briefly discussed here, with details to be referenced
in GR-1221-CORE.
The criteria here are not meant to prevent a manufacturer from using alternative
approaches if testing of the assembled unit (e.g., used in a complete optical
attenuator package) and pass/fail criteria are at least as stringent as the methods
described here. Alternatives will also be necessary for future fully integrated
designs in which functionality is provided in a single “plug- and-play” adjunct (to the
platform transport system) that does not have any field-replaceable parts.
The philosophy and basic elements of reliability assurance are provided in
Section 7.1 and Section 7.2. The qualification and lot-to-lot controls criteria for
optical attenuators are detailed in Section 7.3. Section 7.4 contains criteria used if a
quality and reliability audit is performed.
7.1 Reliability Assurance Requirements Philosophy
Many of the criteria in this GR deal with necessary elements of a comprehensive
reliability assurance program; as such, they are clearly satisfied or not by the
component manufacturer's and/or equipment supplier's practices. However, many
other criteria deal with demonstration of device reliability or with levels of
confidence. The intent of these latter requirements and objectives can sometimes
be accomplished in alternative ways. While the qualification tests and screening
procedures in this GR have been developed to establish an appropriate baseline for
a comprehensive reliability assurance program, other techniques could prove to be
more cost-effective. However, this does not suggest that the Telcordia criteria
contained here can be satisfied by any other approach.
The difficulty of such alternative approaches involves the demonstration by the
manufacturer or supplier of their equivalency or effectiveness. Although certain
general guidelines can be described, specific steps to demonstrate this cannot be
determined in advance for every situation. Nevertheless, manufacturers and
suppliers are encouraged to investigate “improved” test methods and practices. To
avoid problems and possible disagreement later, Telcordia can be contacted to
resolve most questions prior to significant expenditures in special equipment or
testing by the manufacturer or supplier.
7.2 Overview of Reliability Assurance
Unlike functional or performance generic requirements, reliability assurance
criteria are seldom “yes or no” issues. There could be many ways of achieving the
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Reliability and Quality Assurance Program February 3, 2005
7–2
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
same end goal of reliable optical attenuators for use in a LEC or service provider
telecommunications network. The following sections first describe the tenets of a
comprehensive reliability assurance program, and then discuss the philosophy
behind the approach taken in this GR.
The basic reliability of fiber optic systems can be no better than the reliability of the
components contained in them. Moreover, it is generally impossible to thoroughly
test the performance and reliability of components once they are incorporated into
higher levels of assembly. It thus becomes necessary for product manufacturers and
equipment suppliers to set up programs at the component level to help ensure
necessary device reliability.
The major elements of a comprehensive reliability assurance program are:
•Vendor Qualification Programs
•Component Qualification Programs
•Lot-to-Lot Quality and Reliability Controls
•Feedback and Corrective Action Programs
•Storage and Handling
•Documentation.
The critical nature of optical attenuators, plus the rapid evolution of designs and
manufacturing practices, make such a program particularly important. The devices
used in a telecommunications system should be initially qualified and purchased
only from approved vendors. The reliability and quality of each lot should be tested
and analyzed. Any problem detected in the manufacturing processes or reported
from field applications should be examined and corrected. This information should
be fed back as the inputs for vendor and product qualification. Products should also
be stored properly, avoiding excessive heat and humidity. Finally, the reliability
assurance program should be fully documented to ensure consistency and
continuity. The elements of a complete reliability assurance program are depicted
in GR-910 Figure 7-1.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program
7–3
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.3 Qualification Criteria
The equipment manufacturer has the final responsibility for assuring that the
components meet the appropriate quality level, even the component manufacturer
may be the one that performs the reliability tests and documents the testing results.
If the equipment manufacturer relies on the component manufacturer to supply
reliability data, the equipment manufacturer needs to verify the accuracy of the data
by periodic audits.
7.3.0.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R7-1 [80] The equipment supplier shall perform or obtain verifiable data for the
qualification of optical attenuators, including characterization and reliability tests.
7.3.0.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
Not Applicable - the requirement is to verify that the supplier has data to support
product conformance, as would be obtained by completing a program in
accordance with this test plan document
7.3.0.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
Not applicable.
GR-910 Figure 7-1 Elements of a Comprehensive Reliability Assurance Program
Component
Reliability Assurance
Vendor
Qualification
Component
Qualification
Component
Lot-To-Lot
Q&R Controls
Storage &
Handling Documentation Feedback &
Corrective
Action
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Reliability and Quality Assurance Program February 3, 2005
7–4
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.3.0.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Not applicable.
7.3.0.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Not applicable.
7.3.0.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.3.0.1 of this document has not been met.
The criteria for requirement GR-910 R7-1 [80] was not determined. Conformance
is based on the equipment supplier performing or obtaining verifiable data for the
qualification of optical attenuators, including characterization and reliability tests
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
7.3.1 Characterization
7.3.1.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910)
Several acronyms are used in the detailed tables for device qualification. “LTPD”
refers to Lot Tolerance Percent Defective as described in Appendix B of Military
Specification MIL-M-38510F or in Appendix C of MIL-S-19500G.1 “SS” refers to a
suggested sample size appropriate for the specified LTPD. “C” indicates the
maximum number of failures allowed for that sample size.
GR-910 R7-2 [81] Optical attenuators shall be fully characterized for optical performance
as part of device qualification. The characterization must include mechanical,
electrical, and optical parameters. A sample size of at least 11 devices (LTPD of
20%) is required. A failure is defined as any component that does not meet all the
specified parametric limits.
1. The same information also may be found in Appendix A of IEC Pub. 747-10.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program
7–5
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Because of varieties of optical attenuator designs, the minimum set of parameters
for characterization is not included here. To avoid cost and poor reliability that
might occur later, Telcordia can be contacted for discussions to reach a consensus
on the parameters to be characterized.
GR-910 O7-3 [82] Optical attenuators data also should be obtained from the vendor (in-
house or external) on a much larger population (~ 50-200 units representing a
minimum of three different date codes). Distributions (minimum, maximum, mean,
and 3σ) of measured parameters should be compared to specification limits and
design requirements to assure that adequate margins exist.
7.3.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Determine the appropriate specification for attenuator characterization and use
the test procedures defined for selected parameters specific to the attenuator
under test
2. Verify that the test procedures address mechanical, environmental and optical
performance characteristics, such as optical bandpass, change in attenuation,
attenuation tolerance, attenuation increments and range, reflectance and PDL,
and PMD.
3. Verify that the sample size for test is at least 11 devices (LTPD of 20%), unless
otherwise specified by the end user (and if otherwise specified, fully document
any such deviation)
4. Analyze the characterization data obtained in accordance with the requirements
specific to the product under test and verify conformance, as well as
documenting any deviation from the criteria
5. Analyze vendor data on broader samplings of component performance
characteristics to assess the distribution of measured parameters to assure
adequate measurement margins are in evidence
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Reliability and Quality Assurance Program February 3, 2005
7–6
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.3.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
7.3.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Test configuration and conditions must be verified for the specific test and
applicable parameters based on Section 4 of this test plan and GR-910.
7.3.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Test apparatus must be verified for the specific attenuator and applicable
parameters based on the information provided in the appropriate areas of this
document. Some typical types of test apparatus for the performance of
characterizing optical components are provided below.
TP-910 Figure 7-1 Test Flowchart - Character Test (not from GR-910)
Does the product meet the
applicable criteria to
demonstrate conformance
to Section 7.3.1.1?
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Yes
Determine appropriate
criteria for product and
verify required optical
parameters addressed
Verify sampling size and
measured data to assure
parameters within spec
and with adequate margin
No
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program
7–7
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.3.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-1221)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.3.1.1 of this document has not been met.
The criteria for requirements GR-910 R7-2 [81] and GR-910 O7-3 [82] were not
determined. Conformance is based on the optical attenuators being fully
characterized for optical performance as part of device qualification.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
7.3.2 Reliability Tests
7.3.2.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R7-4 [83] Reliability tests for optical attenuators shall include mechanical/physical
tests as well as endurance tests. … Table 1 lists a minimum set of tests that must be
performed.
GR-910 R7-5 [84] Mechanical/optical performance tests shall be completed before and
after each of the reliability tests. Out of specifications shall be counted as failures.
Other pass/fail criteria, based on degradations in some key parameters, shall be
documented along with the testing methods.
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months –
Sensor for Tunable Multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months –
Broadband Stabilized Light
Source
Anritsu MG 922 A 12 months –
Optical Spectrum Analyzer Anritsu MS 9710 B 12 months –
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Reliability and Quality Assurance Program February 3, 2005
7–8
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Different groups of sample devices may be used for each test or the same sample
may be used for several tests, but the manufacturer must be aware that any failures
due to the cumulative degradation carried over from one test to the next shall be
counted as failures.
The conditional requirements in … Table 1 need only be conducted for uncontrolled
environment applications. Different time and temperature combinations may be
chosen by the supplier if the alternate test conditions are shown to be at least as
effective as those in this document. This often involves the use of models for
calculating an acceleration factor. Intrinsic failure mechanisms are defined as the
type modeled by the Arrhenius relationship (such as chemical reactions or
processes involving diffusion). Extrinsic failure mechanisms are characterized by
… Table 1 (R) Required Reliability Tests
Test Standard Conditions Sampling
[LTPD] Criterion
Mech. Shock EIA/TIA-455-2A 1.8 meters, 5
cycles
20% R
Vibration EIA/TIA-455-11A 20G, 10-2,000 Hz 20% R
Thermal Shock EIA/TIA-455-71 ∆T=100oC, 20
cycles
20% R
High Temperature Aging
(dry)
MIL-STD-883-D,
Method 1005,
85oC, <40%RH,
5000 hrs-qualif.
10,000 hrs-info.
dynamically
exercised
10% R
High Temperature Storage
(damp)
EIA/TIA-455-5A 75oC, 90%RH
2000 hrs-qualif.
5000 hrs-info.
10% R
Low Temperature Storage EIA/TIA-455-4A -40oC,
2500 hrs-qualif.
5000 hrs-info.
20% CR*
Temp. Cycling EIA/TIA-455-3A
or MIL-STD-
883D Method
1010
-40 to 75oC,
500 cycles-qualif.
1000 cycles-info.
20% R
Temp./Humidity Cycling IEC 68-2-38 -40 to 75oC, 5
cycles
20% CR
Salt Spray EIA/TIA-455-16A 20% CR
Water Immersion EIA/TIA-455-12A 20% CR
Airborne Contaminants ASTM B827-92 5 devices CR
* CR indicates a Conditional Requirement that is only necessary for products intended for
uncontrolled environments, except for Airborne Contaminants where CR indicates that this
test applies to specific products - see Section 4.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program
7–9
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
threshold-type failures, such as those resulting from mechanical impact, bending or
applied tension - in such cases, it is not appropriate to use the Arrhenius
relationship. The relative humidity is another important stress factor and its
acceleration factor has not been generally agreed upon in the industry. Any
questions on this need to be resolved prior to any extensive reliability testing.
GR-910 R7-6 [85] Technical justification of the acceleration aging factors by stresses, such
as temperature, humidity, or optical power, for different testing conditions is
required. Associated acceleration/deceleration factors must be clearly identified.
Some of the commercially available products in the market today are not
hermetically sealed. For these components, the liquid-to-liquid thermal shock test
might not be appropriate. However, additional tests are recommended if these non-
hermetic components are to be used in non-central office (CO) environments.
GR-910 R7-7 [86] For those components with non-hermetic packages, the thermal shock
test will not be required, but the damp heat testing duration must be increased to
5000 hours from the 2000 hour test for hermetic components.
The object of the dry and damp heat tests is to assess the effects of temperature and
humidity on the expected operating life of the component. In addition to the thermal
activation energy, the presence of water vapor at an elevated temperature produces
an accelerated aging effect.
GR-910 R7-8 [87] If technical data are not available in support of other values, an
activation energy of 0.3 eV shall be assumed for the dry heat test and an effective
activation energy of 0.6 eV shall be assumed for the damp heat test. In the latter
case, the higher activation energy accounts for the difference between the test's
high humidity and “average” operating conditions, such that a separate term for
humidity would not be included in the calculation of the acceleration factor.
Manufacturers may use a different activation energy or a different model for
calculating acceleration, if its use can be supported by empirical data. The empirical
data must be based on reliability testing or field returns, and shall be available for
review by the LECs, service providers or their representative.
There is very limited information on activation energies for optical attenuators. The
above values represent a conservative assumption and will be modified as more
data become available.
To demonstrate different acceleration models or activation energies, a matrix of
multiple temperatures and humidities would provide the most thorough
understanding (see GR-910 Table 7-1). However, as a minimum, or as the first tests
performed, three specific sets of conditions are usually required:
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Reliability and Quality Assurance Program February 3, 2005
7–10
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
GR-910 O7-9 [88] In order of priority, the following life tests should be performed as part
of any effort to validate alternative acceleration models or activation energies:
1. High temperature damp heat = 75°C, 90% RH (or 85°C, 85% RH)
2. High temperature dry heat = 85°C, ~ 16% RH
3. Moderate temperature damp heat = 45°C, 85% RH
Minimum sample size is 22 devices for each life test. Results should include
estimates of median life or mean-time-to-failure (MTTF), and a “spread” parameter
(e.g., standard deviation).
The purpose of the temperature cycling life test is to demonstrate the long-term
mechanical stability of the package.
GR-910 R7-10 [89] A temperature cycle life test shall be performed in accordance with the
procedures of Section 6.2.7 in GR-1221-CORE. The minimum and maximum
temperatures shall be at least − 40°C and + 75°C. The minimum sample size is 11
devices (LTPD of 20%). Results after 500 cycles shall be used for “passing” or
“failing” the test. Failures between 500 cycles and 1000 cycles shall be investigated
and corrective actions shall be implemented.
GR-910 R7-11 [90] Fiber pigtails and optical connectors shall comply with general
flammability requirements for materials used in telecommunications systems.
Detailed flammability criteria are given in GR-78-CORE and TR-NWT-000357. For
packages made of metal, glass or ceramic, destructive flammability testing is not
GR-910 Table 7-1 Test Matrix for Demonstrating Acceleration Factors [Relative
Humidity as a Function of Temperature and Absolute Humidity]
Absolute
Humidity [gm/
m3]
Temperature [°C]
25 40 45 55 65 75 85 95
19.2 85 38 30 19 12 8 6 4
42.5 sat 85 67 42 27 18 12 9
54.0 sat 85 53 34 23 16 11
86.0 sat 85 55 37 25 18
134.0 sat 85 57 39 27
200.0 sat 85 58 41
211.0 90 61 43
293.0 sat 85 60
419.0 sat 85
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program
7–11
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
required. However, a statement that the module (excluding the fiber optic pigtail)
will not support combustion and is capable of passing component flammability
requirements2 may be requested. Flammability testing of packages having external
epoxy, silicone or other organic materials is required.
7.3.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Verify that supplier subjects their components to mechanical/physical tests for
reliability such as those described in … Table 1 (and as described in Section 4
of this test plan which fully details the requirements and methods to be followed
in the performance of mechanical/physical tests).
2. Verify that optical performance testing is included in any reliability testing, and
that the test programs specify performance measurements be made both before
and after the test, and that test results are analyzed against the product specific
criteria documented for the particular product under test.
3. If alternate testing methods for accelerated aging, specifying alternate
activation energies, then analyze and verify the technical data and rationale
which justifies the use of such alternatives. Verify that a minimum of 22 samples
is used as part of the justification test data.
4. Verify that for those components with non-hermetic packages, the thermal
shock test is not performed (as it is not required for that case), but the damp
heat testing duration has been increased to 5000 hours from the 2000 hour test
for hermetic components
5. Verify that thermal cycling tests per Section 6.2.7 in GR-1221-CORE are
performed and any non-conformance are documented and addressed for
proposed corrective actions.
6. Verify that fiber pigtails and optical connectors comply with general
flammability requirements for materials used in telecommunications systems.
2. See Section 4.4.2.5 of TR-NWT-000357.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Reliability and Quality Assurance Program February 3, 2005
7–12
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.3.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
7.3.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Not Applicable - this section requires verifying that tests are performed such as
those described in Section 4 of this document. Section 4 contains the details on test
configuration, conditions and apparatus appropriate to the specified tests.
TP-910 Figure 7-2 Test Flowchart - Reliability Test (not from GR-910)
Does the product meet the
applicable criteria to
demonstrate conformance
to Section 7.3.2.1 criteria?
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Yes
Verify appropriate
reliability tests are
performed and optical
parameters measured
Use test results and
analysis to validate any
alternative
methodologies used in
reliability tests
No
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program
7–13
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.3.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Not Applicable - this section requires verifying that tests are performed such as
those described in Section 4 of this document. Section 4 contains the details on test
configuration, conditions and apparatus appropriate to the specified tests.
7.3.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.3.2.1 of this document has not been met.
The criteria for requirements GR-910 R7-4 [83], GR-910 R7-5 [84],
GR-910 R7-6 [85], GR-910 R7-7 [86], GR-910 R7-8 [87], GR-910 O7-9 [88],
GR-910 R7-10 [89] and GR-910 R7-11 [90] were not determined. Conformance is
based on the verification that the supplier has subjected their components to the
mechanical/physical tests for reliability as described in Section 4, verification that
optical performance testing is included in any reliability testing, verification that for
components with non-hermetic packages the damp heat testing duration has been
increased to 5000 hours from the 2000 hour test for hermetic components,
verification that thermal cycling tests per Section 6.2.7 in GR-1221-CORE are
performed and that any non-conformance are documented and addressed for
proposed corrective actions, and verification that fiber pigtails and optical
connectors comply with general flammability requirements for materials used in
telecommunications systems. If alternate testing methods for accelerated aging are
used, conformance is also based on the specification of alternate activation
energies as well as the analysis and verification of technical data and rationale to
justify the use of such alternatives. A minimum of 22 samples must be used as part
of the justification test data.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
7.3.3 Failure Rate Prediction
The failure rate is an important concept and provides useful information for a
reliability analysis. TR-332 contains the details on failure rate predictions. The
section here provides some specific information on failure rates for optical
attenuators.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Reliability and Quality Assurance Program February 3, 2005
7–14
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.3.3.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R7-12 [91] Equivalent time and temperature requirements shall be calculated
using the Arrhenius relationship. Technical justification of the activation energy
used for different conditions in temperature-dependent life tests is required.
Acceleration models (for failure mechanisms affected by other stresses, such as
optical power or humidity) shall be demonstrated (theoretically if possible and
empirically). Associated acceleration/deceleration factors must be clearly
identified.
A common form of the Arrhenius relationship is given below:
where
T1 and T2 are the temperatures in Kelvin,
ML is the median life at a given temperature,
Ea is the activation energy, and
k is Boltzmann's constant.
To date, the use of the Arrhenius relationship for some failure mechanisms
observed in passive components has not been proven. Unless the failure mechanism
and associated activation energy can be identified, the data generated using the
Arrhenius relationship is recognized as the best estimate. Section 7.3.2 gives default
values for activation energies if empirical data are not available.
GR-910 O7-13 [92] The acceleration aging factor from humidity is recommended to be
assessed by the equation below. Technical justification of the derivation is required.
where
H1 and H2 are the relative humidity levels in %,
ML is the median life at a given humidity, and
B and n are empirical constants.
GR-910 R7-14 [93] Wear-out and random failure rates and acceleration aging factors shall
be provided. The sources and data shall also be provided.
ML T2
()
ML T1
()
------------------------ Ea
k
--------1
T2
------- 1
T1
-------–
⋅exp=
ML H2
()
ML H1
()
------------------------- BH1
nBH2
n
–[]exp=
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program
7–15
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Wear-out failure rates are usually based on the aging test data obtained during the
formal qualification tests. The random failure rates are difficult to be adequately
determined solely based on the formal qualification testing data because these data
are usually limited and do not provide adequate basis for calculation. To
compensate the deficiency, pre-qualification testing data or data from other sources
can be used as supplemented database to calculate the random failure rate if they
are adequately documented.
Additional detailed reliability prediction procedure is documented in TR-332, in
which there are three prediction methods accepted. They are: Method I - parts
count; Method II - combining laboratory data with parts count; and Method III - field
tracking. It must be understood that adequate reliability assurance practices, as
outlined in TR-NWT-000357 and other related documents, provide the foundation
for failure rate predictions. Without the basic component reliability programs in
design and manufacturing, some failure mechanisms that might be real in the actual
field operations may not be included in the base failure rates of components
contained in TR-332. Without thorough qualification, field tracking data might be
misinterpreted because failure mechanisms and environment stresses are not
known. And without lot-to-lot controls, the reliability of the product might have
already shifted from those installed in fields. In short, failure rate predictions might
be very different from reality if the basic component reliability programs are not in
place at the manufacturer. In practice, the failure rate prediction for a specific
product is validated during a Telcordia reliability audit, which evaluates
manufacturer’s reliability programs against requirements in Telcordia reliability
documents. Since optical attenuators are relatively new devices to be deployed in
the fiber optic networks, there is virtually no public failure rate information existing
today. Besides, there is no standard end-of-life definition for laboratory life tests.
Based on very limited preliminary proprietary laboratory testing results, Telcordia
estimates the failure rate for optical attenuators to be in the range around
5000 FITs. As technology makes progress and more data becomes available,
Telcordia believes the failure rates will come down dramatically to the range where
field installation will be practical. At that time, Telcordia will update the failure
rates in this document.
GR-910 O7-15 [94] To simplify review (by customers or their representatives) of failure
rate predictions, the format in … Table 2 is recommended for use by device
manufacturers and/or equipment suppliers.
… Table 2 (O) Sample Format for Reporting Failure Rate Predictions
Item Value
Median Life (ML) @ 40°C years
Standard Deviation (σ)
Wear-Out Failure Rate (λ WO) @ 40°C FITs*
Wear-Out Activation Energy (Ea) eV
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Reliability and Quality Assurance Program February 3, 2005
7–16
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
GR-910 R7-16 [95] The testing data and supporting evidence for … Table 2 shall be
documented and available for review at the request of a LEC, service provider or its
representative.
… Table 2 is most useful if there is only one dominant failure mechanism, which
might not be valid for all component designs and technologies. In addition, the
failure rate might vary over time according to the failure distribution, for which
there is limited data and currently no consensus candidate. In any case, … Table 2
still provides valuable information for a reliability analysis, and therefore, the
information in … Table 2 is recommended to be provided.
GR-910 R7-17 [96] Unless otherwise specified, all failures observed in qualification testing
must normally be counted and must be reported, regardless of the failure mode.
Omission of any failure from test results must be clearly justified and must be
reviewed with the LEC, service provider or its representative.
Although reliability tests are usually designed to detect one type of failure
mechanism, other unexpected failure mechanisms often occur as well, and should
not be excluded from the test results. Exceptions are accidental damage or
extraordinary circumstances, such as a fiber pigtail that is broken due to
mishandling.
GR-910 O7-18 [97] … Table 3 provides the recommended format for reporting the status
of all reliability tests.
Basis of Predictions (field data, life test, theory)
Random Failure Rate (λ R) @ 40°C FITs*
Random Failure Activation Energy (Ea) eV
Basis of Predictions (field data, life test, theory)
* A FIT is a failure unit equivalent to the number of failures per billion operating hours.
… Table 2 (O) Sample Format for Reporting Failure Rate Predictions
Item Value
… Table 3 (O) Sample Report Format for Reliability Test Status
Test* Date
Completed Sample
Size Number of
Failures Test
Passed?
Mechanical Shock
Vibration
Thermal Shock
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program
7–17
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Completing this summary table does not relieve the manufacturer or supplier of
satisfying the respective requirements for each test nor of reporting the detailed
results in a comprehensive report, as described elsewhere in this test plan.
GR-910 R7-19 [98] The testing data and supporting evidence for … Table 3 shall be
documented and available for review at the request of a LEC, service provider or its
representative.
7.3.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Verify time and temperature requirements are calculated using the Arrhenius
relationship. Technical justification of the activation energy used for different
conditions in temperature-dependent life tests is required.
2. Verify that acceleration models are demonstrated (theoretically if possible and
empirically). Associated acceleration/deceleration factors must be clearly
identified.
3. Verify that acceleration aging factors from humidity are assessed by the
equation shown. Technical justification of the derivation is required.
4. Verify that wear-out and random failure rates and acceleration aging factors are
provided. The sources and data shall also be provided.
5. Verify that to simplify review (by customers or their representatives) of failure
rate predictions, the format in … Table 2 is used by device manufacturers and/
or equipment suppliers
High Temp. Storage (Dry)
High Temp. Storage (Damp)
Low Temp. Storage
Temp. Cycle Endurance
Temp./Humidity Cycling
Salt Spray
Water Immersion
Airborne Contaminants
… Table 3 (O) Sample Report Format for Reliability Test Status
Test* Date
Completed Sample
Size Number of
Failures Test
Passed?
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Reliability and Quality Assurance Program February 3, 2005
7–18
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
6. Verify that the testing data and supporting evidence for … Table 2 is
documented and available for review at the request of a LEC, service provider
or its representative
7. Verify that … Table 3 is used as the format for reporting the status of all
reliability tests.
7.3.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 7-3 Test Flowchart - Failure Rate Prediction Test (not from
GR-910)
Does the product meet the
applicable criteria to
demonstrate conformance
to Section 7.3.3.1 criteria?
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Yes
No
Verify appropriate
reliability tests are
performed and optical
parameters measured
Use test results and
analysis to validate any
alternative
methodologies used in
reliability tests
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program
7–19
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.3.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Not Applicable - this section requires verifying that tests are performed such as
those described in Section 4 of this document and making specified calculations.
Section 4 contains the details on test configuration, conditions and apparatus
appropriate to the specified tests needed to support these criteria.
7.3.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Not Applicable - this section requires verifying that tests are performed such as
those described in Section 4 of this document. Section 4 contains the details on test
configuration, conditions and apparatus appropriate to the specified tests.
7.3.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.3.3.1 of this document has not been met.
The criteria for requirements GR-910 R7-12 [91], GR-910 O7-13 [92],
GR-910 R7-14 [93], GR-910 O7-15 [94], GR-910 R7-16 [95], GR-910 R7-17
[96], GR-910 O7-18 [97] and GR-910 R7-19 [98] were not determined.
Conformance is based on the verification that the time and temperature
requirements are calculated using the Arrhenius relationship, verification that the
acceleration models are demonstrated, verification that the acceleration aging
factors from humidity are assessed by the equation shown in O7-13 [92], verification
that wear-out and random failure rates and acceleration aging factors are provided,
verification that the format in … Table 2 is used by device manufacturers and/or
equipment suppliers to simplify review of failure rate predictions, verification that
the testing data and supporting evidence for … Table 2 is documented and available
for review at the request of a LEC, service provider or its representative, and
verification that … Table 3 is used as the format for reporting the status of all
reliability tests.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
7.3.4 Optical Adhesives
Qualification of optical adhesives is covered in Section 4.3 of GR-1221-CORE.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Reliability and Quality Assurance Program February 3, 2005
7–20
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.3.5 Quality Assurance and Lot Controls
Functional criteria for optical attenuators are contained in Section 4. These same
parametric criteria apply to quality assurance (i.e., incoming inspection). Not all
devices have to be tested against all of these parameters, as described below.
7.3.5.1 Visual Inspection
7.3.5.1.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R7-20 [99] Incoming lots of optical attenuators shall be visually inspected on at
least a sample basis (to be determined in accordance with a statistical sampling
plan established by the equipment supplier).
GR-910 O7-21 [100] Visual inspection (or another step in lot acceptance procedures)
should check at least for the following:
A. Package condition
B. Required documentation
C. Product appearance/condition
D. Product identification/marking
E. Inspection of connectors or fiber-pigtails.
These inspection criteria are consistent with the items that would be addressed in
a quality technology review, as described in Section 7.4.
7.3.5.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Verify the sampling plan/sample numbers in use for the test program
2. Visually inspect incoming lots of components for adherence to the supplier
documented quality processes, which in some cases may have additional
specifications in accordance with product type specific criteria documents
3. Inspect and assess the following conditions: package condition, inclusion of
required documentation, product appearance/condition, product identification/
marking, and inspection of connectors or fiber-pigtails.
4. Document the observations and identify any deviations from expected
conditions
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program
7–21
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.3.5.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-1221)
7.3.5.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-1221)
Not Applicable
7.3.5.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-1221)
Not Applicable
TP-910 Figure 7-4 Test Flowchart - Visual Inspection Test (not from GR-910)
Does the product meet the
applicable criteria to
demonstrate conformance
to Section 7.3.5.1.1?
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Yes
No
Determine appropriate
criteria for product and
verify required quality
parameters addressed
Inspect incoming lots of
the product to for
condition in accordance
with quality process
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Reliability and Quality Assurance Program February 3, 2005
7–22
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.3.5.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-1221)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.3.5.1.1 of this document has not been met.
The criteria for requirements GR-910 R7-20 [99] and GR-910 O7-21 [100] were
not determined. Conformance is based on the verification of the sampling plan/
sample numbers in use for the test program, visual inspection of incoming lots of
components for adherence to the supplier documented quality processes, and the
inspection and assessment of: package condition, inclusion of required
documentation, product appearance/condition, product identification/marking, and
inspection of connectors or fiber-pigtails.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
7.3.5.2 Optical Testing
The full set of optical characteristics need not be measured on each device, but may
be extrapolated from a representative subset of data (the manufacturer must be
able to justify the subset chosen). Criteria for ship-to-stock practices are given in
Section 5.1.5 of TR-NWT-000357.
7.3.5.2.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R7-22 [101] Parameters specified in Section 4 form the minimum set of optical
parameters which must be guaranteed. If 100% testing for this purpose is not
performed, adequate data shall be collected and a statistically justified sampling
plan must be established. This sampling test program must be approved in writing
from the LEC, service provider or its representative.
7.3.5.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Determine the appropriate specification for component performance
characterization and use the test procedures from Section 4 as defined for the
specified parameters.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program
7–23
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
2. Verify that the test procedures address optical bandpass, change in attenuation,
attenuation tolerance, attenuation increments and range, reflectance and PDL,
and PMD.
3. Verify that the sample size for test is at least 11 devices (LTPD of 20%), unless
otherwise specified by the end user (and if otherwise specified, fully document
any such deviation)
4. Analyze the characterization data obtained in accordance with the requirements
specific to the product under test and verify conformance, as well as
documenting any deviation from the criteria
7.3.5.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 7-5 Test Flowchart - Optical Test (not from GR-910)
Does the product meet the
applicable criteria to
demonstrate conformance
to Section 7.3.5.2.1?
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Yes
No
Determine appropriate
criteria for product and
verify required optical
parameters addressed
Verify sampling size and
measured data to assure
parameters within
specifications
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Reliability and Quality Assurance Program February 3, 2005
7–24
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.3.5.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Test configuration and conditions must be verified for the specific test and
applicable parameters based on Section 4.
7.3.5.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Test apparatus must be verified for the specific test and applicable parameters
based on Section 4. Some typical types of test apparatus for the performance of
characterizing optical components are provided below.
7.3.5.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.3.1.1 of this document has not been met.
The criteria for requirement GR-910 R7-4 [83] was not determined. Conformance
is based on the verification that the test procedures address optical bandpass,
change in attenuation, attenuation tolerance, attenuation increments and range,
reflectance and PDL, and PMD. Conformance is also based on the verification that
the sample size for testing is at least 11 devices (LTPD of 20%).
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months –
Sensor for Tunable Multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months –
Broadband Stabilized Light
Source
Anritsu MG 922 A 12 months –
Optical Spectrum Analyzer Anritsu MS 9710 B 12 months –
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program
7–25
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.3.5.3 Stress Screening
Stress screening helps eliminate components which have any instability in the
optical alignment of the components or have built-in mechanical stresses due to
improper assembly operations.
7.3.5.3.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R7-23 [102] All optical attenuators shall be subjected to a temperature cycle
screen. The minimum requirements consist of 10 cycles between temperature limits
of at least –40°C and +75°C; if these are outside the component's specifications, the
minimum- and maximum-specified storage temperatures shall be used.
GR-910 O7-24 [103] The demonstration of the effectiveness of alternate temperature cycle
conditions for screening should include first characterizing devices after the
proposed number of temperature cycles and again after 10 cycles, presumably
showing that no significant degradation nor additional failures occurred. The
demonstration should be proved on adequate samples over multiple lots.
GR-910 O7-25 [104] All optical attenuators should be subjected to a temperature humidity
screen. The minimum requirement is 72 hours at +75°C and 90% RH.
GR-910 R7-26 [105] Optical criteria shall be measured before and after screening. Any
“major” changes (as defined and documented by the equipment supplier, in addition
to pass/fail criteria) shall result in rejection of a device.
GR-910 O7-27 [106] The pass/fail criteria should be no more than 20% changes on the
specified parameters.
GR-910 O7-28 [107] The manufacturer should record the optical criteria before and after
screening on a sample of components as a production audit.
7.3.5.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Determine the appropriate specification for component performance
characterization and use the test procedures from Section 4 as defined for the
specified parameters.
2. Verify that the test procedures address optical bandpass, change in attenuation,
attenuation tolerance, attenuation increments and range, reflectance and PDL,
and PMD.
3. Verify that temperature cycling testing is performed in accordance with the test
parameters as described above. Alternatively, the criteria and test method
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Reliability and Quality Assurance Program February 3, 2005
7–26
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
described in GR-1221, Section 6.2.7 may be used with an additional parameter
measurements added after completion of 10 cycles.
4. Analyze the characterization data obtained in accordance with the requirements
specific to the product under test and verify conformance, as well as
documenting any deviation from the criteria
7.3.5.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
TP-910 Figure 7-6 Test Flowchart - Stress Screening Test (not from GR-910)
Does the product meet the
applicable criteria to
demonstrate conformance
to Section 7.3.5.3.1
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Yes
No
Determine appropriate
criteria for product and
verify required optical
parameters addressed
Verify sampling size and
measured data to assure
parameters within spec
and with adequate margin
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program
7–27
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.3.5.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Test configuration and conditions must be verified for the specific test and
applicable parameters based on Section 4.
7.3.5.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Test apparatus must be verified for the specific test and applicable parameters
based on Section 4. Some typical types of test apparatus for the performance of
characterizing optical components are provided below.
7.3.5.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.3.5.3.1 of this document has not been met.
The criteria for requirements GR-910 R7-23 [102], GR-910 O7-24 [103],
GR-910 O7-25 [104], GR-910 R7-26 [105], GR-910 O7-27 [106] and
GR-910 O7-28 [107] were not determined. Conformance is based on the
verification that the test procedures address optical bandpass, change in
attenuation, attenuation tolerance, attenuation increments and range, reflectance
and PDL, and PMD. Conformance is also based on the verification that temperature
cycling testing is performed in accordance with the test parameters described in
Section 7.3.5.3.1.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
Description Supplier Model Calibration
Cycle Calibration
Due Date.
Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months –
Sensor for Tunable Multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months –
Broadband Stabilized Light
Source
Anritsu MG 922 A 12 months –
Optical Spectrum Analyzer Anritsu MS 9710 B 12 months –
Thermal Chamber ESPEC 12 months
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Reliability and Quality Assurance Program February 3, 2005
7–28
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.3.6 Optical Adhesives
Quality assurance and incoming inspection of optical adhesives are covered in
Section 4.3 of GR-1221-CORE, Generic Reliability Assurance Requirements for
Fiber Optic Branching Components.
7.3.7 Optical Connectors
The requirements are described in GR-326-CORE, Generic Requirements for
Single-Mode Optical Fiber Connectors.
7.3.8 Optical Fiber
Fiber leads on the components must be compatible with fiber used in a LEC, or
service provider network. Criteria are given in GR-20-CORE, Generic Requirements
for Optical Fiber and Fiber Optic Cable and GR-409-CORE, Generic Requirements
for Premises Fiber Optic Cable.
7.4 Quality and Reliability Criteria
The generic criteria for this section apply if a quality and reliability audit is being
performed.
7.4.0.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R7-29 [108] The supplier shall, on request, make documentation available that
describes:
1. The quality program used in the manufacture of the product. This shall include
but not be limited to controls, procedures and standards for component
reliability assurance, incoming material inspection procedures, product
manufacture, in-process testing, equipment calibration and maintenance, final
product inspection and testing, initial and periodic qualification testing, and
control of nonconforming materials/product. The component reliability
assurance program shall address vendor selection/qualification, component
qualification, and lot controls (incoming inspection, source inspection, and
where appropriate, ship-to-stock practices).
2. The installation, operation and maintenance of the product.
3. Support procedures for the product once it is in use. This includes items such
as repair, technical assistance, training and a means of notifying the customer
of problems and/or changes in the product.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program
7–29
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.4.0.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Verify that upon request, the supplier can make documentation available that
describes the quality program used in the manufacture of the product, including
controls, procedures and standards for component reliability assurance,
incoming material inspection procedures, product manufacture, in-process
testing, equipment calibration and maintenance, final product inspection and
testing, initial and periodic qualification testing, and control of nonconforming
materials/product.
2. Verify that the component reliability assurance program addresses vendor
selection/qualification, component qualification, and lot controls (incoming
inspection, source inspection, and where appropriate, ship-to-stock practices).
3. Verify that the installation, operation and maintenance documentation for the
product is available
4. Verify that support procedures for in use products are available, including
items such as repair, technical assistance, training and a means of notifying the
customer of problems and/or changes in the product.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Reliability and Quality Assurance Program February 3, 2005
7–30
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.4.0.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
7.4.0.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Not applicable.
7.4.0.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Not applicable.
TP-910 Figure 7-7 Test Flowchart - Quality and Reliability Test (not from GR-91 0)
Does the
product conform to the
criteria listed in
Section 7.4.0.1?
Document Results and
go to next criteria
section
Document
nonconformances and
address corrective
actions with supplier
Yes
No
Quality and reliability
assurance
documentation is
provided by supplier
Review documentation to
verify inclusion of the
required information
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program
7–31
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
7.4.0.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.4.0.1 of this document has not been met.
The criteria for requirement GR-910 R7-4 [83] was not determined. Conformance
is based on the verification that upon request, the supplier can make documentation
available that describes the quality program used in the manufacture of the product,
including controls, procedures and standards for component reliability assurance,
incoming material inspection procedures, product manufacture, in-process testing,
equipment calibration and maintenance, final product inspection and testing, initial
and periodic qualification testing, and control of nonconforming materials/
products. Conformance is also based on the verification that the component
reliability assurance program addresses vendor selection/qualification, component
qualification, and lot controls. Conformance is also based on the verification that
the installation, operation and maintenance documentation for the product is
available, as well as verification that support procedures for in use products are
available, including items such as repair, technical assistance, training and a means
of notifying the customer of problems and/or changes in the product.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
7.4.1 Reliability Assurance
Reliability assurance criteria for fiber optic optical attenuators are contained in
Section 7. These include various component qualification practices (related
primarily to design reliability issues) and lot-to-lot controls, such as screening
requirements (which deal mostly with manufacturing reliability).
7.4.1.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R7-30 [109] The supplier shall allow the performance of a Reliability Audit at the
production facilities where the product is manufactured and assembled.
Performed in much the same way as work on a transport system,3 this Reliability
Audit would look at (1) predicted reliability; (2) materials, including physical design
and reliability assurance of any piece parts comprising the assembled optical
attenuator; (3) manufacturing and assembly; and (4) testing, including initial
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Reliability and Quality Assurance Program February 3, 2005
7–32
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
qualification tests and routine manufacturing tests. TR-NWT-000357 contains some
additional fundamental reliability assurance requirements that may be applied to
optical attenuators. Additional reliability assurance activities could be developed
and included in a Reliability Audit to meet the needs of a LEC or service provider.4
GR-910 R7-31 [110] The supplier shall have a program in place to monitor both the early-
life and long-term reliability of the product. The program shall include documented
procedures for analysis, testing, and measurement of reliability. The reliability data
shall be made available on request.
7.4.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Verify that supplier has authorized an onsite audit of reliability assurance
practices at the manufacturing/assembling site.
2. Verify that supplier has appropriate reliability monitoring programs in place as
described above.
7.4.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
Not applicable.
7.4.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Not applicable.
7.4.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Not applicable.
7.4.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.4.1.1 of this document has not been met.
The criteria for requirements GR-910 R7-30 [109] and GR-910 R7-31 [110] were
not determined. Conformance is based on the verification that the supplier has
authorized an onsite audit of reliability assurance practice at the manufacturing/
3. See Special Report SR-NWT-001907, Transport Reliability Analysis Generic Requirements (TRAGG),
Issue 1, October 1991.
4. See GR-1252-CORE, Quality System Generic Requirements for Hardware.
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Issue 1, Revision 4 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators
February 3, 2005 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program
7–33
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
assembling site, and verification that the supplier has appropriate reliability
monitoring programs in place as described in Section 7.4.1.1.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
7.4.2 Quality Technology Program
In addition to the reliability assurance criteria in Section 7 and in TR-NWT-000357,
a supplier of telecommunications systems or components is expected to have a
comprehensive quality assurance program in place. Detailed criteria for such a
program are given in GR-1252-CORE, Quality System Generic Requirements for
Hardware. Conformance to those criteria can be ascertained through a Quality
System Audit or (partially) through supplier-provided data. Quality can also be
assessed by “audits” of actual product or various data.
7.4.2.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910)
GR-910 R7-32 [111] The supplier's manufacturing process and associated quality
assurance systems, as they relate to products covered by this document, shall be
subject to periodic quality process and finished product audits.
These audits may include the following:
1. The supplier providing end product test/measurement results as mutually
agreed upon prior to shipment.
2. An audit of the ongoing implementation of the supplier's documented quality
program.
3. Auditing a product sample when it is ready for shipment (after all supplier
quality checks have been completed) for at least the following:
A. Appearance/condition
B. Identification/marking
C. Inspection of connector plugs or adaptors
D. Any or all the performance criteria in Section 4 of this document
E. Packaging
F. Documentation
502-1198 Rev A
Confidential — Restricted Access
Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Issue 1, Revision 4
Reliability and Quality Assurance Program February 3, 2005
7–34
DA-1543
Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential — Restricted Access
See confidentiality restrictions on title page.
Periodic product quality conformance inspection (QCI) of product samples for all
of the items 3a-f shown above. The test frequency shall be once per year unless
otherwise specified.
7.4.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910)
1. Verify that suppliers quality processes and programs are subject to periodic
audits for conformance.
7.4.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910)
Not applicable.
7.4.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910)
Not applicable.
7.4.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910)
Not applicable.
7.4.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910)
Conformance/Nonconformance
Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.4.2.1 of this document has not been met.
The criteria for requirement GR-910 R7-4 [83] was not determined. Conformance
is based on the verification that the suppliers quality processes and programs are
subject to periodic audits for conformance.
Failure History
Not applicable.
Disposition of Nonconformance
Not applicable.
Test Data
Not applicable.
